lm_proc_gd

Library ManagerTM Process GuideDxDesigner to Expedition Flow; Design Capture/DesignView to Expedition Flow Release EXP2005 SPac1 Copyright  Mentor Graphics Corporation 2005 - 2006 All rights reserved. This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation. The original recipient of this document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only, provided that this entire notice appears in all copies. In duplicating any part of this document, the recipient agrees to make every reasonable effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information. This document is for information and instruction purposes. Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice, and the reader should, in all cases, consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been made. The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers. No representation or other affirmation of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor Graphics whatsoever. MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT, EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND 03/97 U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The SOFTWARE and documentation have been developed entirely at private expense and are commercial computer software provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject to the restrictions set forth in the license agreement provided with the software pursuant to DFARS 227.72023(a) or as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. Contractor/manufacturer is: Mentor Graphics Corporation 8005 S.W. Boeckman Road, Wilsonville, Oregon 97070-7777. Telephone: 503.685.7000 Toll-Free Telephone: 800.592.2210 Website: www.mentor.com SupportNet: www.mentor.com/supportnet Contact Your Technical Writer: www.mentor.com/supportnet/documentation/reply_form.cfm TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos and service marks ("Marks") used herein are the property of Mentor Graphics Corporation or other third parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior written consent of Mentor Graphics or the respective third-party owner. The use herein of a thirdparty Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product, but is intended to indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A current list of Mentor Graphics’ trademarks may be viewed at: www.mentor.com/terms_conditions/trademarks.cfm. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/). This product includes software licensed under the Sun Public License. Covered code available upon request. This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley, and its contributors. Table of Contents Chapter 1 Library Manager Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Production Flows Supported by Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is a Central Library?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing a Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the WDIR Variable on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Central Libraries for Use on Linux and UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Operating Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supporting Mixed Operating System Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Linux and UNIX Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Central Library Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC/DV to Expedition PCB Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DxDesigner to Expedition Library Manager Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Library Manager Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Workspace Tree Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Libraries Tab (Project Workspace Tree) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Object Associations in a Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching/Finding Objects in the Project Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 Using Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Central Library and Selecting a Production Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking Library Manager, Creating a New Central Library, and Selecting a Flow Type Opening an Existing Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Central Library Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subdirectories and Files Created by Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging Parts Using a Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping Expedition Device Data to DxDesigner Device Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking Library Manager on an Existing Central Library (pre-EXP2005) . . . . . . . . Establishing Common Properties in a Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Property Verification Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Central Library Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Partition from the Menubar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cell Partitions from the Project Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Part Partition from the Project Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Partition Search Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unreserving Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Units Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-15 1-17 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-14 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-17 2-19 2-20 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 iii Table of Contents Setting Up Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Library Services to Import DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . What if a Partition is in Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulating Objects in the Workspace Tree that are Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Parts, Symbols, Cells, Padstacks and Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Library Services to Import DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . Importing DxD Symbols into a Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) . . . . . . . . . Creating the 74F244_Half Symbol (DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbol Editor) . . . Drawing the Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Pin Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Symbol Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow). . . . . Creating a 74f244_half Symbol in Dx Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Symbol Editor Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Fill Color, Rectangle, Outline Area, and Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Pins and Defining Pin Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Pin Numbers and Properties to Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Device, Package Type and Other Attributes (Dx Symbol Editor). . . . . . . . Renaming a Dx Symbol in the Project Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Symbol from the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Pads, Holes, and Padstacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Surface Mount Padstack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building a Surface Mount Padstack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building a Through-Hole Padstack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Associated Pads and Holes in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Pad and Holes Via the Workspace Tree Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Padstack Elements in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Pins and Cell Graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cells in the SOIC Partition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Drawing in Cell Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a 74F244 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Pin Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Alternate Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Pin Names to the Half Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing and Assigning Pin Names to the Full Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Pin Names to the Full Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Model Types in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Model File Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Model File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Editing a Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv 2-22 2-23 2-24 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-27 2-29 2-30 2-31 2-32 2-34 2-35 2-36 2-37 2-39 2-42 2-44 2-47 2-50 2-52 2-54 2-55 2-55 2-57 2-58 2-62 2-62 2-63 2-65 2-65 2-67 2-70 2-72 2-74 2-74 2-81 2-83 2-85 2-86 2-88 2-90 2-90 2-91 2-92 2-94 2-95 2-96 2-96 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Table of Contents Using the Modify Pins Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Objects in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Padstack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Objects in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Objects and Partitions from the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using File Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3 Using PM Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking and Configuring Parts Manager Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Parametric Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping Properties to Parameters in Parts Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Properties to Parts Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping Properties to Parameters in Parts Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Parameters from One Parametric Table to Another Table . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming Parametric Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Parametric Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Parametric Tables from ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Part Numbers to the PM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Part Numbers from the PM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting PPS Data into the PM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Central Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Symbol Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cell Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Parts Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Library Services to Import Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Library Services to Import Padstacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Library Services to Import Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Library Services to Import Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Library Services to Import Data from Another Central Library File . . . . . . . Adding Parametric Data to Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing a Parametric Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Parametric Data to an ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Parametric Data from the PM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Parameter to the Parametric Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Parametric Data into the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Part Number in the PM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking the Parts Manager Validation Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correcting Problems Detected by the Parts Manager Validation Utility . . . . . . . . . Using the Property Definition Editor to Correct Tolerance Property Problems. . . . Using the Property Definition Editor to Correct Cell Name Property Problems . . . Using the Property Definition Editor to Add Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using PM Administrator to Correct Property Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-invoking the Parts Manager Validation Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 2-99 2-101 2-101 2-102 2-103 2-104 3-1 3-1 3-4 3-5 3-8 3-12 3-14 3-15 3-17 3-17 3-21 3-24 3-29 3-33 3-34 3-39 3-41 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-45 3-47 3-49 3-52 3-55 3-55 3-55 3-57 3-62 3-64 3-68 3-70 3-71 3-72 3-72 3-73 3-74 3-77 3-79 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 v Table of Contents Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using PM Administrator to Create Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Part Number Information to the Parts Database Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Part Editor to Verify Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the PM/PDB Synchronization Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Parts Manager Batch Update Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Attachment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Attachment Data to a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Attachment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Description to Attachment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing PPS Data With Attachment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting / Logging Out of PMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4 Implementing a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Design Project in Design Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the New Project Wizard to Create a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New DC/DV Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking a Central Library With a Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing DC/DV Symbols and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Devices in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compiling and Packaging the DC/DV Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compiling and Packaging the DC/DV Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Design in DxDesigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a DxDesigner Project/Linking to Central Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New DxD Project and Linking to a Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching a Symbol Library to a DxD Project Search Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Schematic Workspace in DxDesigner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Symbols to a DxD Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compiling and Packaging the DxD Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Expedition PCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking Expedition PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening a New PCB Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swapping Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushing from Top Cell to Bottom Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking Reusable Block Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Logical/Physical Reusable Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Reusable Block Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Reusable Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Reusable Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79 3-79 3-84 3-88 3-89 3-91 3-97 3-98 3-99 3-100 3-101 3-103 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-11 4-13 4-14 4-14 4-17 4-19 4-20 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-24 4-25 4-27 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-35 4-36 4-39 4-42 4-42 vi Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Table of Contents Renaming a Reusable Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Reusable Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5 Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Layout Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using IBIS Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking IBIS Librarian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking Visual IBIS Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using IBIS Functionality in Part Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using IBIS Functionality in Library Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Symbol Editor for DC/DV Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Symbol Editor for DxD Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Padstack Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Library PDF Documenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a User-defined Script or Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening an Existing User-defined Script or Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using DxDatabook Data Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Material / Process Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performing Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking the Migration Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Target Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Migration Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a List of Symbol Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for Symbol Libraries in a Specified Directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching DxD Projects for Symbol Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Confirming Migration Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Migrated Symbols to a Different Central Library Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking the DxD Project Translation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting DxD Projects to Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Local Libraries in DxD Projects (Not Translated to a Central Library) . . Appendix B Using Design Architect with Expedition Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translating a DA Schematic to Expedition PCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 4-45 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-12 5-13 5-14 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-5 A-7 A-10 A-13 A-13 A-14 A-14 A-14 A-16 A-18 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 vii Table of Contents Appendix C Upgrading Central Libraries for Linux and UNIX Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is a DxDatabook User Configuration (*.dbc) File? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Parametric Databases on Supported Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to Parametric Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an ODBC Data Source on Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Configuration (*.dbc) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a DxDatabook (*.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) . . . . Creating a New, Empty DxDatabook Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New DxDatabook Configuration from an Existing Configuration . . . . . Adding Component Libraries to the Configuration (*.dbc) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Table to a Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Tables to a Library Configuration Using WWW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving DxDatabook User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Other Library Configuration Dialog Box Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Central Library Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing DxDatabook Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Table Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Properties to New Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Database Table Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Database Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Parametric Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performing Simple Searches (Search Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heterogeneous Symbol Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DxDesigner-driven and Part-driven Generic and Non-generic Hetero Devices Supported in the DxD-Expedition Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export the Part Entry (or Entries) to ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify the Part Entry in an ASCII Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing the Modified Part Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 4 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using DxD Symbols (Non-generic Hetero Type 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central Library Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint Editor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expedition PCB Pin Swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swappable Sub-Gates / PinSets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Swap Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii C-1 C-1 C-2 D-1 D-1 D-2 D-2 D-3 D-3 D-8 D-9 D-9 D-11 D-12 D-15 D-25 D-26 D-26 D-27 D-28 D-30 D-30 D-33 D-33 D-35 D-37 D-39 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-2 E-3 E-5 E-6 E-23 E-25 E-25 E-26 E-29 E-30 E-32 E-33 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Table of Contents Part Writer (Hetero Type 2 and/or 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unsupported DxD-Expedition Library Manager Flow Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the DxDesigner Symbol Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guidelines for Creating Symbols with DxDesigner (DxD-Expedition Flow). . . . . . . Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Pins and Assigning Pin Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Device, Package Type and Other Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging a DxD Schematic Using the Netlist-based Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix G Library Manager Automation Scripting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Custom Scripts and Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary Index End-User License Agreement E-33 E-33 F-1 F-1 F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-9 F-14 G-1 G-1 G-1 G-2 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 ix . . . . Figure 2-29. . . . . New Cell Partition Dialog Box . . . . . . DxD-Expedition Flow Using Library Manager . . . Figure 2-5. . . . . . . . . Figure 2-27. . . . . . . . . Figure 2-15. . . . . . Figure 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing New Cell Partitions in the Project Workspace Tree. . .Save (Dx Symbol Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Part Partition Dialog Box . . Figure 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-8. Find Dialog Box (Libraries Tab) . . . . . . . . . . . Naming a Pin on a Symbol . Symbol Wizard Command from the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . Figure 2-18. . . . . . . . Unreserve Partitions Dialog Box . . . . . . . Figure 2-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Central Library Properties Using the Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-3. . . . . . . . . EXP2005 SPac1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-6. . . . . . . . . DC/DV-Expedition Flow Using Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Services Dialog Box (Symbols Tab) . . . . . . . . . . . Library Manager Interface . . . . . . Viewing Associated Objects in the Library Navigator Tree. . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-19. . Figure 2-4. . . . . . . . . .Appearance (Dx Symbol Editor) . . . . . . Property Definition Editor Dialog Box (Cost Property Selected). . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1. . . . Example of Include Associated Object Nodes option (Find Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . DxDesigner to Expedition Library Manager Flow . Figure 2-24. . . . . . . . . . Properties Section of Dx Symbol Editor. . . . . . Select a Symbol Library File Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . Partition Search Paths Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-21. . . . . Figure 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partition Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-10. . Figure 1-2. .List of Figures Figure 1-1. . . . . . New Symbol Command from the Workspace Tree . . .General (Dx Symbol Editor) . . . . Symbol Editor Interface with 74f244_Half Displayed . . . . . . . Figure 2-28. . . . . . Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Symbol 74f244_Half With Pins Named . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-20. . . . . . . . . . Import Symbols Command in the Project Workspace Tree . DC/DV to Expedition Library Manager Design Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Verification Dialog Box . . x 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-12 1-16 1-18 1-19 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-12 2-13 2-15 2-16 2-16 2-17 2-17 2-18 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-28 2-29 2-30 2-32 2-33 2-34 2-36 2-37 2-38 2-38 2-39 2-40 2-41 Library Manager Process Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-17. . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-5. . . . Figure 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties Dialog Box . . . DxD Symbols Displayed in the Workspace Tree . . . Figure 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Symbol Library Using Library Services . . . . Setup Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . Figure 2-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing a New Part Partition in the Project Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . Select a New Central Library Directory Dialog Box . . . Library Manager Interface . . . . . . . . . Partition Open Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-6. . . . . . . . . Figure 2-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-12. . . . . . . Units Display Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-9. . . . . . . . . Figure 2-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Navigation Tree with Central Library Defined . . . . . . . . 2-42 2-43 2-44 2-45 2-46 2-47 2-48 2-50 2-51 2-52 2-53 2-53 2-54 2-54 2-56 2-58 2-59 2-61 2-61 2-62 2-62 2-63 2-64 2-64 2-64 2-66 2-68 2-69 2-70 2-70 2-71 2-72 2-73 2-76 2-77 2-78 2-79 2-80 2-81 2-81 2-82 2-84 2-85 Library Manager Process Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Symbol Attributes (Dx Symbol Editor) . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-57. . . . Delete Symbol Command from the Workspace Tree . . . . Figure 2-43. . . . . . Displaying Symbol Attributes (Dx Symbol Editor) . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-53. . . . . . Figure 2-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Editor Dialog Box (With Values Displayed). . . . . Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With Symbols Tab (DxD-Expedition flow) Figure 2-68. . . . . . . . . Finding a Padstack Element in the Workspace Tree. . . . Figure 2-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol 74f244_half (Left and Right Side Pins) in Dx Symbol Editor . Displaying Associated Pads and Holes in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . Editing Pads and Holes from the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Symbol (Dx) Dialog Box . . . . . . . . Renamed Dx Symbol in Workspace Tree. . . Figure 2-60. . . . . . . . . Padstack Editor Interface . . . Figure 2-73. Rename Dx Symbol Command from the Workspace Tree. Edit Padstack Popup Menu Command in Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-71. . Figure 2-44. . . Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With Cells Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Padstacks in the Workspace Tree. . . . . . . Figure 2-49. . . . . . . Corrected Dimensions for 74f244_half Symbol . . . . . . . Figure 2-37. . Figure 2-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-46. . . . . . . . Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-64. . . . Pattern Place Tab (Place Pins Dialog Box). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Cell Dialog Box from the Workspace Tree . . . . . Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With 74F244_Half Package Displayed Figure 2-74. . . . . . . . . Pin Names Assigned to Slot #1. . . . . . Padstack Editor (Holes Tab) With Drill Symbol Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-39. . . . . . . . Figure 2-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Package Cell Dialog Box (Cell Editor) . . . . . . . . . Place Pins Dialog Box (Cell Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding 58 Round Padstack in the Workspace Tree . EXP2005 SPac1 xi . . . New Cell Command from the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . Cell Editor Interface (With Cell Created) . . Figure 2-50. . . . . . Figure 2-34. . . Pin Numbers Assigned to Slots. . . . and NC Pins. . . . . . . Symbol 74f244_half (Left Side Pins) in Dx Symbol Editor . . Cell Editor Interface (With “Ref Des” Displayed) . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Padstack Elements in the Workspace Tree. . . Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With Cells Tab Updated . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-48. Adjusting Fill Color and Background Attributes (Dx Symbol Editor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .List of Figures Figure 2-32. . . . Figure 2-45. . Figure 2-42. . . . . Padstack Editor Interface (for Surface Mount Padstack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-55. . . Padstack Editor (Padstacks Tab) With Fields Populated . . . . . . Figure 2-36. . . . . . . . Create Package Cell Dialog Box (Cell Editor) . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-51. Symbol 74f244_Half with Pins Defined (Dx Symbol Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Symbol Type Property (Dx Symbol Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-58. . . Figure 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Pins Dialog Box (Dx Symbol Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-69. . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-56. . . . . . . Figure 2-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-72. . Figure 2-52. . . . . . . . . Figure 2-67. . Figure 2-63. . . . Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With Symbols Tab (DC/DV-Expedition flow) . . . . Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With 74F244_Half Package Displayed (DxD-Expedition flow). . . . . . . . . Figure 2-41. Figure 2-38. . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Pin Attributes (Dx Symbol Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-80. . . Figure 2-85. . . . . . . . . Figure 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . .List of Figures Figure 2-75. Assigning Pin Names to 74F244_Full Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Manager Administrator Information Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Model File Command in the Workspace Tree. Figure 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Pin Names to 74F244_Half Package . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Parametric Table . . . . . . . Figure 3-3. . . Figure 3-20. . . . . Figure 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-90. . Modifying a Property in the Property Definition Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With 74F244_Full Package Displayed Figure 2-77. . . . . Figure 3-7. Copy Model File Command in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-22. . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-86. Partitions in the Models Node of the Workspace Tree . . . . . . Figure 2-93. Figure 3-15. . . . . Parts Manager Administrator Software Process Flow . Mapping a Parameter to a New Property in a Parametric Table. . Figure 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Padstack Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-84. . Creating a New Models Partition in the Workspace Tree. . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11. . . . . . . . View and Edit Model File Commands in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With 74F244_Full Package Displayed (DxD-Expedition flow). . . . . . . EXP2005 SPac1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-94. . Assigning Default Symbol in the Part Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-76. Figure 3-10. . . . . . Renamed Parametric Table in the PM Classification Tree With Message Displayed . . . . . . . . Figure 2-91. . . . . . PM Classification Tree With One Undefined Table . . . . . . . . . . New Model File Command in the Workspace Tree . . Figure 2-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM Classification Tree With Two Undefined Tables. Parts Manager Configuration Dialog Box . . . . Figure 2-89. . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping a Parameter to a Property in a Parametric Table . . . . . . Parts Manager Administrator Window . . . . . . . . Importing a Model File to a Models Partition. Figure 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-79. . . . . . Renaming a Parametric Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting the Memory IC Table . . . Changing a Parametric Table Name . . . . . . Populating a Parametric Table With Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-19. . . . . . . Figure 3-13. . Property Definition Editor Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renamed Parametric Table in the PM Classification Tree . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-9. . . . . Figure 2-88. . . Specifying a Parameter in a Parametric Table . . . . . . . . . 2-86 2-87 2-88 2-89 2-89 2-90 2-91 2-91 2-92 2-93 2-93 2-94 2-95 2-96 2-97 2-98 2-100 2-101 2-102 2-103 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 xii Library Manager Process Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-92. . . . . . . . . . . Deleting the Test Table . . . . Figure 2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . Parametric Tables Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-83. . . . . . . . . . Modify Pins Dialog Box . . . Figure 2-82. . . Using the Copy Popup Menu Command (Parts in Library Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Parameter to a Parametric Table . Delete Popup Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Models Node in the Workspace Tree (DxD-Expedition Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part With Associated Symbols and Cells in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Part Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-2. Figure 3-17. Imported Model File in the Workspace Tree . . . . Insert Parametric Tables Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-42. . . . Figure 3-45. . . . . . . . . . Inserting a Part Number into the Logic IC Table . . . . . . . Inserting Parametric Tables into an ASCII File . . Importing Cells and Associated Data Using Library Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-50. . . Partition Editor Dialog Box (Cells Tab) . . Figure 3-53. Part Number With a New Parameter Added to the PM Database. Figure 3-35. . . . . . . . Displaying all Part Numbers in the PM Database. . . . . . . . Inserting Part Number Data into the PM Database. . . . . . . . . 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-34 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-49 3-50 3-51 3-53 3-54 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-60 3-61 3-62 3-64 3-65 3-66 3-67 3-68 3-69 3-70 3-71 3-73 Library Manager Process Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Padstacks and Associated Data Using Library Services . . . Figure 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . Logic IC Table With Part Number Deleted . . Partition Editor Dialog Box (Symbols Tab) . . . Figure 3-39. . . . . . Delete Parametric Tables Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . Selecting a Symbol and Associated Data Using Library Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Successful Parametric Table Insertion into an ASCII File. . . . . . . . Figure 3-54. . . . . . Selecting Part Number Data to Import from an ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-28. . . . . Selecting Parts and Associated Part Data Using Library Services . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-46.List of Figures Figure 3-23. Figure 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters Associated With a Part Number . . Importing Parts Data from One Central Library to the Active Central Library Figure 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-55. . . . . . . EXP2005 SPac1 xiii . . . Using Create/Update Parametric Data Dialog Box to Manually Add Part Numbers to the PM Database . . . . . Selecting Part Number Data for Insertion into the PM Database . . . Figure 3-36. . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Cells and Associated Data Using Library Services. . . . Figure 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-58. . . . . . Tools Menu Showing Parts Manager Validation Command . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Part Number to Delete from the Logic IC Table . . Figure 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-52. . Expanded Property Definition Editor Dialog Box With “Cell Name” Property Attributes Selected . Figure 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Parameter and Value to a Parametric Table . Figure 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-57. . . Correcting Tolerance Property Problems Using the Property Definition Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-25. . . . . . Deleting a Part Number from the Logic IC Table. . . . . . . . . Figure 3-31. . . Figure 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . Successful Part Number Insertion into the Logic IC Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-56. . . . Figure 3-62. . . . . . . . . Extracting a Part Number from the Database to an ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partition Editor Dialog Box (Parts Tab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Parts Data to Import from Another Central Library . Figure 3-30. . . . . . . Adding a Parameter to a Parametric Table . . . Selecting a Table to Receive Parametric Data . . . . . Displaying Successful Parametric Table Insertion into an ASCII File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-59. . . . . Figure 3-49. . . . . . . . Figure 3-44. . . . . Figure 3-60. . . . Figure 3-38. . Updating Part Number Information in the PM Database . . . . Selecting a Part Number to Extract from the Database. . . . Figure 3-33. . . . . . . . Figure 3-51. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box. Importing a Symbol and Associated Data Using Library Services. . . . . . . . . Figure 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-41. . . . . Deleting a Part Number from the Create/Update Parametric Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Padstacks and Associated Data Using Library Services . . . . . Figure 3-24. . . . . . . . . Figure 3-27. . Successful Insertion of Part Number Data into the PM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Parts and Associated Part Data Using Library Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Part Numbers in the Create Part Numbers from PDB Dialog Box Figure 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-13. . . . . Figure 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-3. . Error Condition When Updating Part Numbers in the PDB . . Schematic Design in Design Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters Associated With Part Number 100-1000000-001 After Running PM Batch Update Utility . . . . Figure 3-73. Figure 3-67. . . Figure 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Part Numbers in the PDB from the Create/Update Parametric Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Schematic Design With the New Dialog Box . . . . . . Enabling Expedition Style Zoom . . . . . . . Correcting Cell Name Property Problems Using the Property Definition Editor . . . . . Figure 3-89. . . . . . Figure 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing PPS Data With Part 100-1000000-001. . . Open Dialog Box (PM/PDB Synchronization Utility) . . . . . . Figure 3-83. . . . . . .List of Figures Figure 3-64. . . Figure 3-76. . . . . . Viewing PPS Data With Part 800-3000000-001. . Parts Database Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Invoke Project Editor Command (DxDesigner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Schematic File in Design Capture . . Creating Part Numbers from PDB Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-78. . . Part Numbers With Associated Attachment Data (in Blue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Central Library Path . . . . . Figure 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Configuration Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . Figure 4-8. . . . . Part Number With Associated Attachment Data . . . Figure 3-74. . . . . . . . . . Project Setting Dialog Box (Design Capture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Editor Search Order Scheme. Figure 3-84. . . . . . Figure 3-80. . . . . 3-74 3-75 3-76 3-77 3-78 3-80 3-81 3-81 3-82 3-83 3-85 3-86 3-87 3-88 3-89 3-90 3-92 3-94 3-97 3-98 3-99 3-99 3-100 3-101 3-102 3-103 4-2 4-4 4-5 4-7 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-14 4-15 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-18 xiv Library Manager Process Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Tools Process Flow (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) . . . . . . . . Specifying a DxDesigner Project Name . . Figure 4-1. . . . . Figure 4-11. . . . . . . . . Figure 3-75. . . . Figure 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a New Property Using the Property Definition Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attachment Data Dialog Box With Description Field Displayed. . . Figure 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-4. . . . . . . Figure 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . Parametric Tables With Table Changes Saved . . . . Create Parts Numbers from PDB Dialog Box . . . Figure 4-14. EXP2005 SPac1 . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Part Numbers With Attachment Data . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-86. . . . . . . . . . Attachment Data Dialog Box With Valid Path Entry . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-12. . . Figure 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-68. . . . . . . . . Parts Database Dialog Box (Place Device Command) . . . . . . . . . Parts Manager PM/PDB Synchronization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-5. . . . . . . . . Reverifying Parameters Associated With Part Number 100-1000000-001 Figure 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completed Schematic Design . . . . . . . . Figure 3-65. Figure 4-9. . . Attachment Data Dialog Box With Description Field Highlighted . . . . . . . . Part Numbers Associated With the Resistor Partition . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic Design With Wires . . . . . . . . . . Attachment Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Tools Process Flow (DxDesigner-Expedition Library Manager) Figure 4-10. . . Figure 3-77. . . . . . . Figure 3-66. . Verifying Parameters Associated With Part Number 100-1000000-001 Figure 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling the Parts Manager Option in the Property Definition Editor. . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a New Property in the Property Definition Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Migration Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-19. . . . . . . Figure 4-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-34. . . Figure A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Reusable Block in the Workspace Tree. . . . . . Specifying a List of Symbol Libraries to Migrate . Figure 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . Logical/Physical Reuse Block in the Workspace Tree . . . . Confirming DxD Projects to Migrate. . . . . . . . . . . . . Renamed Reusable Block in the Workspace Tree . . Select DxDesigner Projects to Translate . . Figure 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-23. . Figure 4-38. . . . . . . Figure 5-1. . . . . . . . . . ViewPCB Dialog Box (Results tab) with Back Annotation Results . . . . Figure 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Schematic in DxDesigner . . . . 4-18 4-19 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-26 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-37 4-38 4-38 4-40 4-42 4-43 4-43 4-43 4-44 4-45 4-45 4-46 5-2 5-8 5-10 5-12 5-13 A-2 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-8 A-9 A-11 A-12 A-15 Library Manager Process Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-40. . . . . . Accessing Reusable Blocks (Logical/Physical) Commands from the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Reusable Block Command in the Workspace Tree. . . . . . . . Figure 5-3. . . . Figure A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Reusable Block in the Workspace Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-37. . . . . . . . . . . Material / Process Editor (Processes Node) . . . . . . . . Reusable Block Properties Dialog Box (Invoked from Workspace Tree) Figure 4-36. . . . . . PCB Design With Cells U1 and U2 Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-18. . . Figure 4-33. . . . Layout Templates Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Reusable Block in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . Changing the Search Order Scheme . . . Figure 4-43. . . Searching for Symbol Libraries in a Directory . . Library PDF Documenter Dialog Box . . . . . . Figure 5-4. . . . New Reusable Block Dialog Box (Logical/Physical). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .List of Figures Figure 4-16. . . . . . . . . . Figure A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Editor With Symbol Library Search Order Defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Device Dialog Box . . Figure 4-42. . . . . . Figure A-3. Cells With Pins Selected for Gate Swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . Board With All Gates Swapped . . . . . . . Figure 4-31. . . . Figure 4-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reusable Blocks Dialog Box with Block Name Displayed . Select Script Language Dialog Box . . . . . . Searching DxD Projects for Symbol Libraries. . . . . Reusable Blocks Node in Workspace Tree. . . . . . . . . . EXP2005 SPac1 xv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Confirming Directories with Symbol Libraries to Migrate . . . . . . . ViewPCB Dialog Box (DxDesigner) Running Back Annotation . Figure 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reusable Block Removed from the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-21. Figure 4-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting or Creating a Target Central Library . . . . . . . . . . . Cells With Selected Pins Highlighted . . Figure 4-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Components in the DxD Schematic. . . . . . Confirming Symbol Libraries to Migrate . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-35. . . . . . Figure 4-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material / Process Editor (Materials Node) . . DxD Schematic Design With Nets Included. . . Figure 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . Reusable Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Reusable Block . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-25. . . . . . . . Board Design With Replaced Cell Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Results of Copying a Reusable Block in the Workspace Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A-2. . . . . . . . Figure A-5. Figure 5-2. Figure A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . EXP2005 SPac1 . .Tables Joined Vertically (Properties Dialog Box) Figure D-35. .Tables Joined Horizontally (Properties Dialog Box Figure D-36. . . . . . . Figure D-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-13. . . Figure D-10. . . . . . . . . . . New Table Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Dialog Box With Library Data Displayed . Parametric Table Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . Database Layout Tab . Figure D-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-22. . . . . . . . . . . . New Table Properties Dialog Box with New Table Name . ODBC Data Source Administrator Dialog Box . Create New Source Dialog Box . . . . . Central Library Properties Dialog Box . . . Data Source Manager Dialog Box (ODBC Data Source Defined) . . . . . Figure D-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Database Dialog Box . Library Added to Component Libraries List . . . . . . . . Data Source Manager Dialog Box (WWW Option Enabled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .List of Figures Figure A-10. Parametric Data Associated With a Part . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-9. . . . . . Figure D-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-33. . Data Source Manager Dialog Box (WWW Data Source Enabled) . . . . . . . . Figure D-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Table Dialog Box . Figure D-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Parametric Data in a Table . . . . New DxDatabook Configuration Dialog Box (Copy an Existing Configuration) . . . . . . . . . DxDatabook Properties (Table) Dialog Box . . . . . . . Figure D-32. . . . . . . Accessing Edit Parametric Data Command from the Popup Menu . . . . . Company Library Properties Dialog Box . . Figure D-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17 D-4 D-5 D-6 D-6 D-7 D-8 D-9 D-10 D-10 D-11 D-12 D-13 D-14 D-15 D-16 D-17 D-18 D-19 D-20 D-21 D-22 D-23 D-23 D-24 D-28 D-28 D-29 D-29 D-30 D-31 D-32 D-32 D-33 D-34 D-34 D-36 D-36 D-37 D-38 D-38 D-40 xvi Library Manager Process Guide. . . . . . . . Configure DxDatabook Database Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Source Manager Dialog Box (Spawned from Add Table) . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-41. . ODBC Microsoft Access Setup Dialog Box with Name and Description Figure D-5. . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-30. . . . . . . . Figure D-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-18. . Figure D-17. Figure D-24. . . . . . . DxDatabook Properties Popup Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-39. . . Viewing Parametric Table Entries in DxDatabook . Figure D-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Source Manager Dialog Box (ODBC Data Source Enabled) . . . . . . . . . . Properties Dialog Box with New Table Displayed . . . . Accessing Edit Databook Configuration Command in Library Manager Figure D-8. New DxDatabook Configuration Dialog Box (Create an Empty Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-26. . . . . . . . Symbol Library Tab (Properties Dialog Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Source Manager Dialog Box (Oracle Data Source Defined). . Using the Toggle Query Window . . Central Library Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . Figure D-16. . . . Figure D-31. . . Figure D-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Table Dialog Box with Data Source (DSN) Populated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Central Library Destination for Translated DxD Projects Figure D-1. . . . . . . . . . ODBC Data Source Administrator Dialog Box . . . . Database Layout Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-11. . . . Figure D-28. . . . . . . . . Add Library Dialog Box . . ODBC Microsoft Access Setup Dialog Box . . Figure D-19. . . . . Figure D-2. . Figure D-23. . . . . . . Accessing Edit Database Tables Command from the Popup Menu. . . . Figure D-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Data Source Names (Data Source Manager Dialog Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Source Manager Dialog Box (Oracle Data Source Enabled) . . . . . . . . . Figure D-21. . . . . . . . Automatic Group/Gate/Pin Swapping in Expedition . . EXP2005 SPac1 xvii . . . . Figure E-7. . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Group Swapping in Expedition. . . . . . . . . . Figure F-3. . . . . . . . . . Assigning Pin Attributes . . . . . . . . . . Import ASCII Dialog Box (Part Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DxDesigner Symbol for Gated Resistor Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .List of Figures Figure E-1. . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .One Attribute Assigned . Part Editor Copy Command . . . Assigning a Second Pin Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-3. Figure E-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Mapping Dialog Box With Swap Definitions for 2 Pin Symbol . . . . . . ViewPCB Dialog Box (DxDesigner) Running Forward Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-16. Figure F-1. . . . . . . Symbol Properties Dialog Box (DxDesigner) . . . . . Figure F-8. . . DxDesigner Symbol for Full Resistor Package . . . . . . . . DxDesigner to Expedition PCB Dialog Box . . . . . . . Expedition PCB Forward Annotation Choice Box. Gate Swapping in Expedition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .All Attributes Assigned Figure F-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol 74f244_Half with Pins Defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-2. . . . . Figure F-9. . . . . . . . Figure F-10. . IC_OK_2 Symbol . . Hetero_3 Entry in Part Editor (After ASCII Import) . . . . . . Figure E-10. . . . . . . . . Figure F-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-9. . . Symbol 74f244_Half in DxDesigner with First Pin Defined . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-6. . . Symbol 74f244_Half Displayed in DxDesigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-13. .Two Attributes Assigned Figure F-11. . . Figure E-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Mapping Dialog Box With Swap Definitions for 8 Pin Symbol . . . . . Figure E-18. . . . . . . . . Figure E-15. . . Figure F-6. . . . . Electrical Nets in CES . . . . . . . . . . . . Export ASCII Dialog Box . . . . . . Figure F-16. . Results Tab (ViewPCB Dialog Box) . . . Figure E-19. . . . . . . DxDesigner Symbol Creation Wizard . . . . . . . . . Figure E-12. . . Selecting Export ASCII Command in Part Editor . . . Pin Properties Dialog Box (DxDesigner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC_OK_1 Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Properties Dialog Box (DxDesigner) . . . . Figure F-5. . . . . . . . . DxDesigner Schematic Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Swapping in Expedition . . . 74f244_Half Device in DxDesigner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC_OK_3 Symbol . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Properties Dialog Box (DxDesigner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Database Editor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Properties Dialog Box (DxDesigner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4 E-4 E-5 E-6 E-6 E-23 E-24 E-24 E-25 E-26 E-27 E-28 E-28 E-29 E-29 E-30 E-31 E-31 E-32 F-2 F-4 F-5 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-9 F-10 F-11 F-12 F-13 F-13 F-15 F-16 F-17 F-17 Library Manager Process Guide. . Figure E-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-4. . . . . . . Figure E-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-14. . . . . . . . . . Figure E-4. . . . . . . . . Project Workspace Tree Entities . . . . . ActiveLibrary Property Syntax . . . . . . . . . . Left Side Pin Attributes . . ODBC Data Sources and Operating Systems Supported by DxDatabook Data Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table D-4. . . Table D-1. . . . . . . . . Table D-3. . . . . . Table D-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes Required for Processing Generic and Non-generic DxD Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Side Pin Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-1. . . . . Table F-1. . . . . Table G-6. . . . . . . FullName Property Syntax . . . . Version Property Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operators and Corresponding Data Types . . . . . Entering Parameters and Values for a Part Number . . . . . . . . . . Table G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .List of Tables Table 1-1. . . . . . . OnLMCModify Method Property Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PreviewSymbol Property Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXP2005 SPac1 . Table 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-8. . . . . . . . Assigning Properties to 74f244_half Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Types Configurable via the Library Wizard . . . . . . . . . Table F-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Side Pin Attributes . Assigning Properties to 74f244_half Symbol (Dx Symbol Editor) . . . . Supported Hetero Type Symbols . . . . . . . Table 2-3. . . . . . . . Table 2-4. . Table D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-5. . . . . . . . Library Configuration Dialog Box Controls . . . . . . Table F-2. . . . . . . Numeric Comparison Operators . Table G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name Property Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-7. . Mapping Expedition Device Data to DxDesigner Device Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reusable Block Properties Dialog Box Fields and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing Project File Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Search Methods Using Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valid Model File Name Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 1-18 2-9 2-49 2-49 2-51 2-92 3-32 4-16 4-40 D-2 D-3 D-27 D-40 D-41 E-2 F-2 F-7 F-8 F-12 G-2 G-3 G-3 G-4 G-4 G-5 G-6 G-7 xviii Library Manager Process Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visible Property Syntax . . . . . . Table G-3. . . Left Side Pin Attributes . . . . . . . . . . PreviewCell Property Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DxD-Expedition flow uses DxDatabook Data Editor). userdefined layers. the software updates all cells that contain that padstack. padstacks. EXP2005 SPac1 1-1 . Use Library Manager software to perform the following tasks: • • • Launch software tools (editors) to create symbols. symbols. and symbol. part data. libraries. and padstack editors into a single. utilities. and layout templates under a single directory structure. assigning a user partition at the bottom ensures it will be searched last. resistors in one partition. if you modify a padstack. centralized environment. cells. are integrated to control data reliability throughout the library development process. IBIS models.Chapter 1 Library Manager Overview Introduction Library Manager™ software maintains relationships between data in different libraries by establishing library object associations. Library entities. A library created by the Library Manager is called a central library and integrates symbols. cells. and so forth). For example. Define and manage library partitions. as well as a "common properties" definition file. or to or from ASCII. via size. the software also provides the required library editors. Since Library Manager integrates this data in a central library scheme. The databases controlled by Library Manager are integrated to help control and ensure data reliability throughout the library development process. cells. This increases the speed and efficiency of searches and controls the use of non-qualified partitions. which allows grouping of like parts (for example. cell (footprint). padstacks. IBIS models. Likewise. and layout templates from the Library Manager interface. padstacks. For example. assigning a frequently used partition at the top of a search path scheme ensures that the software searches that partition first. Create custom search path schemes for partitions in the central library. which can be accessed from a graphical user interface or from within various design tools. capacitors in a second partition. Library Manager software automatically updates related objects within that central library. parametric data (DC/DVExpedition flow uses Parts Manager. When a library object is updated. and IBIS models between partitions. • • Library Manager Process Guide. and so forth for use in subsequent designs. Import/export parts. to or from PCB jobs. routing clearances. part data. routing layers. Create and store standard layout templates with board shape. symbols. EXP2005 SPac1 . Use Expedition PCB to link to a schematic project. cells. For example. DxDesigner . and parts.Library Manager Overview Production Flows Supported by Library Manager • Create reusable blocks (DC/DV-Expedition flow only) to create circuit blocks and store it in the central library. • See “Using Design Architect with Expedition Tools” on page B-1 for information on the Design Architect to Expedition PCB flow using Library Manager. Parts Manager to manage parametric data (Windows only). modify a padstack and all footprints that contain that padstack are updated to reflect the change. pushing a cell. • • Production Flows Supported by Library Manager Library Manager features three product flows that include all the software tools needed to create symbols. and replacing a cell. See “Importing DxD Symbols into a Central Library” on page 2-27 for information on importing Dx symbols. DxDatabook Data Editor to manage parametric data. and replacing a cell. cells. placing cells. be sure to read “Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations” on page E-1 for important information. compiling a PCB design. performing gate swapping. Use Expedition PCB™ to link to a schematic project. 1-2 Library Manager Process Guide. compiling a PCB design.Expedition PCB: Using Dx Symbol Editor to create and manage symbols (or import symbols from DxDesigner™).Expedition PCB: Using Design Capture™ or DesignView™ to create and manage parts. This allows you to store and utilize verified circuitry with the ease of placing a single element in a design. Note If using the DxDesigner to Expedition PCB flow in Library Manager. pushing a cell. and IBIS Librarian or Visual IBIS Editor. placing cells. The relationship between the data in the different libraries is maintained providing the capability to update associated library objects. • Expedition only flow . and IBIS Librarian. These distinct design flows are based on the type of central library you use: • Design Capture/DesignView . Define and modify properties that may be common to various library entities (Property Definition Editor dialog box) and control the display and precision of units (Units Display dialog box).using Design Architect® to create symbols. and padstacks (Windows only). performing gate swapping. lmc) file at a time with different machines.dproj) for DxD-Expedition flow. then Library Manager software grants access to another user. the partition opened first by a user for editing is write-protected. a project file (. the Cell (footprint) library might be separated into partitions for SMD Cells. For example. IBIS model software. The Library Manager interface controls central library creation. Installation instructions are included with the software CD. partition editing. When multiple users access a central library. A central library cannot be created in a directory that contains a central library file (. Multiple users can edit different partitions in the same central library simultaneously. Library Manager Process Guide. Only one central library is associated with one design. A partition is a user-defined grouping of data objects. Also. Other users can access information in that central library partition in “read only” mode.pcb). An individual library (one of the sub-folders in the central library) is a collection of partitions. understand your company’s library management concept and objectives. see Configuring the WDIR Variable on Windows for important information. or an Expedition PCB file (. Designs reference one central library as a whole. Mechanical Cells. and Drafting Cells. a design project file (.prj) for the DC/DV-Expedition flow. EXP2005 SPac1 1-3 . A central library contains a library management and control file (. Accessing a Central Library More than one user can access a single central library (. symbols. Through Cells. You must successfully install Library Manager from the appropriate software CD. cells.lmc). padstacks.Library Manager Overview What is a Central Library? What is a Central Library? A central library is a collection of interrelated libraries with an improved level of data integrity and consistency checking. While not recommended. Libraries are the storage locations for parts. be familiar with the software tools (such as Design Capture and DesignView for the DC/DV to Expedition flow on Windows only) and DxDesigner (for the DxD-Expedition Library Manager flow) and Expedition PCB. Designs then reference a central library as a whole rather than inter-mixing library files from various locations. Once the user editing an entity in a partition has written information to disk and closed that partition. and invocation of library editors. Prerequisites Before using Library Manager. Library Manager allows multiple central libraries. and parametric data (from Parts Manager in the DC/DV-Expedition flow and DxDatabook™ Data Editor in the DxD-Expedition flow).lmc) that maintains an inventory of the contents in the central library. UNIX. the installation prompts you for the location of the WDIR variable. this script is used with the DxDesigner-Expedition PCB flow only. Therefore. adjusts central libraries that were created on the Windows operating system prior to SDD2004 SPac1 for use on the Linux operating system. Symbol Preview. the selected central library can be accessed on either Linux. The location you specify during installation is combined with a default location to automatically create the WDIR variable. the lmcwin2unix script changes a directory named either “Sym” or “SYM” to “sym” (all lowercase text) to ensure operability on Linux. the software may generate errors. EXP2005 SPac1 . Note On UNIX and Linux. resulting in a software crash in some cases. After running this script.C:\Mentor_EXP2005\2005EXP\SDD_HOME\standard Caution Do not remove the %SDD_HOME%\standard portion of the WDIR variable on Windows operating systems. 1-4 Library Manager Process Guide. Adjusting Central Libraries for Use on Linux and UNIX The lmcwin2unix script. If you set a WDIR variable manually. For example. Linux If you do not run the lmcwin2unix script prior to opening a central library originally created on Windows. and Modify Pins functionality. the %SDD_HOME%\standard portion of the WDIR is defined and transparent at installation. delivered with Library Manager. be sure to read “Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations” on page E-1 for important information. Doing so causes problems with the Parts Database Symbol Import.Library Manager Overview Prerequisites Note If using the DxDesigner to Expedition PCB flow in Library Manager. For example: E:\wdir. or Windows. The lmcwin2unix script traverses the directories of a specified central library and adjusts directory names to eliminate case-sensitivity problems that might occur on Linux. Configuring the WDIR Variable on Windows When you install Library Manager on Windows. the %SDD_HOME%\standard path is automatically appended to the WDIR used by Library Manager and DxDesigner. 11. 10 (DxD-Expedition flow only) Note DC/DV-Expedition Library Manager and DA/BA-Expedition Library Manager is not available on the Linux or UNIX operating systems. Service Pack 4 Windows XP Pro. Supported Operating Systems Library Manager has been certified to run on the following operating systems for this release: • • • • • Windows 2000. Service Pack 2 Linux WorkStation 3. and Windows operating systems. UNIX. 9.0.Library Manager Overview Prerequisites The lmcwin2unix script is located in the following directory and must be invoked from a command prompt: $<SDD_HOME>/common/linux/bin See “Upgrading Central Libraries for Linux and UNIX Use” on page C-1 for complete information on this script. set the following variable: export SHLIB_PATH=$SDD_HOME/common/ux11/lib Library Manager Process Guide. Consult that document for complete configuration information.0. See “Upgrading Central Libraries for Linux and UNIX Use” on page C-1 for information on the lmcwin2unix script. Configuring Linux and UNIX Workstations Configuration information for Linux and UNIX workstations is included in the Release Information document. which adjusts central libraries that were created on the Windows operating system prior to SDD2004 SPac1 for use on the Linux or UNIX operating system.i (DxD-Expedition flow only) Solaris 8.0 and 4. Supporting Mixed Operating System Usage Central libraries created on the Windows operating system prior to SDD2004 SPac1 must be adjusted for use on both the Linux. EXP2005 SPac1 1-5 .0 HP-UX 11. Set the following environment variables for Linux and/or UNIX workstations: SDD_HOME=<install_dir>/2005EXP/SDD_HOME PATH=$SDD_HOME/common/<operating_system>/bin:$PATH If using the k-shell (ksh) environment on HP-UX 11. Note Windows users can use the Properties/Security dialog box and Linux and UNIX users can use the chmod command to adjust central library permissions to corporate guidelines. should have “Write” permission except for individual library files. ensure that the LM_LICENSE_FILE points to the license file (Linux and UNIX). and SymbolLibs subdirectories.prp) file Padstack library (padstackDB.mdb) file (DC/DV-Expedition flow only) All other files in the central library should remain “Everyone = Change” (read-write) to ensure proper operation of the library. whether they are on Windows. Files that can be permission-controlled are: • • • • • Common property (centlib. and production partitions may be read-only to designers. which can be write-protected as desired to control access. Parts Manager database (partsmanager. Recommended Central Library Permissions The company librarian controls access to partitions in a central library and sets the access privileges for numerous purposes. symbols or cells (footprints) which have not been checked and certified for use may be placed into a partition that is inaccessible to designers. Linux. The Windows share that allows access to the central library directory from remote machines must have permissions set to “Everyone = Full Control”. For example.psk) file Layout template files Files in the CellDBLibs. All files. DC/DV to Expedition PCB Flow Figure 1-1 on page 1-7 illustrates the DC/DV to Expedition PCB design flow using the central library architecture in Library Manager. UNIX. EXP2005 SPac1 . IBISModels. the central library must be loaded on a Windows NTFS. 1-6 Library Manager Process Guide. or Linux.Library Manager Overview DC/DV to Expedition PCB Flow Also. To disallow individuals from making changes to a central library but still allow Read access for viewing library data. PartDBLibs. or UNIX operating system disk. The share permissions are superseded by the individual file permissions. DC/DV to Expedition Library Manager Design Flow DxDesigner to Expedition Library Manager Flow Figure 1-2 on page 1-8 illustrates the DxDesigner to Expedition Library Manager design flow using the central library architecture: Library Manager Process Guide.Library Manager Overview DxDesigner to Expedition Library Manager Flow Figure 1-1. EXP2005 SPac1 1-7 . and create a simple board layout. This process guide outlines how to use Library Manager software in an integrated process to create a central library. 1-8 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 .Library Manager Overview Process Flows Figure 1-2. populate the central library with symbol. cell. Note See “Using Design Architect with Expedition Tools” on page B-1 for information on the Design Architect to Expedition PCB flow using Library Manager. The procedures in this process guide illustrate the basics of how to use Library Manager and all related data creation and management tools in an integrated flow. Differences in the Library Manager user interfaces and symbol editing processes are explicitly specified within the text. and padstack data. DxDesigner to Expedition Library Manager Flow Process Flows This process guide describes how to use the Library Manager for both DC/DV to Expedition and DxDesigner to Expedition process flows. DC/DV-Expedition Flow Using Library Manager Figure 1-4 illustrates the DxD-Expedition Library Manager usage flow: Library Manager Process Guide.Library Manager Overview Process Flows Figure 1-3 on page 1-9 illustrates the DC/DV-Expedition Library Manager usage flow: Figure 1-3. EXP2005 SPac1 1-9 . DxD-Expedition Flow Using Library Manager 1-10 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 .Library Manager Overview Process Flows Figure 1-4. Tip: You can also start Library Manager by invoking the LibraryManager. The Library Navigation tree identifies the active central library and the contents within partitions (symbols. Library Manager is a launching area for library/project management and design management and editing tools. Note There are also two workflow wizards associated with Library Manager: “DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard” on page A-1 “DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard” on page A-14 See “DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards” on page A-1 for complete information on invoking and using the DxD to Expedition flow wizards. and Selecting a Flow Type” on page 2-2 for information on creating a central library and “Opening an Existing Central Library” on page 2-4 for information on opening an existing central library. For the DC/DVExpedition flow. select Start > Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > DxDesigner-Expedition Flow > Data and Library Management > Library Manager to invoke the Library Manager interface (see Figure 1-5 on page 1-12). Users access interactive library management tools and data (design) editing software from the menu bar. and Library Navigation tree from the Library Manager user interface. Library Manager Process Guide. See “Invoking Library Manager. EXP2005 SPac1 1-11 . open a terminal window and type LibraryManager to invoke the Library Manager interface. parts.exe executable in the Mentor Graphics software tree. cells. tool bar. On Windows. select Start > Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > Design Capture DesignView-Expedition Flow > Data and Library Management > Library Manager to invoke the Library Manager interface (see Figure 1-5 on page 1-12).Library Manager Overview Using the Library Manager Interface Using the Library Manager Interface The Library Manager interface delivers a library-centric environment that illustrates the entire library contents and data. Creating a New Central Library. On Linux and UNIX. See “Configuring Linux and UNIX Workstations” on page 1-5 for information on configuring your Linux workstation. for the DxD-Expedition flow. padstacks) associated with a selected central library. The Library Manager interface can be reduced to an application icon on your desktop which allows you to make more space on your desktop without exiting the software. For example. Library Manager Interface Project Workspace Tree Viewer The Project Workspace Tree is located by default to the left of the design space. This displays the active central library and all contents within the Parts. Figure 1-5. The Reusable Blocks node appears in Library Manager for the DC/DVExpedition flow only (see “Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 4-35).Library Manager Overview Project Workspace Tree Viewer Tip: Icons on the Library Manager toolbar may vary slightly according to the design flow you are using. EXP2005 SPac1 . See “Using IBIS Software” on page 5-3 for more information. This allows you to view associations between entities within the central library without opening several different editors in the workspace. The Models node appears in the project workspace tree for the DxDExpedition flow only (see “Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-90). Symbols. and Padstack partitions within that central library. the DxD-Expedition flow uses Visual IBIS Editor and the icon appears slightly different in the toolbar. Cells. 1-12 Library Manager Process Guide. Table 1-1. For example. Viewing Central Library Properties Use the Properties command in the Project Workspace Tree to view the directory path to the active central library and confirm the workflow supported by the central library. Therefore. When you select an entity (cells and symbols) in the tree. padstacks. view. However. EXP2005 SPac1 1-13 .pdb Process Double-click a part in the Parts partition. the nodes that appear in the project workspace tree (Figure 1-5) varies depending upon the flow. cells. See “Creating Parts (Using Part Editor)” on page 2-74 for more information on Part Editor. the software displays a preview window in the display area. if you double click a symbol. and save symbols. Library Manager Process Guide. if you double click an entity or right click and select Edit from the popup menu. Project Workspace Tree Entities Icon File Extension and Type Parts: *. Files are recognizable by the associated icon and file extension (Table 1-1). You will use this functionality later in this document (see “Viewing Central Library Properties” on page 2-5). edit. For example. open. Popup menu commands in the Libraries tab allow you to perform object creation and editing tasks without using the toolbar or menubar to access the appropriate editor.Library Manager Overview Using the Libraries Tab (Project Workspace Tree) Note Models (SPICE and Verilog) are only supported in DxD-Expedition flow central libraries. the symbol editor software opens with the selected symbol displayed. parts. and reusable blocks (DC/DV-Expedition flow) within partitions in the selected central library (*. Part Editor software invokes and displays part information for the part you selected from the project workspace tree.lmc). models (DxD-Expedition flow). highlight a part and right click the Edit popup menu command. The software invokes Part Editor and displays the part you selected in the tool. Reusable Blocks are supported in the DC/DV-Expedition flow. Using the Libraries Tab (Project Workspace Tree) Use the Libraries tab to create. the software opens the appropriate editor for the entity you select. Select a model file in the Models partition in Library Manager (and DMS Librarian).cml) SPICE (.spi Note: Verilog-A and SPICE models with other file name extensions can be imported to the central library. Holes. This allows you to edit the cell. cells.cel Process Single click a cell in a cell partition and the object displays in a non-editable viewer. Double-click a padstack in the Padstacks partition.va.ckt.cir.ckt. Supported Model Types: Verilog-A (. EXP2005 SPac1 . This allows you to edit the symbol. . See “Creating Pads. *. The Models node displays analog simulation models in Verilog-A and SPICE.#> DC/DV symbols: <name.mod.mod. Single click a symbol in a symbol partition and the object displays in a non-editable viewer. these models do not appear in the project workspace tree like other library objects (like symbols.cml. See “Creating Cells” on page 2-65 for more information on Cell Editor. and so forth). *.cir.va) Compiled Verilog-A (. . and Padstacks” on page 2-55 for more information. The Padstack Editor displays with the object you selected from the project workspace tree. padstacks.spi) Model Types Not Supported: VHDL (. See “Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-29 and “Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-36 for more information. Double-click on a symbol in a symbol partition to invoke the symbol editor software and display the symbol you selected in the project workspace tree. 1-14 Library Manager Process Guide.vhd) Encrypted SPICE See “Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-90 for more information. *. *. Project Workspace Tree Entities Icon File Extension and Type Cells: *. *. . Double-click a cell in a cell partition to invoke the Cell Editor software and display the cell you selected from the project workspace tree.slb> Padstacks: *.Library Manager Overview Using the Libraries Tab (Project Workspace Tree) Table 1-1. DxD symbols: <name.psk Models (DxDExpedition flow only) *. While IBIS models are supported with Visual IBIS Editor and IBIS Librarian. and model partitions (DxD-Expedition flow only) in the project workspace tree are sorted alphabetically by name (case-insensitive). See “Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 4-35 for more information. If needed. This provides a convenient method to view all object associations within a central library (see Figure 1-6). Partition names are compared lexicographically. The Reusable Blocks dialog box displays and allows you to create reusable blocks and associate them with projects linked to the active central library (*. Note Partition nodes within part. symbol. select Edit from the popup menu to invoke the appropriate editor.lmc) file. Project Workspace Tree Entities Icon File Extension and Type Reusable Blocks (DC/DVExpedition flow only) Process Select a Logical/Physical reusable block (DC/DVExpedition flow) associated with the central library.Library Manager Overview Using the Libraries Tab (Project Workspace Tree) Table 1-1. reusable blocks (DC/DV-Expedition flow only). padstack. Library Manager Process Guide. Viewing Object Associations in a Central Library Use the library navigator tree to view associations between entities in a central library instead of invoking the individual point tools to determine associations. EXP2005 SPac1 1-15 . cell. Library Manager Overview Using the Libraries Tab (Project Workspace Tree) Figure 1-6. Viewing Associated Objects in the Library Navigator Tree Pulldown Menu Bar Library Manager commands are listed on pulldowns available from the menu bar (Figure 1-5 on page 1-12). EXP2005 SPac1 . design creation 1-16 Library Manager Process Guide. Click the topic to display a cascading list of library management. padstacks. Highlight a node in the tree. For example. Toolbar The toolbar provides one click access to most tools and utilities associated with Library Manager (Figure 1-5 on page 1-12). The dropdown list contains a list of all objects in the active workspace tree (parts. padstacks. Invoking and Using the Find Command 1. select Any type of object. Searching/Finding Objects in the Project Workspace Tree Use the Find popup menu command in the project workspace tree to quickly find objects.lmc) file. The Find dialog box appears (Figure 1-7). such as symbols. and models (Verilog and SPICE) within the selected central library (*. to find a padstack that is associated to a specific cell. cells. EXP2005 SPac1 1-17 . hole. or pad in the tree. The status bar (bottom of the Library Manager interface) also displays the tool or utility associated with an icon. cells. Many of these same commands are accessible via the toolbar. reusable blocks. Select the type of object you want to search for in the dropdown box. and models by type). right click the mouse. symbols.Library Manager Overview Searching/Finding Objects in the Project Workspace Tree and manipulation. Toolbars can be repositioned in the Library Manager interface by dragging the toolbar to the desired location on the interface (called docking). To search for any object in the central library. and user interface control tools. 2. parts. Library Manager Process Guide. position your cursor over an icon and a tooltip (label associated with the icon) appears and identifies the associated tool or utility. and select Find from the popup menu. To determine what tool or utility is associated with a toolbar icon. Tools on the Find dialog box allow you the option to customize your search by entering object associations related to the object you are searching for in the tree. use the Object Association options on the Find dialog box. reusable blocks. Search Methods Using Wildcard Characters Wildcard Character String ? character? ?character ?character? * character* Description Match one character. Key in the object name in the Name text entry box. Table 1-2. You can search on any alphanumeric text string. 1-18 Library Manager Process Guide. Possible search methods using the wildcard characters appear in Table 1-2. Find Dialog Box (Libraries Tab) 3.Library Manager Overview Searching/Finding Objects in the Project Workspace Tree Figure 1-7. Select a single entity that begins with a specified character(s). Selects all entities that begin with a specified character (for example. You can use the asterisk (*) or question mark (?) as a wildcard character to aid in searches by expanding search criteria. Select a single entity that conforms to a specified character or string. Selects all available entities (zero or match one or more characters). Select a single entity that ends with a specified character(s). 10* specifies all objects that begin with 10). EXP2005 SPac1 . Click OK to execute the search in the Libraries tab. Figure 1-8. Example of Include Associated Object Nodes option (Find Command) 5. *r* returns all objects that have "r" in the string). *character* 4. Library Manager Process Guide. *H specifies all objects that end with H).Library Manager Overview Searching/Finding Objects in the Project Workspace Tree Table 1-2. Figure 1-8 illustrates how using this option to find a symbol in the Libraries tab also displays the associations defined in the central library for the selected symbol object. Select the Include Associated Object Nodes option to view the object and associations to other objects in the workspace tree. EXP2005 SPac1 1-19 . Search Methods Using Wildcard Characters Wildcard Character String *character Description Selects all entities that end with a specified character (for example. Deselect this option to view only the object (no associations display in the Libraries tab). Selects all entities that conform to a specified character string (for example. Use this option to limit the search to pre-defined object classes. Otherwise. Note This procedure assumes you selected a specific type and name of an object to search for in the Find dialog box. Click Close to dismiss the dialog box. Click Close to dismiss the dialog box. the software may not advance to the next applicable object. 2. 7. Click Find Next to find the next matching object in the navigator tree. The list of possible object association criteria is determined by the type of object you selected in the Search For dropdown list. and click OK. Tip: Place the cursor over the highlighted item in the project workspace tree before using the Find Next popup menu command. This ensures the software finds the next object in the library navigator tree that meets the search criteria. 4. Using Find Command to Perform a More Exacting Search Use the Object Association pulldown to perform a more exacting search for objects in the Libraries tab. Otherwise. EXP2005 SPac1 . the software may not advance to the next applicable object. This option is disabled if Any Type of Object appears in the Search For dropdown list. key in the object name. select an option from the Object Association pulldown. to find a part that uses a specific type of object (for example. 1-20 Library Manager Process Guide. Click Find Next to find the next matching object in the project workspace tree. a cell or symbol). Tip: Place the cursor over the highlighted item in the workspace tree before using the Find Next popup menu command.Library Manager Overview Searching/Finding Objects in the Project Workspace Tree 6. the software matches the value you entered against objects in the navigator tree beginning at the node that the Find command was invoked and displays the first object that meets the criteria specified in the Object Association/Name fields. 3. For example. 1. Click OK. This ensures the software finds the next object in the library navigator tree that meets the search criteria. Select an object association criteria in the dropdown box and key in the name or number of an object type associated with the displayed object (in the Name field). set up parameters for the central library. This provides the capability to verify dependencies across library objects (such as updating all cells that contain a particular padstack after it has been modified). schematic symbol libraries. and parts). The central library file stores all library data in a single directory structure and consists of one or more libraries depending on the software tools you use (for example. padstack.prj) or an Expedition PCB file (.Chapter 2 Using Library Manager Introduction This chapter discusses the Library Manager interface and how to use Library Manager and the tools and utilities available from the interface to create a new central library for a DC/DVExpedition or DxDesigner-Expedition flow design.lmc) file which maintains and records the contents of the central library. Only one central library is associated with one design. Note See “Using Design Architect with Expedition Tools” on page B-1 for information on the Design Architect to Expedition PCB flow using Library Manager.pcb). It also allows approval of a design against a central library by verifying that the library objects in a design file match those in the active central library. A central library contains a library control (. A central library cannot be created in a directory that contains a central library file (. padstack libraries. PCB cells. EXP2005 SPac1 2-1 . Library Manager allows multiple central libraries. Library Manager Process Guide.lmc). Note While not recommended. and part data. Creating a New Central Library and Selecting a Production Flow A central library is a collection of interrelated libraries with an improved level of integrity and consistency checking. The central library architecture maintains relationships between the data in the different libraries. create a symbol with cell. a project file (. Designs reference one central library as a whole. lmc) file.Using Library Manager Creating a New Central Library and Selecting a Production Flow Invoking Library Manager. Creating a New Central Library. select Start > Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > Design Capture DesignView-Expedition Flow > Data and Library Management > Library Manager to invoke the Library Manager interface (see Figure 1-5 on page 1-12). The Library Manager interface displays. and Selecting a Flow Type Use the following steps to invoke Library Manager. Figure 2-1. On Linux and UNIX. select a production flow type. for the DxD-Expedition flow. and create a central library: 1. For the DC/DV-Expedition flow. The Select a New Central Library Directory dialog box displays (Figure 2-2). Click File > New to create a central library (. EXP2005 SPac1 . select Start > Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > DxDesigner-Expedition Flow > Data and Library Management > Library Manager to invoke the Library Manager interface (see Figure 1-5 on page 1-12). On Windows. open a terminal window and type LibraryManager. 2-2 Library Manager Process Guide. See “Configuring Linux and UNIX Workstations” on page 1-5 for information on configuring your Linux or UNIX workstation. Library Manager Interface 2. This ensures that Library Manager software creates the appropriate subdirectories and supporting files required to continue processing within the selected flow. Select either one of these options when creating a central library using the procedures in this process guide. The exercises in this document allow you to create a new central library for either the DxDesigner/Expedition flow or the Design Capture/Expedition flow only. Select a New Central Library Directory Dialog Box 3. For additional information on supported production flow types. Select the production flow from the Flow Type list in the dialog box (see Figure 2-2). see “Production Flows Supported by Library Manager” on page 1-2.Using Library Manager Creating a New Central Library and Selecting a Production Flow Figure 2-2. For information on using the Design Architect/Expedition flow. see “Using Design Architect with Expedition Tools” on page B-1. Do not select the Design Architect/Expedition flow type. EXP2005 SPac1 2-3 . Library Manager Process Guide. Key in the new name for the central library (for this exercise. no directory in the path to the central library file can contain more than 32 characters. The Library Manager Library Navigation tree displays the name of the central library (. 2-4 Library Manager Process Guide. Company_Library). 5. For DxDesigner/Expedition flow central libraries. Click the Create New Folder icon. Library Navigation Tree with Central Library Defined Note Reusable Blocks functionality is only available in the Design Capture/Design ViewExpedition flow central libraries in this release (see “Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 4-35). Figure 2-3.lmc) file in the top level (Figure 2-3). 4. no directory in the path to the central library file can contain more than 32 characters. Caution For DxDesigner/Expedition flow central libraries. then click OK. Opening an Existing Central Library When opening a pre-existing central library file. press the ENTER key. EXP2005 SPac1 . you do not create a central library within the Mentor Graphics software tree. for the exercises presented in this book. The software displays a new folder entry in the directory you specify and prompts you for a new name. the software prompts you to select the desired flow via a dialog box. If Library Manager cannot automatically determine the flow. We recommend that. Models functionality is only available in the DxDesigner-Expedition flow in this release (see “Managing Model Data (DxDExpedition Flow)” on page 2-90).Using Library Manager Creating a New Central Library and Selecting a Production Flow Note Use the Up One Level icon to navigate to the appropriate directory on your machine. Library Manager reads the central library and automatically determines which flow it supports (either DC/DV-Expedition or DxDExpedition). Right-click the central library name in the Project Workspace tab and select Properties from the popup menu. Viewing Central Library Properties Using the Popup Menu The dialog box displays the path to the central library you are using and the workflow assigned to the central library.lmc) file using the Properties command from the popup menu the Project Workspace tree: 1. Use the following steps to view the properties of the active central library (. the central library properties dialog box displays (Figure 2-4). Library Manager Process Guide.Using Library Manager Creating a New Central Library and Selecting a Production Flow Viewing Central Library Properties Use the Properties popup menu command in the Project Workspace tree to view the directory path to the active central library and confirm the workflow supported by the central library. Figure 2-4. EXP2005 SPac1 2-5 . directory that contains log files associated with the central library (. MaterialDBLibs (generated when using Material / Process Editor) .2. LayoutTemplates . • • • 2-6 Library Manager Process Guide. For more information on Panel templates. • • • • Layout . Models ((DxD-Expedition flow only) . Note Visual IBIS Editor (which supports both the DC/DV-Expedition and DxD-Expedition flow on all platforms) can store IBIS models anywhere on your machine (and are not controlled by Library Manager). LogFiles .directory that contains the libpdf.subdirectory within a central library that stores Verilog (uncompiled and compiled Verilog A models) and SPICE model data.cfg configuration file which saves the options selected on the Library PDF Documenter dialog box of the job where the central library (.ibs) files (DC/DV-Expedition flow on Windows only).lmc) file is located. Models are separated into subdirectories with like type models. Version 3. PanelTemplates .cel) files managed by the Cell Editor (“Creating Cells” on page 2-65). See “Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-90. See “Using IBIS Software” on page 5-3 for more information on IBIS modeling software supported by Library Manager. Config (generated when using Library PDF Documenter) . See “Using the Material / Process Editor” on page 5-12 for more information. When you create a new Panel template. IBIS modeling software supports IBIS Model specification Version 2.lmc) file processing. the entire Fablink XE job folder is copied to this directory.directory that contains all design templates for all jobs.directory that contains all cell (.pnl file. Models display in the workspace tree.If you create a new panel template.Using Library Manager Creating a New Central Library and Selecting a Production Flow Subdirectories and Files Created by Library Manager Library Manager software creates the central library directory including the following subdirectories and files.directory that contains all IBIS Model (. EXP2005 SPac1 . See “Using Library PDF Documenter” on page 5-8 for more information. this directory contains the <template_name>. See “Using File Viewer” on page 2-103 for more information.1 and. consult online help from the Templates dialog box. The subdirectories created depends on if you are using Library Manager in the Design Capture/DesignView to Expedition flow or DxD-Expedition flow (noted as follows): • • CellDBLibs . which is the control file for a Fablink XE job.psk.subdirectory created when the Material / Process Editor opens from the Library Manager interface. IBISModels . While stored as files on disk. Library Manager requires and utilizes the typical DxDesigner project folder structure and files within the central library to support symbols. in some cases. some files may contain more than one model.directory that contains the padstack file PadstackDB. a configuration file that stores information on the flow type of the central library. which adjusts central libraries that were created on the Windows operating system prior to SDD2004 SPac1 for use on the Linux operating system. wir (DxD-Expedition flow only) . See “Creating Parts (Using Part Editor)” on page 2-74 for more information. See “What is a Central Library?” on page 1-3 for general information on the central library file. When you create a new central library.lmc . PartsManager . Work .dproj file inherits the same name as the *.(created when using the Reusable Blocks functionality in the DC/DV-Expedition flow) directory that contains a completed project (.lmc) file.subdirectory associated with a DxDesigner project.lmc file.a central library-specific project used by DxDesigner.cbf .directory that contains all parametric tables and data.pdb) files. See “Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DVExpedition Flow)” on page 4-35 for more information.directory that contains DC/DV-Expedition flow symbol files. Linux Appendix C: “Upgrading Central Libraries for Linux and UNIX Use” on page C-1 includes information on the lmcwin2unix script. the *.subdirectory associated with a DxDesigner project.Using Library Manager Creating a New Central Library and Selecting a Production Flow • • • • PartsDBLibs .dbc .a binary file associated with the central library (.(Design Capture/DesignView-Expedition flow only) .DxDatabook user configuration file.subdirectory associated with a DxDesigner project.a file that contains symbol property information.cfg . • • • SymbolLibs . sch (DxD-Expedition flow only) . CentLib. <central_library_name>. sym (DxD-Expedition flow only) .the central library (.prp file . ReusableBlocks . sysindex. The associated Expedition PCB design(s) and all supporting data will also be included within a unique subdirectory.dproj (DxD-Expedition flow only) . EXP2005 SPac1 2-7 . <central_library_name>.an empty working directory.directory that contains part (. pkt (DxD-Expedition flow only) . <central_library_name>. <central_library_name>.prj) file and schematic(s) (with CDB data) that reflects a given circuit block within a unique subdirectory. • • • • • • • • Library Manager Process Guide.lmc) file created earlier in this exercise. See “Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager” on page D-1 for more information. See “Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-29.subdirectory associated with a DxDesigner project. See “Using PM Administrator” on page 3-1. however. Settings in the *. This mapping information is used to: • Annotate pin numbers to the components as you place them on the schematic. Process the symbol and map the data to a logical symbol. Editing a Central Library Name or Location If you wish to modify an existing central library (*. Once the symbols are transferred to the central library.ini (DxD-Expedition flow only) . • • Before you assign pin numbers from a central library parts. Also.dproj file are automatically updated when you reopen the newly renamed central library.dproj filename to match accordingly. you can create part entries using the Part Editor. • 2-8 Library Manager Process Guide. Refer to the schematic capture software online help to see how this is done in the tool you are using.Using Library Manager Creating a New Central Library and Selecting a Production Flow • viewdraw. you must manually rename the associated DxDesignerExpedition project (*.dproj) file when renaming the DxDesigner-Expedition flow central library.lmc file name must be the same.lmc) file name or directory path when using Library Manager in the DxDesigner-Expedition flow. EXP2005 SPac1 . Pass data forward to Expedition and back annotate changes to the schematic. you must: • Import DxDesigner legacy libraries into the central library using the DxDesigner to Library Manager Library Migration Wizard (page A-1).a configuration file used by DxDesigner. the upper-level directory name and the *. Specify the path to the central library in the project’s design configuration. Packaging Parts Using a Central Library The central library uses the Parts Database to store the mapping information between the logical pins of the symbols and the physical pin numbers of the cells. you must manually rename the *. The resulting symbol graphics and a file containing pin number assignments can then be accessed from the central library. Using Library Manager Creating a New Central Library and Selecting a Production Flow Mapping Expedition Device Data to DxDesigner Device Data Expedition device data is extracted from the part in DxDesigner. EXP2005 SPac1 2-9 . name of the part) Reference designator prefix (used as a character prefix for reference designators) Top Cell Name Bottom Cell Name (not used) Alternates Reference Designator Prefix RefPrefix Default Footprint Name Bottom Footprint Name Alternate Footprint Name Symbol Names PKG_TYPE component attribute value N/A ALT_PKG_LIST component attribute value All symbols in the design sharing a common DEVICE attribute value Symbol Pin Labels TopCell BottomCell (not included in file) AltCell [one entry per alternate package] Symbol [one entry per device symbol] Symbol Name Symbol Pin Names Symbol_SwapGroup [unique value per device symbol].. Table 2-1. PinName [list of symbol pin labels.. in symbol pin order] Logical pins: Pin Name Library Manager Process Guide. defaults to DEVICE value) REFDES symbol attribute value Expedition PCB (ASCII Representation) Part Number Expedition Part Editor field Part Number Part Number Name Part Name (optional. Table 2-1 maps DxDesigner device data to the part data. Mapping Expedition Device Data to DxDesigner Device Data Expedition Device Data Device Name DxDesigner Data DEVICE/Symbol component attribute value P/D_NUM component attribute value (optional. Each swappable slot has a unique Slot_SwapGroup name] Selection of the Swap icon The DEVICE attribute is required for a DxDesigner symbol to be mapped into a part number in a part.. Prop "Pin Type and Value Slots [one entry per device slot]… Slot_SwapGroup [One Slot_Swapgroup per device slot. It identifies the corresponding parts in the part data and associates the schematic symbols with the physical cells using the part number property. in symbol pin order] Expedition Part Editor field Selection of the Swap icon Device Pin Types Slot Swappability PINTYPE Symbol pin attributes Determined by matching symbol names. See documentation for the DxDesigner PCB Interface for more information. The software automatically determines what flow you are using (based on the symbols in the SymbolLibs 2-10 Library Manager Process Guide.lmc) file in the dialog box. Library Manager performs transparent operations to update your central library file and directory structure to EXP2005 standards. Heterogeneous devices can have multiple symbol names per device SwapGroupProperties. EXP2005 SPac1 . Mapping Expedition Device Data to DxDesigner Device Data Expedition Device Data Pin Swappability DxDesigner Data PINSWAP symbol attribute Expedition PCB (ASCII Representation) SwapGroup… SwapID [unique SwapID value for each swappable pin group.. If you have an existing central library that was created before the EXP2005 release. The part data enables you to map the same symbol to different parts. Pin Type Property .Using Library Manager Invoking Library Manager on an Existing Central Library (pre-EXP2005) Table 2-1. It also enables you to map different cells/symbols to a single part and enables you to map the same symbol/cell to different parts. if you have an existing central library. Use the File > Open command and specify the central library (*. Invoking Library Manager on an Existing Central Library (pre-EXP2005) Note This process guide assumes you are creating a new central library for the DxDesignerExpedition or DC/DV-Expedition flow. However. listing each pin number per slot in symbol pin order. and change certain attributes of pre-defined system properties. no directory in the path to the central library file can contain more than 32 characters. If no symbols exist in the selected central library. Tip: Additional information on component type properties is included in Library Manager online help. The values of the properties are stored on the data objects and are not defined in the Property Definition Editor. Use the following steps to establish common properties in a central library using the Property Definition Editor: 1. Establishing Common Properties in a Central Library Use the Property Definition Editor to define the available properties and their format in a central library. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 2-11 . For example.Using Library Manager Establishing Common Properties in a Central Library partition) and updates the central library file structure to work within that flow. When you create a central library. 2. If the central library contains mixed symbol types (for example. the Property Definition Editor dialog box displays (Figure 2-5). Use this editor to define new properties. If you click the Name header again.prp) into the directory. the software reads the type of symbols that exist in the central library and automatically determines the flow you are using. the dialog box displays and prompts you to select the appropriate flow type. define property types and their associated syntax. Select Tools > Property Definition Editor or click the Property Definition Editor icon . the list of property names appears in reverse alphabetical order. Caution For DxDesigner/Expedition flow central libraries. the Select a New Central Library Directory dialog box displays (see Figure 2-2 on page 2-3) and prompts you to select a flow type. the software automatically places a default property file (CentLib. Note The DxDesigner-Expedition flow does not utilize Common Properties or part dataspecified component properties when creating or placing symbols in DxDesigner. both DC/DV symbols and DxDesigner symbols). Click the Name header to alphabetize the list of property names in the Property List. Using Library Manager Checking Property Verification Settings Tip: Click any column header in the Property List to organize entries in the list. 3. Select (place a check next to) the Cost property. Figure 2-5. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box (Cost Property Selected) 4. Click OK to save the changes and dismiss the dialog box. This enables the software to place selected properties in a schematic during the packaging process. Checking Property Verification Settings Use the Property Verification dialog box to access the Property Verification dialog box. This dialog box displays a list of software products to use in a design process. Placing a check next to the appropriate software tools ensures that library entries meet design requirements and comply with other downstream software tools. For example, if you create a new part using the Part Editor, the Part Name/Number/Label displays in red text which indicates that certain properties required by downstream tools have yet to be added. 2-12 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using Library Manager Checking Property Verification Settings All tools are selected by default. If your company does not use specific software products listed on this dialog box, then de-select those options. This reduces the amount of error checking performed by the software. If any of these software tools are purchased or used at a later date, select the appropriate options in the Property Verification Settings dialog box to ensure proper verification. Note The following procedure introduces the Property Verification dialog box and its function. For the purpose of this process guide, ensure that the Design Entry and PCB options are enabled. Use the following steps to check property verification settings in the central library: 1. Select Setup > Property Verification or click the Property Verification icon Property Verification dialog box displays (Figure 2-6). Figure 2-6. Property Verification Dialog Box ; the 2. Review the options on the dialog box (all options are selected by default). Select online help for the dialog box to learn more about the options on the dialog box. However, do not change the default settings. Note For DxD-Expedition flow central libraries, the Signal Analyzer™ / Signal Vision™ option is disabled. 3. Click Cancel to dismiss the dialog box. Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 2-13 Using Library Manager Creating Central Library Partitions Creating Central Library Partitions Use the Partition Editor to create new symbol, cell, part (formerly Parts Database), and IBIS Model partitions, rename partitions, and remove partitions from a central library. You must create partitions for symbols, cells, and parts using the Partition Editor dialog box before creating symbol, cell, part data, and IBIS model data (see “Using IBIS Software” on page 5-3 for more information on IBIS software). Partitions are library files that store data within a central library (.lmc) file. The software prohibits removal of a partition that is in use (reserved) by another user or that contains parts. See “What if a Partition is in Use?” on page 2-24 for more information. Tip: You can create central library partitions using commands from the menubar, icon in the toolbar, or from popup menu commands in the project workspace tab. These methods are illustrated in the following procedures. Information about the number of existing entries in the partition and if that partition is reserved (in use) displays in the Partition Editor dialog box (see Figure 2-7). If the library partition is reserved, other users can access the partition in Read Only mode (no changes are permitted) until it is unreserved (not in use). See “Unreserving Partitions” on page 2-19 for information on unreserving partitions. Note Data shown in dialog boxes in this document may be slightly different when you use Library Manager. Creating a Symbol Partition from the Menubar Use the following steps to create a symbol partition in your central library (.lmc) file using commands from the menubar or icon on the toolbar: 1. Select Setup > Partition Editor or click the Partition Editor icon Editor dialog box displays (Figure 2-7). ; the Partition 2-14 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using Library Manager Creating Central Library Partitions Figure 2-7. Partition Editor Dialog Box 2. Click the New Partition icon , key in Logic Gates (Logic_Gates if you are using the DxDesigner-Expedition flow) for the symbol partition name, and click Apply. The Logic Gates (or Logic_Gates for the DxDesigner-Expedition flow) partition appears in the list of symbol partitions. Tip: You can also create a symbol partition using popup commands from the Project Workspace tab. To create a symbol partition, right-click on the Symbols node in the project workspace and select the New Partition command from the popup menu. To learn more about creating partitions from the project workspace, see “Creating Cell Partitions from the Project Workspace Tree” on page 2-15. Creating Cell Partitions from the Project Workspace Tree Use the following steps to create two cell partitions in your central library (.lmc) file using the New Partition command from the popup menu the Project Workspace tab: 1. Right-click the Cells node in the Project Workspace tab and select New Partition from the popup menu; the New Cell Partition dialog box displays. 2. Key in Dip Thru (Dip_Thru if you are using the DxD-Expedition flow). See Figure 2-8. Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 2-15 Using Library Manager Creating Central Library Partitions Figure 2-8. New Cell Partition Dialog Box 3. Click OK; the Dip_Thru cell partition is added to the central library. 4. Right-click the Cells node in the Project Workspace tab and select New Partition from the popup menu; the New Cell Partition dialog box displays. 5. Key in SOIC and click OK; the SOIC cell partition is added to the central library. To see the two new cell partitions you added to the central library, expand the Cells node in the project workspace. The Dip_Thru and SOIC partitions associated with the Cells partition in the central library display in the Project Workspace tree (Figure 2-9). Figure 2-9. Viewing New Cell Partitions in the Project Workspace Tree Creating a Part Partition from the Project Workspace Tree Use the following steps to create a Part (formerly PDB) partition in your central library (.lmc) file using the New Partition command from the popup menu the Project Workspace tab: 1. Right-click the Parts node in the Project Workspace tab and select New Partition from the popup menu; the New Part Partition dialog box displays. 2. Key in Logic Gates (Logic_Gates if you are using the DxD-Expedition flow). See Figure 2-10. 2-16 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using Library Manager Creating Partition Search Paths Figure 2-10. New Part Partition Dialog Box 3. Click OK; the Logic Gates (or Logic_Gates) Part partition is added to the central library. To see the new Part partition you added to the central library, expand the Parts node in the project workspace. The Logic Gates (or Logic_Gates) partitions associated with the Parts partition in the central library display in the workspace tree (Figure 2-11). Figure 2-11. Viewing a New Part Partition in the Project Workspace Tree Creating Partition Search Paths Each central library (.lmc) file contains the capability to create and manipulate search path schemes for symbol, cell, part data, and IBIS Model partitions (see “Using IBIS Software” on page 5-3 for more information on IBIS software). A default search path scheme capability, which contains all partitions within the library, is also provided. Select Setup > Partition Search Paths or click the Partition Search Paths icon Partition Search Paths dialog box appears (Figure 2-12). ; the Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 2-17 Using Library Manager Creating Partition Search Paths Figure 2-12. Partition Search Paths Dialog Box A library can have multiple search path schemes. Create custom search path schemes (by clicking the New Scheme icon ) to increase the speed and efficiency of searches. Once you create a search path scheme, enable or disable partitions to allow or disallow their use within point tools (such as design entry software or Expedition PCB). Use options on the Partition Search Paths dialog box to reorder the partitions for each search path scheme by placing a check in the appropriate box and moving them within the list using the arrow icons. For example, if a company has separate domestic and international facilities that use different parts, then create a customized search path scheme for each facility. By putting a frequently used partition at the top of the search path scheme, the software automatically searches that partition first during a part search. The company librarian can grant users permission to alter the search path scheme at the design level by selecting the check box in the Scheme List. Note If you create a new search path scheme for cells while using the Partition Search Paths dialog box in DMS Librarian, the scheme is saved to DMS when you exit the dialog box. Partition Search Paths Within DC/DV-Expedition Flow Point Tools Library Manager software applies the "default" search path scheme at the design level when you select a central library for use in a design. 2-18 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using Library Manager Unreserving Partitions Within Design Capture and DesignView, you can select and alter partition search paths using the Project Settings dialog box (accessible from the Project > Settings command). Within Expedition PCB, you can select and alter partition search paths using the Project Editor dialog box (accessible from the Setup > Project Integration command) and clicking the Edit the Project File icon. Click Cancel to dismiss the Partition Search Paths dialog box. Unreserving Partitions Use the Unreserve Partitions dialog box to view partitions that are being edited within a central library (.lmc) file and remove READ/WRITE access to those partitions. Partitions in a central library, such as symbol, cell, part data, and IBIS Model partitions, are considered "reserved" when a user accesses and performs operations within that partition. Other users can connect to that partition with read only access. When the editing node disconnects from a partition, that partition becomes "unreserved" and another node can access and perform editing operations within that partition. If a network disruption, power outage, workstation crash, or similar unexpected anomaly occurs while users access partitions in the central library, the software may not automatically unreserve partitions being edited when the anomaly occurred. Use the Unreserve Partitions dialog box to view these partitions, ensure that no editing operations are in progress, and unreserve them. Upon completion, the software removes the partition from the list meaning that another user can perform editing operations within that partition. Note The following procedure introduces the Unreserve Partitions dialog box and its function. For the purpose of this process guide, do not use this dialog box for this exercise. Use the following steps to access and view the Unreserve Partitions dialog box: 1. Click Setup > Unreserve Partitions or click the icon on the Library Manager interface. The Unreserve Partitions dialog box displays (Figure 2-13). Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 2-19 Using Library Manager Defining Units Display Settings Figure 2-13. Unreserve Partitions Dialog Box Partitions in use would display in this dialog box. You would highlight a partition and click Apply to unreserve the selected partition. 2. Click Close and the Unreserve Partitions dialog box disappears. The Library Manager interface appears. Defining Units Display Settings Use the Units Display dialog box to set the precision for electrical and physical properties and time and percentages for all entities in the active central library. Use this dialog box to specify the active electrical units display format. The precision and the display format of the various types of numbers are considered global notation settings. Note The software restricts working units to English (IN and TH) or Metric (MM and UM). The default is English. The precision in all categories specifies the number of decimal places. An example displays at the right of the precision in the Units Display dialog box. The Regional Settings Properties dialog displays the Number tab by default. Options on the Number tab allow you to set several different parameters. Only the following five displayed settings are respected: • • • Decimal Symbol - Allows you to choose which symbol indicates decimal values. No. (number) of digits after decimal - Any units of resolution (such as inches or millimeters) display at the resolution you specify in this drop-down box. Digit grouping symbol - Groups large numbers so they are easily read. For example, a comma digit grouping symbol makes 9,000,000 easier to read than 9000000. 2-20 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Figure 2-14.lmc) file based on your company’s requirements. For additional information on the Units Display dialog box.Displays leading zeros based on the value entered. Units Display Dialog Box . Click Setup > Units Display or click the Units Display icon dialog box appears (Figure 2-14). However. this option is set so that leading zeros do not display. use this dialog box to modify notation settings used in a central library (. Note These settings apply to properties defined as REAL or INTEGER only. the Units Display Do not change the default settings in this dialog box for this exercise. Library Manager Process Guide.Using Library Manager Defining Units Display Settings • • No. The default is 3. click online help. This exercise uses the default units display settings delivered with the software.Allows you to adjust the number of digits between grouping symbols. EXP2005 SPac1 2-21 . Display leading zeros . Use the following steps to access and view the Units Display dialog box: 1. By default. (number) of digits in group . Setup Parameters Dialog Box For additional information on the Setup Parameters dialog box. define all cell parameters using this dialog box before using Cell Editor software to create cells. Use the Setup Parameters dialog box (Figure 2-15) to set the default design units. click online help for the Setup Parameters dialog box. Figure 2-15. create new user-defined levels.Using Library Manager Setting Up Parameters 2. Due to the significance of the settings in the Setup Parameters dialog box. and select a default via for fanouts. 2-22 Library Manager Process Guide. Use the Setup > Setup Parameters command or click the Setup Parameters icon to define parameters for cells that you build using the Cell Editor software. Click Close to dismiss the Setup Parameters dialog box. DO NOT change the default settings on the Setup Parameters dialog box. Click Cancel to dismiss the Units Display dialog box. Setting Up Parameters Note For the purpose of this process guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . padstacks. cells. cells. Use Library Services command to manipulate data within a central library (. or to/from ASCII (.lmc) files. symbols.slb) into a specified partition in the central library. Import/export ASCII (. Library Manager Process Guide. and IBIS Models from partitions in the central library. save all changes to enable the Library Services software to recognize the new parts. See “Using IBIS Software” on page 5-3 for more information on IBIS software. When importing parts and cells from a library.hkp) files and to delete parts. Import parts.lmc) file. Note Library Services is accessible from either within the Library Manager environment or from the Setup > Library Services command in Expedition PCB. Between partitions in a central library file. symbols. when importing a part data. padstacks. and delete parts. cells. Tip: When creating or modifying part data. and delete parts. move. Use this dialog box to copy. For example. from PCB jobs.txt and . cells. cells. the software automatically imports the cells. and model data: • • • • • • Between central library (.hkp) files. padstacks or IBIS Models. symbols. Import symbols from a standalone symbol library file (. and IBIS Models between libraries. padstacks and IBIS Models from partitions. symbols. or padstacks from a PCB design's local libraries into a specified partition in the central library. padstacks.Using Library Manager Using Library Services to Import DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbols Using Library Services to Import DC/DVExpedition Flow Symbols Note DxD-Expedition flow users should skip this section and proceed to “Importing DxD Symbols into a Central Library” on page 2-27. You can copy.txt and . move. symbols. cells. symbols. and padstacks referenced by the part. EXP2005 SPac1 2-23 . Import and export processes and materials between central libraries that are developed using the Material / Process Editor (see “Using the Material / Process Editor” on page 5-12 for more information). Use the Library Services dialog box to import and export parts. the software automatically imports all referenced objects. and padstacks that already exist in the target central library. the software copies the referenced symbols to the Temp_Symbol partition and cells to the Temp_Cell partition. the company librarian clicks the Refresh icon to reset the Library Services dialog box. or delete these entities until all users have terminated access to them. For example. Use the Export feature only for exporting to central libraries or ASCII. Referenced objects are not copied to or from ASCII. When importing cells (or parts that contain cells). When invoked within a central library. the software prohibits exporting library data to a local design's library. click the Refresh icon to reset the Library Services dialog box. When all users exit a partition. A warning prompt displays for any imported pads. Individual parts. then reselect the external library to import/export cells to the external library. The partition that was in use now appears in the default color. copy. 2-24 Library Manager Process Guide. What if a Partition is in Use? Partitions being accessed by other users display in red text in the Library Services dialog box.Using Library Manager Using Library Services to Import DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbols Note When importing parts data. However. symbols. padstacks and IBIS Models contained in the central library. holes. When all users exit these entities. When importing or exporting parts and cells from/to ASCII. The company librarian cannot move. The company librarian (administrator for the central library) cannot manipulate partitions until all users have exited that partition. the software exports only the cell data. the software only processes the selected part or cell. If you selected an external central library in the Parts tab. Use the options on these tabs to perform various operations with these partitions. Tip: The Import/Export options do not carry over from tab to tab. cells. and symbols being accessed by other users also display in red text in the Library Services dialog box. Operations from the attached central library are allowed when invoked from within a local design library. EXP2005 SPac1 . the padstacks contained in the cell are automatically imported to the Padstack library. when exporting cells to ASCII. Associated padstacks must be exported separately. local design databases and other central libraries can be used as the source library during operations. cells. Each tab in the Library Services dialog box displays the partitions and entries for part data. Click the Symbols tab to display the Symbols dialog box. the Library Services dialog box displays. If you attempt to copy or move an object from a non-reserved partition to a target partition that is Reserved. Click the Browse icon and the following dialog box displays (Figure 2-16). Entities that appear in red text indicate that it is currently in use. cells. 3. To verify a partition is in use. 1. Note See “Using IBIS Software” on page 5-3 for more information on IBIS software.Using Library Manager Using Library Services to Import DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbols Manipulating Objects in the Workspace Tree that are Reserved Individual parts. right click and select the Import Symbols popup command. Library Manager Process Guide. invoke the Partition Editor (see “Creating Central Library Partitions” on page 2-14). EXP2005 SPac1 2-25 . Click the Library Services icon . Use this dialog box to remove entities in the specified “Current Partition”. in this procedure. use Library Services to import the symbol library. and the Import Symbols dialog box displays and prompts you to enter a library. Likewise. However. therefore. 2. Using Library Services to Import DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbols Use Library Services to import two symbols from a symbol library delivered in the software. Padstacks and Model Data Use the Display Delete Dialog icon to display the Delete dialog box. Once access is terminated. Symbols. These symbols will be used later in this process guide. Note The Import Symbols command is also available from the workspace tree viewer. Cells. select symbols to import. the software generates a warning message and prompts you to select a non-reserved partition. and select a target partition in the receiving symbol partition. Highlight a symbol partition. the Copy and Move popup menu commands in the workspace tree are also disabled for any object in the workspace tree that is Reserved. The Delete popup menu command will be disabled for objects that are reserved. click the Refresh Library Status icon to reset the Delete dialog box. and symbols that appear in the workspace tree which are in a Reserved partition cannot be deleted using the Delete popup menu command. the company librarian cannot delete that entity until other users terminate access to it. Deleting Parts. Using Library Manager Using Library Services to Import DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbols Figure 2-16. Browse to the following location and select the symbol library file: <SDD_HOME>\wg\examples\LibMgrPG. Figure 2-17. select Symbol Library files (*. EXP2005 SPac1 . browse to the following location and select the symbol library file: \<SDD_HOME>\wg\examples\LibMgrPG. 5. Importing a Symbol Library Using Library Services 2-26 Library Manager Process Guide.slb) from the Files of Type dropdown box.slb Note If you invoked Library Manager from within Design Capture (DC).slb 6. When using the DC/DV-Expedition flow. Click Open and the two symbols in the LibMgrPG symbol library file display in the Symbols in Import Partition list (Figure 2-17). Select a Symbol Library File Dialog Box 4. Click Close to dismiss the Library Services dialog box. 8. Ensure that Copy displays in the Mode box. In summary. 11. Click the Include All icon to move the symbols to the Symbols to Import list (Figure 2-18). Click Apply to import the symbols into the Company_Library. Figure 2-18. EXP2005 SPac1 2-27 . Importing DxD Symbols into a Central Library DxD-Expedition Library Manager features two methods of importing DxD Symbols: Library Manager Process Guide. Click the Current Partition dropdown box and select Logic Gates.lmc (central library) file. Library Services Dialog Box (Symbols Tab) 10. you used the Library Services dialog box to import two symbols from a remote symbol library into a symbol partition in the Company_Library.lmc file.Using Library Manager Importing DxD Symbols into a Central Library 7. 9. 1 symbols into the Logic_Gates partition. With the Logic_Gates symbol partition highlighted. 1.1 and 74f244_full. Associated cells are imported into the "temp_cell" partition. right click the mouse and select Import Symbols from the pop-up menu (Figure 2-19). Use the following procedure to import the g244a. EXP2005 SPac1 . For example. The DxD symbols are imported to same-named partition as the source partition. The Select Symbols to Import dialog box displays. Tip: The Import Symbols command is also available from the File pulldown menu. Import Symbols Command in the Project Workspace Tree For this exercise. then the symbol is created in an existing (or newly created) symbol partition in the target Central Library. to import DxD symbols into a symbol partition in a central library (. Note Although it is not possible to directly import DxD symbols via Library Services. Click Symbols in the Library Navigation tree to display the Logic_Gates symbol partition. 2. associated DxD symbols and associated cells are included when importing parts from another central library.Using Library Manager Importing DxD Symbols into a Central Library • • Library Migration Wizard (see “DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard” on page A-1 for more information) Import Symbols command (click File > Import Symbols or from the workspace tree popup menu for symbols in Library Manager as shown in Figure 2-19). if the part being imported referenced a symbol in the "digital" symbol partition. 2-28 Library Manager Process Guide. Figure 2-19. available from the workspace tree popup menu.lmc) file. use the Import Symbols command. Use the DC Symbol Editor software to create and edit symbols. go to “Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-36.1 and 74f244_full. Select the g244a. use the Properties dialog box on Windows to remove “read only” access (change the permissions to “full control”) for both symbols. available from the Library Manager interface. open multiple symbol libraries. If you ar using the Design Capture/DesignView-Expedition flow. change the permissions associated with these symbols appropriately using thc chmod command. Use the DC Symbol Editor.slb. Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Note If you are using the DxD-Expedition flow. use the Design Capture (DC) Symbol Editor software as instructed in this section. The file name extension of a symbol library is "." Library Manager Process Guide. If you receive errors when importing these symbols. On Linux and UNIX. EXP2005 SPac1 2-29 .1 DxDesigner symbols from the dialog box and click Open. DxD Symbols Displayed in the Workspace Tree Note These symbols may be “read only” when delivered to your computer.Using Library Manager Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) 3. The software imports these two symbols into the Logic_Gates symbol partition (Figure 2-20). and edit multiple symbols in a single work session. Figure 2-20. Browse to the following directory on your machine: \<SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr 4. to create a symbol in a specific partition in the central library. Symbols are stored in library files called partitions (that you created in the previous procedure) within the SymbolLibs directory. Each symbol contains an internal time stamp. Parts Manager is available only from the standalone Library Manager dialog box. The library can contain multiple versions of a symbol stored in separate partitions (for example. Select Tools > Symbol Editor or click the Symbol Editor icon interface to invoke the DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbol Editor.slb. all editors EXCEPT Cell Editor. and Parts Manager are accessible. create a 74F244_Half symbol in the symbol partition you created in the central library (. When invoking Library Manager from DC.slb. symbols are identified by symbol name in a symbol partition. Consult “Using Symbol Editor for DC/DV Symbols” on page 5-6 for additional information. border. Click the Symbols (Circuit & Logical) icon to display the Symbol Editor interface. IBIS Models. 2. all editors EXCEPT Symbol Editor and Parts Manager are accessible. When invoking Library Manager from Expedition PCB. 2-30 Library Manager Process Guide. in the Library Manager Note When invoking Library Manager within a point tool (such as Design Capture (DC) or Expedition PCB).lmc) file must display in the Central Library text edit field. The two symbols that display (74F244_Full and g244a) are used later in this exercise. EXP2005 SPac1 . Padstacks. Click File > Open to display the Partition Open dialog box (Figure 2-21). Creating the 74F244_Half Symbol (DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbol Editor) Use the following steps to create a 74F244_Half symbol using the DC Symbol Editor: Tip: The newly created central library (. Layout Templates.lmc) file. capacitor. In this procedure.Using Library Manager Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Within a central library file. and connector. 1. only editors that apply to the specific point tool are available. Select Logic Gates and click OK. Partition Open Dialog Box 3. Figure 2-21.slb). Drawing the Symbol Use the following steps to draw the 74f244_Half symbol in the DC Symbol Editor: 1. Click the New Symbol icon . Entries display in alphabetical order in the workspace tree. Use the commands on the Place toolbar to create the symbol. Note Before using the Place > Pin command. Click the Display tab and de-select the Pin Text option. This prevents multiple users from editing the same entity at the same time. that partition and all entities within that partition become "Read Only" to other users. You create symbols in this work area. The software displays the work area. use the Place > Line command and add pins using the Place > Pin command. To place pins on the symbol. 5. After exiting the partition. 4. and click OK. ensure that the Symbol Type is set to IC. the New Symbol dialog box displays. Upon completion. Key in 74F244_Half. EXP2005 SPac1 2-31 . click the right mouse button to display the Properties dialog box. Tip: If needed. This prevents default pin placement text from appearing in the design when you place pins. another user can access and edit entities in that partition. click the Maximize icon on the workspace window (not the Symbol Editor window) to expand the symbol design display. the symbol should appear as shown in Figure 2-22: Library Manager Process Guide.Using Library Manager Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Tip: When accessing a partition. Click the right mouse button and select Cancel to exit the Place > Line and Place > Pin commands. Naming Pins Use the following steps to name all pins in the schematic using the DC Symbol Editor: 1. EXP2005 SPac1 . the Properties dialog box displays.Using Library Manager Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-22. Symbol Editor Interface with 74f244_Half Displayed 2. 2-32 Library Manager Process Guide. Double click on the first pin. hold the shift key and press the key to the left of the "1" key) in the Value field. Click the Text tab and select Pin Name from the Type list. and click OK. EXP2005 SPac1 2-33 . enter ~G (to type the tilde ("~"). 3. Click in the workspace to deselect the pin. Properties Dialog Box The symbol appears as shown in Figure 2-24: Library Manager Process Guide. and selecting the command from the pop-up menu.Using Library Manager Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Tip: You can also access the Properties dialog box by double clicking on a pin. clicking on the right mouse button. Pin names cannot have a "\" character or an embedded space. press ALT + ENTER on the keyboard to access the command. Or. 2. The Properties dialog box should appear as shown in Figure 2-23: Figure 2-23. select the four pins on the right side of the symbol. Hold the Shift key. and cost to the symbol: 1. and select the Place Text icon. If not. and select the Place Text icon. 2. EXP2005 SPac1 . Select the Display tab. An increment value of 1 displays in the Value and Delta fields. the software automatically numbers all selected pins. 4. Adding Pin Numbers Follow these steps to add the remaining pin names. part name. Hold the Shift key. 5.Using Library Manager Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-24. part number. click the Invisible text option. Click in the workspace to deselect the pins. and click OK. select Pin Name from the Type list. Enter A in the Value field and select the Auto increment/decrement option. Click OK. Tip: If the text does not display. 3. Pin Name appears in the Type list. click the right mouse button and select Properties from the pop-up menu. Naming a Pin on a Symbol Tip: Use the Place > Text command to add text properties. This command is useful when placing incremental text. 2-34 Library Manager Process Guide. select the four pins on the left side of the symbol. Library Manager Process Guide. 7. 2. and click OK. select Part Name from the Type/Value list. Select the Display tab. click the right mouse button and select Properties from the pop-up menu. 8. Click Cancel to dismiss the Place Text dialog box. Click OK. 3. Adding Symbol Properties Use the following steps to add properties to the symbol: Note The Place Text dialog will display data that was used in previous steps.Using Library Manager Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) 6. select the Text Placeholders option. EXP2005 SPac1 2-35 . Click in the workspace to deselect the pins. and click OK. If not. the software automatically numbers all selected pins. change the increment Value and Delta to 1. place Part Number and Cost as shown in Figure 2-25. You will need to delete any text in the Value field and deselect the Auto Position option. Tip: If the text does not display. The text attaches to the cursor. Using the steps you just learned. 1. An increment value of 1 displays in the Value and Delta fields. Place the text under the block. Enter Y in the Value field and select the Auto increment/decrement option. 4. Move the pin names as shown in Figure 2-25. Select the Place Text icon. Click on the screen to de-select any selected item and press 5 on the keypad (Num Lock must be off) to refresh the screen. EXP2005 SPac1 . 7. 6.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-25. Symbol 74f244_Half With Pins Named 5. See “Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations” on page E-1 for more information. Click File > Exit to close the 74f224_Half symbol and exit the DC/DV-Expedition Library Manager Symbol Editor. You can use DxDesigner to create a symbol. Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Tip: If you are using the Design Capture/DesignView-Expedition flow. you can access a Dx Symbol Editor from the Library Manager workspace tree (or toolbar). However. use the Design Capture (DC) Symbol Editor software (see “Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-29. You are not required to verify the symbol. Click File > Save to save the symbol. 2-36 Library Manager Process Guide. see “Using Symbol Editor for DxD Symbols” on page 5-7. to familiarize you with tools and options in the Dx Symbol Editor. available from the Library Manager workspace tree or toolbar. Complete the required entries in the Symbol Creation Wizard dialog boxes. the software creates a Dx symbol to the specifications entered via the wizard. However. EXP2005 SPac1 2-37 . Using the Dx Symbol Creation Wizard Library Manager features a Dx symbol creation wizard that walks you through the steps of creating a new symbol using the Dx Symbol Editor. the exercises in this process guide instruct you how to use the tools in the software application to create a new symbol. Upon completion. Creating a 74f244_half Symbol in Dx Symbol Editor Use the following processes to create a 74f244_half symbol in the Dx Symbol Editor: Library Manager Process Guide. Right-click an existing symbol partition in the project workspace tree and select Symbol Wizard from the popup menu (Figure 2-26). Use the following steps to access the Dx Symbol Creation Wizard: 1. Symbol Wizard Command from the Workspace Tree The first page of the Dx Symbol Creation Wizard appears. consult the online help associated with the software. For supplemental information on creating symbols in Dx Symbol Editor. Use Dx Symbol Editor to create and edit a symbol in the DxD-Expedition flow. 2.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Use the Dx Symbol Editor. For general information on Dx Symbol Editor. to create a symbol in a specific partition in the central library supporting the DxD-Expedition flow. Consult online help associated with the Dx Symbol Creation Wizard for more information. Figure 2-26. This symbol is stored in a partition (that you created in the previous procedure) within the SymbolLibs\<partition_name>\sym directory. Tip: To invoke Dx Symbol Editor from the menubar. Select the Logic_Gates partition (Symbol Partition) in the workspace tree and select New Symbol from the popup menu (Figure 2-27). 74f244_half Tip: In the DxDesigner . Figure 2-27. Log files containing errors generated by the Dx Symbol Editor are written to the LogFiles directory for the active central library.Expedition flow.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) 1. select the Logic_Gates partition in the Navigator Tree and click Tools > Symbol Editor (for DxDesigner symbols). EXP2005 SPac1 . Properties Section of Dx Symbol Editor 2-38 Library Manager Process Guide. 2. Figure 2-28. symbol names cannot contain spaces or special characters. The symbol type is not set by default (but you will set it later in this chapter). New Symbol Command from the Workspace Tree The New Symbol dialog box appears. You can also invoke DxDesigner Symbol Editor using the Symbol Editor icon on the toolbar. Note that the symbol partition and name appears in the Properties section of the symbol editor interface. 3. Click OK. the Dx Symbol Editor work area displays (Figure 2-28). Key in the following symbol name in the New Symbol dialog box. 1. enable an Autosave feature. For the purposes of this process guide. Click File > Preferences in the Dx Symbol Editor to view available settings. you can adjust grid spacing and pin length and spacing characteristics. use the Preferences dialog box to set default characteristics for the symbol editing environment before creating a symbol. pin length. Figure 2-29. Library Manager Process Guide. For example. and pin spacing in the grid using controls in the dialog box.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Setting Symbol Editor Preferences When the Dx Symbol Editor workspace displays. and adjust the font size used for graphics and associated labels. use the settings in Figure 2-29. Adjust the grid visibility. EXP2005 SPac1 2-39 . Preferences Dialog Box .General (Dx Symbol Editor) 2. grid spacing. The Preferences dialog box appears (Figure 2-29). Click Apply to save the changes. Preferences Dialog Box . 3. and style. Figure 2-30. color. The Dx Symbol Editor can be set to use either English or Metric units of measure (Figure 2-29). This allows more precise editing control when creating or editing a symbol. EXP2005 SPac1 .Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Tip: Click the Crosshair cursor visible to enable the crosshair cursor within Dx Symbol Editor. Click Appearance and the Preferences dialog box provides tools to adjust the display of elements in the console window and symbol window (Figure 2-30). For example. select the Pin Label Font subcategory. to adjust the font settings for pin labels that appear in the Symbol Window. The status field in Dx Symbol Editor indicates the exact coordinates of the cursor as it moves. Tools are available in the dialog box to adjust font size. The crosshair position refreshes as you move the cursor.Appearance (Dx Symbol Editor) 2-40 Library Manager Process Guide. Preferences Dialog Box . Use Enable autosave to save the active Dx symbol to disk at regular intervals defined in the Autosave delay in minutes selection box. Enable the Save Default Graphics Attributes option to always use the default colors and fonts for the symbol assigned by the Dx Symbol Editor. This ensures the symbol design is saved to the appropriate location in your central library directory structure. save symbol designs to the sym folder of your central library symbol partition. 6. DefaultText Color = Yellow Symbol saved with Skip Graphics Attributes option enabled . Library Manager Process Guide. the symbol text is yellow and uses Roman font. Click OK to save all settings and dismiss the Preferences dialog box.Save (Dx Symbol Editor) 5.In DxDesigner. This provides tools to customize automatic save intervals used by the Dx Symbol Editor (Figure 2-31). EXP2005 SPac1 2-41 . Note Enable the Skip Graphics Attributes option to use default colors and fonts from the editing environment in which the symbol is opened.In DxDesigner. Symbol saved with Save Default Graphics Attributes option enabled . 7. Default Text Color = Red Settings in DxDesigner: Default Text Font = Roman. Click Save in the Preferences dialog box. Click File > Save to save your settings. Figure 2-31. the symbol text is red and uses Kanji font. Caution Before performing the next step. For example: Settings in Dx Symbol Editor: Default Text Font = Kanji. Set this option to meet your requirements.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Tip: Click Default at any time to return settings in the Preferences dialog box to the default settings. 4. the symbol fill color is transparent when you invoke the Dx Symbol Editor. Outline Area. Adjust the fill (background) color and symbol rectangle areas before creating the 74f244_half symbol. and Type By default. Rectangle. Click the symbol rectangle and ensure the rectangle highlights. Click the edge of the symbol rectangle area. Tip: If needed. use the default Fill Color setting. For the purposes of this process guide. to improve visibility of the symbol rectangle and The symbol rectangle should match Figure 2-33: 2-42 Library Manager Process Guide. While holding the mouse button. the Symbol Editor displays a template with a symbol outline area in the workspace area. 1. click Zoom In grid points. Note the default settings for Fill Color and Outline Color symbol attributes in the Properties table (Figure 2-32). EXP2005 SPac1 . Setting Fill Color By default. The symbol origin is located at the bottom left of the symbol outline area by default. you can set this parameter using settings in the Properties table. Figure 2-32. 2. However. adjust the dimensions of the symbol rectangle to match that shown in Figure 2-33.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Adjusting Fill Color. 2. Adjusting Fill Color and Background Attributes (Dx Symbol Editor) Adjusting Rectangle Size and Dimensions Adjust the symbol rectangle size and dimensions using the following steps: 1. The symbol attributes update to display default settings. Select the Symbol Type attribute and enable the dropdown list to view the list of valid symbol types (Figure 2-34).Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-33. 1. the default symbol type is “UNKNOWN” until you specify otherwise. Corrected Dimensions for 74f244_half Symbol Specifying Symbol Type Attribute When creating a new symbol in the Dx Symbol Editor. EXP2005 SPac1 2-43 . click outside the symbol outline area to refresh the list of symbol properties (right pane of the Dx Symbol Editor). Library Manager Process Guide. Use the following steps to assign a symbol type attribute for the 74f244_half symbol: Note If needed. to clear the Place Pin and Label command. and insert As you insert each pin. if 2-44 Library Manager Process Guide. use the Symbol > Symbol Attributes command to add standard property type attributes. Adding Pins and Defining Pin Attributes Add pins to the symbol and define their attributes using the following steps: 1. use the Add Pin and Edit command to place the pin. Click Symbol > Add Pin command or Symbol > Add Pin and Edit pins on the left side of the symbol as shown in Figure 2-35. Click File > Save to save all changes to the symbol. Tip: Click the Select Mode icon needed. for the first pin.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-34. key in the text and press Return to place you back into Place Symbol with Label mode. EXP2005 SPac1 . 3. Tip: For some types of attributes. then key in ~G to name the pin. For example. Ensure that MODULE is the Value associated with the Symbol Type property (attribute). 2. Select MODULE from the dropdown list. Specifying a Symbol Type Property (Dx Symbol Editor) 2. and press Return to place you back to Place Pin with Label mode. Repeat Step 1 until the symbol resembles Figure 2-35. EXP2005 SPac1 2-45 . place pins on the right side of the symbol using the Add Pins dialog box. 3. the Add Pins Array dialog box displays with default settings. Use settings that appear in Figure 2-36: Library Manager Process Guide. Use the dialog box to place pins on the right side of the symbol.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-35. The Add Pins dialog box lets you predefine pin attributes within a symbol before placement. Click Symbol > Add Pin Array. Symbol 74f244_half (Left Side Pins) in Dx Symbol Editor Next. Add Pins Dialog Box (Dx Symbol Editor) 4. the symbol editor places pins along the right side of the pin. Ensure the right side pins are aligned with the left side pins. Click OK. EXP2005 SPac1 . 2-46 Library Manager Process Guide. Using the mouse. the symbol should appear similar to Figure 2-37. 5. click on and drag and drop the pins into the appropriate position on the symbol. Upon completion.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-36. use the Dx Symbol Editor to assign properties and attributes to the pins on the symbol. EXP2005 SPac1 2-47 . Click the first pin ~G (upper left in the design). Symbol 74f244_half (Left and Right Side Pins) in Dx Symbol Editor Tip: The Symbol Editor allows you to rotate and align one pin at a time. Assigning Pin Numbers and Properties to Pins Once you have placed the pins. the Pin Property attributes update in the Property table within the Dx Symbol Editor. Library Manager Process Guide. 1. Click Symbol > Edit Selection to view the rotation and alignment commands that apply to pins in a Dx schematic.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-37. Click New attribute to enable the software to add a new property and assign it to the pin. To make a property and/or value visible within the symbol. Tip: To delete an attribute. 4. Figure 2-38. drag the separator down until it appears. If you do not see the pin-list window on left side of Symbol Editor user interface. Type # in the Property column to assign a pin number property and enter 1. Click any field in the Properties table and click File > Save to save the pin number attributes you just entered. For this exercise. The Properties table should appear as shown in Figure 2-38. click the Delete icon in the associated Value column. 2-48 Library Manager Process Guide.19 in the Value column. do not enable visibility for these properties and values. 2. select the checkboxes. 3. Assigning Pin Attributes (Dx Symbol Editor) Note The checkboxes adjacent to the Pin and # properties and values control visibility within the symbol. EXP2005 SPac1 .Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Note Ensure that the Label value in the Property table is ~G. Left Side Pin Attributes Pin Name A1 Property and Value Label = A1 # = 2.15 Port Type = IN Inverted = False Length = 20. EXP2005 SPac1 2-49 .7 Port Type= OUT Inverted = False Length = 20. Right Side Pin Attributes Pin Name Y1 Property and Value Label = Y1 #= 18.000 Enable Visibility? Yes No Y2 Yes No Library Manager Process Guide.000 Label = A3 # = 6.13 Port Type = IN Inverted = False Length = 20.000 Enable Visibility? Yes No A2 Yes No A3 Yes No A4 Yes No Table 2-3.11 Port Type = IN Inverted = False Length = 20. Use the pin names and attributes as instructed in Table 2-2 and Table 2-3: Table 2-2. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to add pin numbers to the remaining pins in the symbol.000 Label = A2 # = 4.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) 5.9 Port Type = OUT Inverted = False Length = 20.000 Label = A4 # = 8.000 Label = Y2 # = 16.17 Port Type = IN Inverted = False Length = 20. 5 Port Type = OUT Inverted = False Length = 20. the editor creates a new property entry field.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Table 2-3. Click in the symbol design to refresh the Property editor (right side of the symbol editor). package type.. Click New attribute. Ensure the visibility check boxes are not selected (see Figure 2-40).. Package Type and Other Attributes (Dx Symbol Editor) Use the following steps to add device. The Property editor should appear similar to Figure 2-39: Figure 2-39.. key in 100-100000-001 in the Value field. 2-50 Library Manager Process Guide. Type DEVICE in the Property field... Press Esc (Escape) or click the Select Mode icon mode.000 Enable Visibility? Yes No Y4 Yes No Adding Device. 4.000 Label = Y4 # = 12.3 Port Type = OUT Inverted = False Length = 20. Right Side Pin Attributes Pin Name Y3 Property and Value Label = Y3 # = 14. to clear any active command 2. EXP2005 SPac1 . Displaying Symbol Attributes (Dx Symbol Editor) 3. and other required information to the symbol: 1. (LOGIC:74F244_FULL). if provided. However. enter the properties and attributes provided in Table 2-4 in the dialog box. Click New attribute. Note If a symbol is only intended for use in the DxDesigner-Expedition flow. EXP2005 SPac1 2-51 . is used by the cell previewer in Cell Editor. VCC. only the DEVICE ane REFDES attributes are required. Assigning Properties to 74f244_half Symbol (Dx Symbol Editor) Property Value Enable Visibility? No No No No PKG_TYPE 20_PIN_SOIC HETERO PARTS SIGNAL LOGIC:G244A. Click File > Save to save all changes. (LOGIC:74F244_HALF) 2 GND. if you plan to use the symbol in DxDesigner to a third-party flow or from DxDesigner in the DxD-Expedition flow.. 6. Using the process documented in Steps 3 through 5.. Adding Symbol Attributes (Dx Symbol Editor) 5.Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-40.. then all attributes in Table 2-4 are required. and then click File > Save to save the property and attribute you just entered. The software adds these properties to the list in alphabetical order: Table 2-4.20 7. The HETERO and PARTS attributes are not required since they are part of the part (PDB) mapping.. The PKG_TYPE attribute is optional but. Pin numbers are not required.10. The Property editor should appear similar to Figure 2-41: Library Manager Process Guide. The Library Manager interface continues to display. 2-52 Library Manager Process Guide. Right-click the symbol you want to edit and select the Rename popup menu command (Figure 2-42). EXP2005 SPac1 .Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-41. Symbol 74f244_Half with Pins Defined (Dx Symbol Editor) 8. This discussion describes the functionality of renaming a Dx symbol in a central library. A Dx symbol that appears in the project workspace tree can be renamed and saved to the active central library using the Rename popup menu command. and PINSWAP. SIGNAL. g244a. To rename a symbol: 1. or 74f244_full symbols in the Logic_Gates partition. Click File > Close to dismiss the 74f244_half symbol and File > Quit to exit the DxD Symbol Editor. Tip: Three attributes that can be defined more than once in the DxD Symbol Editor: NC. Renaming a Dx Symbol in the Project Workspace Tree Note Do not rename the 74f244_half. Key in the new Dx symbol name (for example. EXP2005 SPac1 2-53 . Rename Dx Symbol Command from the Workspace Tree The Rename Symbol dialog box appears with the current symbol name displayed in the text edit field (Figure 2-43). Library Manager Process Guide. The software automatically updates symbol name references of all Parts within the central library that reference the symbol to reflect the new name. Rename Symbol (Dx) Dialog Box 2. The symbol is renamed in the central library (Figure 2-44).Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-42. ok_ic_working) and click OK. Figure 2-43. Right-click the symbol you want to edit and select the Delete popup menu command (Figure 2-45). To delete a symbol: 1. EXP2005 SPac1 .Using Library Manager Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-44. Delete Symbol Command from the Workspace Tree The symbol you highlighted is removed from the workspace tree and from the central library. Renamed Dx Symbol in Workspace Tree Deleting a Symbol from the Workspace Tree A symbol that appears in the project workspace tree can be removed from the active central library using the Delete popup menu command. 2-54 Library Manager Process Guide. Figure 2-45. the Padstack Editor dialog box displays. Library Manager Process Guide. Right-click on a Padstack type. select New Padstack from the popup menu. such as symbols. Creating a Surface Mount Padstack Use the following steps to create a surface mount padstack: 1. See “Using Padstack Editor” on page 5-7 for general information. Holes. Use the following procedures to create pads. Creating Pads. See “Copying Objects in the Workspace Tree” on page 2-99 and “Moving Objects in the Workspace Tree” on page 2-101 for more information. holes. Tip: You can also invoke and use the Padstack Editor from the Padstacks node in the project workspace. Holes. and padstacks in the appropriate partition of the central library (. Click the Padstack Editor icon on the Library Manager interface or click Tools > Padstack Editor. holes. Padstack names are ordered alphabetically in the workspace tree. The Padstack Editor dialog box appears with the new padstack name and the correct Padstack Type selected by default in the dialog box. and padstacks for use in a cell that you will build later. and Padstacks Copying and Moving Symbols in the Workspace Tree Central library objects.lmc) file. EXP2005 SPac1 2-55 . and key in the new padstack name. can be copied and moved using popup menu commands in the workspace tree.Using Library Manager Creating Pads. and Padstacks Use the Padstack Editor to create pads. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click the New Pad icon and click Rectangle from the Properties area. Holes. and press Enter. The Pad Parameters area displays text entry fields for width and length properties.SMD). 2-56 Library Manager Process Guide. Key in 24 for width. Figure 2-46. 4. 70 for length. Padstack Editor Interface Note Ensure that Rectangle 70x24 appears in the Names field and is selected. and Padstacks 2. 3. Click the Pads tab to create a new Surface Mount pad (Padstack Type is Pin .Using Library Manager Creating Pads. The Preview window displays the surface mount pad according to these dimensions (Figure 2-46). Click the Padstacks tab. click the New Padstack icon name: 24x70 Rectangle Note Ensure that Pin . Tip: You can highlight both fields by pressing the Ctrl key. 3. EXP2005 SPac1 2-57 . 4.Using Library Manager Creating Pads. Highlight the Bottom Mount field from the Pads list and click the left arrow icon (Figure 2-47). and then clicking the left arrow icon. selecting a pad from the Available pads list. Highlight the Top Mount field from the Pads list and click the left arrow icon. 2.SMD displays in the Type field within the Properties section of the dialog box. Rectangle 70x24 displays in the Pads list (adjacent to Top Mount). and Padstacks Building a Surface Mount Padstack Use the following steps to build a surface mount padstack in the design: 1. The software populates both fields. and key in the following Library Manager Process Guide. Holes. Highlight Rectangle 70x24 from the Available Pads list. clicking on the Top Mount and Bottom Mount fields. Using the Assignment Method dropdown box. Select the drill symbol as shown in Figure 2-48: 2-58 Library Manager Process Guide. 4. Click the Holes tab and click the New Hole icon. EXP2005 SPac1 . Key in 38 in the Diameter text entry field and press Enter. 3. Building a Through-Hole Padstack Use the following steps to create a through-hole padstack: 1. and Padstacks Figure 2-47. Holes. select the Use Drill Symbol from List option (in the Drill Symbol Assignment box).Using Library Manager Creating Pads. Click File > Save to save the finished surface mount padstack. 2. Padstack Editor Interface (for Surface Mount Padstack) 5. Holes. . Building a Pad Use the following steps to finish building the pad: 1. Select Pin . Key in 58 for the diameter and press Enter. Padstack Editor (Holes Tab) With Drill Symbol Graphic Note This drill symbol graphic appears in the PCB layout when using the Output > NC Drill command in Expedition PCB. and Padstacks Figure 2-48.Using Library Manager Creating Pads. and key in 58 Round. Defining Padstacks 1. Click the Pads tab and click the New Pad icon. 3.Through in the Type field. click the New Padstack icon 2. Library Manager Process Guide. key in 58. EXP2005 SPac1 2-59 . Click the New Pad icon. 2. select Square. Select the Padstacks tab. and press Enter. Holes. 10. Highlight Square 58 in the Available Pads list and move it into the Mount Side and Opposite Side entries of the Pads list. 4. EXP2005 SPac1 . then click the left arrow button to move Round 58 to the highlighted areas in the Pads list. Tip: You can highlight Mount Side.Through in the Type dropdown box. Highlight Rnd 38 in the Available Holes list. Internal.Using Library Manager Creating Pads. 8. Select Square 58 in the Mount Side field (Pads list). The Preview window displays the new padstack (Figure 2-49). Click the New Padstack icon and key in 58 Square. and Opposite Side fields by holding and dragging the left mouse button to highlight the individual fields. 7. Highlight Rnd 38 in the Available Holes list. 5. 2-60 Library Manager Process Guide. Internal. Highlight Round 58 in the Available Pads list and move it into the Internal entry of the Pads list. 9. and Padstacks 3. Note Colors that appear in the Preview window may be slightly different depending upon color settings on the workstation. 6. The Preview window updates with the new hole. and Opposite Side fields in the Pads list. Highlight Round 58 in the Available Pads list and move it into the Mount Side. Select Pin . Padstack Editor (Padstacks Tab) With Fields Populated 11. Click File > Save to save the design and create the padstacks. Viewing Padstacks in the Workspace Tree Tip: To invoke the Padstack Editor on any padstack in the workspace tree viewer. Figure 2-50.Using Library Manager Creating Pads. Library Manager Process Guide. The padstacks appear in the appropriate Padstacks node in the project workspace viewer (Figure 2-50). rightclick the padstack and select the Edit popup menu command (Figure 2-51). Holes. EXP2005 SPac1 2-61 . and Padstacks Figure 2-49. Holes. Viewing Associated Pads and Holes in the Workspace Tree Use the project workspace tree to view the associated pads and holes associated with the padstacks you just created.Through padstack element. For more information. Displaying Associated Pads and Holes in the Workspace Tree Note that the Associated Pads and Associated Holes match the settings in the Padstack Editor (see Figure 2-49 on page 2-61). Click 58 Square in the Pin . EXP2005 SPac1 .Using Library Manager Creating Pads. and Padstacks Figure 2-51. This provides a convenient way to view all pads and holes associated with a padstack without executing the Padstack Editor software within Library Manager. This opens the selected pad or hole in the Padstack Editor (Figure 2-53). use the Edit popup menu command to view the pad or hole in the Padstack Editor. see “Viewing Object Associations in a Central Library” on page 1-15. Click File > Exit to dismiss the Padstack Editor. Figure 2-52. Edit Padstack Popup Menu Command in Workspace Tree 12. The associated pads and holes display in the workspace tree (Figure 2-52). Editing Pad and Holes Via the Workspace Tree Viewer While viewing pads and holes associated with a padstack in the workspace tree viewer. 2-62 Library Manager Process Guide. Highlight the Pin .Through padstack and click the right mouse button to display the Find command (Figure 2-54): Library Manager Process Guide. Holes. Editing Pads and Holes from the Workspace Tree Finding Padstack Elements in the Workspace Tree Use the project workspace tree to find padstack elements you entered using the Padstack Editor dialog box. Use the popup menu commands to query for any padstack names. pad names. the list of padstacks in the central library display in the Project Workspace tab. EXP2005 SPac1 2-63 . This provides a convenient way to find view all padstack elements without executing the Padstack Editor software within Library Manager. and hole names associated with the central library. Expand the Padstacks node in the project workspace. 2.Using Library Manager Creating Pads. and Padstacks Figure 2-53. 1. Click Find and enter the following values in the dialog box (Figure 2-55): Figure 2-55. Figure 2-56.Using Library Manager Creating Pads. Finding a Padstack Element in the Workspace Tree 4. Holes. Click OK. and Padstacks Figure 2-54. Finding 58 Round Padstack in the Workspace Tree 2-64 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . The software queries the Pin-Through node and finds the 58 Round padstack element in the tree (Figure 2-56). Viewing Padstack Elements in the Workspace Tree 3. card ejectors. In this exercise. EXP2005 SPac1 2-65 .Using Library Manager Creating Cells Creating Cells Given that you successfully created padstacks.lmc) file. invoke Cell Editor and note that incomplete (or “in progress”) cell designs are denoted by colored text in the Cell Editor dialog box. use the Cell Editor to create cells for the design. and/or Panel cells). For more information on Cell Editor (for example. washers. Note Cells (and parts) that are saved as “complete”. Panel cells are elements that are added to a manufacturing panel to aid in the manufacturing process. consult online help. Note Panel cells functionality is only available when Library Manager is invoked in standalone mode. Mechanical. Drawing. You will use this method when creating a second cell (see “Creating Cells in the SOIC Partition” on page 2-70). heatsinks. If large or complex cell designs take more than one editing session to complete. Cell Editor software provides tools to create Package. Drawing cells are composed of drawing objects and text. Mechanical cells are objects (such as nuts. Creating Cells Use the following procedure to create a cell using the Cell Editor software (accessed from the toolbar or menubar): Tip: You can also create cells by clicking the Cells node in the project workspace and selecting the New Cell command. Mechanical. bolts. Library Manager Process Guide. and Panel cells in the cell partitions within a central library (. plastic mounting devices. When ready to finish work on an incomplete cell design. creating Package. they cannot be saved as “incomplete” or “in progress”. Drawing. and so forth) and may or may not be referenced in the part data. you will use options on the Mechanical tab to create a cell using Cell Editor accessed from the toolbar (or menubar). save the cell design using commands in Cell Editor. Select the incomplete cell design and continue your work in Cell Editor. Package cells are associated with a part in the Parts Database. The incomplete cell design is saved locally but not written to the central library and cannot be used until it is fully completed. Panel cells are not available when you invoke Library Manager from Expedition PCB. When the cell design is considered complete. The software saves the completed cell design to the central library. Cell Editor allows you to save an incomplete cell design and exit the software. Click the New Cell icon. ensure the Dip_Thru partition displays.Using Library Manager Creating Cells 1. Click Next. the Create Package Cell dialog box appears. The Cell Editor displays. key in 20_PIN_DIP in the Cell Name text entry field: Figure 2-57. If you are using the DxD-Expedition flow. the Place Pins dialog box appears. Enter the following values in the Create Package Cell dialog box (see Figure 2-57). 2-66 Library Manager Process Guide. When using the DxD-Expedition flow. EXP2005 SPac1 . 2. When using the DC/DV-Expedition flow. ensure that Dip Thru displays in the Partition pulldown. Create Package Cell Dialog Box (Cell Editor) 4. Click Tools > Cell Editor or click the Cell Editor icon. 3. 7. Key in the measurements displayed in Figure 2-58: Library Manager Process Guide.Using Library Manager Creating Cells Note In the following steps. 8. select 58 Round from the dropdown list. Note Continue to press and hold the SHIFT key while performing steps 7 and 8 (until you assign all pins). EXP2005 SPac1 2-67 . Hold the SHIFT key. Click the dropdown list and then click 58 Square. Click the Pattern Place tab and select DIP from the Pattern Type dropdown box. If you do not press and hold the SHIFT key while performing these steps. Placing the Pins and Cell Graphics Perform the following steps to place pins and cell graphics: 1. 5. This highlights the remaining pads in the list. 2. Padstack Names 2 through 20 now display 58 Round. Scroll to the bottom of the list then press and hold the SHIFT key. click the center of the Padstack Name field. information in the Place Pins dialog box disappears. 6. For Pin 1. and release the SHIFT key. Hold the SHIFT key and select the center of the Padstack Name field for Pin 20. select padstacks to build into the cell. Click the center of the Padstack Name field for Pin 2. Click in the screen area to deselect the cell graphics. Select the Draw Mode icon and move the Ref Des and Part No text objects into the positions as illustrated in Figure 2-59. Click the Maximize icon window. 5. 6. To zoom out. Colors that appear in the workspace window may be slightly different depending upon color settings on the workstation. either hold the Shift key and click the middle mouse button or hold and drag to pan.Using Library Manager Creating Cells Figure 2-58. Click the Fit All icon in the workspace window to enlarge the Cell Editor to adjust the display. Tip: You can use the middle mouse button to Zoom and Pan. Click Place to create the cell according to the specified measurements. Click to zoom in. EXP2005 SPac1 . Place both Ref Des in the same location. 2-68 Library Manager Process Guide. 7. Pattern Place Tab (Place Pins Dialog Box) 3. 4. EXP2005 SPac1 2-69 . Cell Editor Interface (With “Ref Des” Displayed) Note If the Part No (part number) and origin do not appear for the 20 pin dip cell (or 20_PIN_DIP cell in DxD-Expedition Library Manager). Click Apply in Cell Editor to save changes to the Dip Thru partition (or the Dip_Thru partition in DxD-Expedition Library Manager). Click File > Exit Graphics to return to the Cell Editor environment. Library Manager Process Guide. Adjust the Part No property to match Figure 2-59. 8. click View > Display Control in Cell Editor. 9. Click File > Save to save the design.Using Library Manager Creating Cells Figure 2-59. 10. Click the Part tab in the Display Control dialog box and select Part Numbers and Origin check boxes. Click OK. If you are using DxD-Expedition Library Manager. right-click the mouse button to display the popup menu commands. Figure 2-60. select the SOIC partition. Key in 20 pin SOIC (or 20_pin_SOIC if you are using the DxDesigner-Expedition flow) in the New Cell dialog box (Figure 2-61). ensure that 20_pin_SOIC appears in the Cell Name text entry field. EXP2005 SPac1 . The Create Package Cell dialog box displays.Using Library Manager Creating Cells Creating Cells in the SOIC Partition In this procedure. In the workspace tree. and select New Cell from the popup menu (Figure 2-60). 1. you create cells in the SOIC partition using popup menu commands from the workspace tree. Enter the following values in the Create Package Cell dialog box (see Figure 2-62). 2-70 Library Manager Process Guide. New Cell Command from the Workspace Tree 2. 4. New Cell Dialog Box from the Workspace Tree 3. Figure 2-61. click in the center of the Padstack Name field. A dropdown box displays in the right edge of the Padstack Name field for Pin 20. Hold the SHIFT key and select 24x70 Rectangle from the dropdown list. All Padstack Names 1 . This highlights the remaining pads in the list. 7. and click in the center of the Padstack Name field. Click Next to enter the Cell Editor environment. Library Manager Process Guide. 8. then press and hold the SHIFT key. Click the Pattern Place tab and select SOIC from the Pattern Type dropdown box. Scroll to the bottom of the list. 6. For Pin 1. Hold the SHIFT key. Create Package Cell Dialog Box (Cell Editor) 5. EXP2005 SPac1 2-71 .20 now display 24x70 rectangle with 90 degree rotation. select Pin 20. Select 90 from the Rotation dropdown and release the SHIFT key. 9.Using Library Manager Creating Cells Figure 2-62. Completing the Drawing in Cell Editor Use the following steps to adjust the display in the Cell Editor window and complete your work in the Cell Editor environment: 1. Place Pins Dialog Box (Cell Editor) 11. Maximize the Cell Editor window using the Maximize icon window. Click the down arrow next to the Snap Grid icon 2-72 and verify that 10 is selected. 3. Move the Part No text object to the correct position illustrated in Figure 2-64. 12. Click Place.Using Library Manager Creating Cells 10. Click the Fit All icon to adjust the display. Note If the Part No (part number) and origin do not appear for the 20 pin SOIC cell (or 20_PIN_SOIC in DxD-Expedition Library Manager). in the workspace 2. EXP2005 SPac1 . Key in the measurements displayed in Figure 2-63: Figure 2-63. Select the Draw Mode icon and move the Ref Des and Part No text objects into the positions illustrated in Figure 2-64. Click in the screen area to deselect the cell graphics. the software creates the cell according to the specified measurements. click View > Display Control in Cell Editor. Library Manager Process Guide. Place both Ref Des objects in the same location. Click the Part tab in the Display Control dialog box and select Part Numbers and Origin boxes in the Assembly Items area of the list. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 2-73 . 10. Cell Editor Interface (With Cell Created) 9. 7. the Properties dialog box displays. 5. Click File > Exit Graphics to exit the design and return to the Cell Editor environment. Click the Properties icon. 6. The circle attaches to the cursor. and press Enter. Click File > Save to save the design.Using Library Manager Creating Cells 4. Click in the screen area to deselect the cell graphics (Figure 2-64). Place the circle to left of Pin 1. key in 40 for the diameter in the Properties dialog box. Click in the design workspace to clear the current command. Select Assembly Outline from the top of the Type list dropdown box. Click the Add Circle icon from the Draw toolbar. Figure 2-64. 8. Click Tools > Part Editor or the Part Editor icon The Parts DB Editor dialog box appears. See “Copying Objects in the Workspace Tree” on page 2-99 and “Moving Objects in the Workspace Tree” on page 2-101 for more information. such as cells. can be copied and moved using popup menu commands in the workspace tree. Part data provides a link between the physical design cells and schematic symbols through packaging information. Select the incomplete part and continue your work in Part Editor. use the Part Editor to add parts database data to the central library. The software saves the completed design to the appropriate part partition in the central library. Defining a 74F244 Device The following procedure defines the pin mapping and specifies the default symbol and cell for a 74F244 device to be stored in the Parts partition defined earlier in this exercise. in the Library Manager interface. save the design using commands in Part Editor. Note that the new cell appears in the workspace tree.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) 11. pin. Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) The Part Editor provides tools to create and modify the part entries. When ready to finish work on an incomplete part. EXP2005 SPac1 . invoke Part Editor and note that incomplete (or “in progress”) parts are denoted by colored text in the Part Editor dialog box. Part Editor allows you to save an incomplete design and exit the software. 1. such as gate. and device definitions. If large or complex parts take more than one editing session to complete. When the part is complete. Copying and Moving Cells in the Workspace Tree Central library objects. The incomplete part is saved locally but not written to the central library and cannot be used until it is fully completed. 2-74 Library Manager Process Guide. Click OK to save the cell and exit the Cell Editor software. Now that you have created symbol and cell data. This procedure illustrates how to assign alternate symbols and cells for the device and define swapping between gates. 7. 4.25 in the Value field (see Figure 2-65). The part number is typically the company recognized part number. Select Cost and key in 1. click in the newly created Name field. Key in the following text in the Description field: 74F244 Octal Buffer/Driver 6. Tip: Use CTRL+C to copy and CTRL+V to paste from one field to another. Ensure that the Logic Gates partition displays in the Partition field (or Logic_Gates for DxD-Expedition flow). Click in the Part Listing Name field and key in 74F244. Click in the Part Listing Label field and key in F244. 5. EXP2005 SPac1 2-75 . The part label is even more general than the part name. The Part Editor dialog box appears (see Figure 2-65 on page 2-76). Right-click on the Parts node and select New Part from the popup menu. The part name is usually more recognizable than the part number. 2. Library Manager Process Guide. Click the New icon and key in 100-100000-001 in the Part Listing Number field. Use Logic_Gates for the DxD-Expedition flow because spaces are not valid for symbol partition names.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Tip: You can also invoke and use the Part Editor from the Parts node in the project workspace. and select the dropdown list to display a list of available properties. but is still very recognizable. In the Component Properties section of the Part Editor. click the New icon. 3. dialog box displays.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Figure 2-65. Click Pin Mapping to display the Pin Mapping dialog box. click the Import icon. EXP2005 SPac1 . 9. Part Editor Dialog Box (With Values Displayed) 8. The Import Using the Import Dialog Box to Import Symbols and Cells to the Part Database Use the Symbols and Cells tabs in the Import dialog box to import symbol and cell data into the part database: 2-76 Library Manager Process Guide. In the Assign Symbol section of the dialog box. EXP2005 SPac1 2-77 . Ensure other values and settings match Figure 2-66 for the DC/DV-Expedition flow (Figure 2-67 for the DxD-Expedition flow): Figure 2-66. If you are using the DxD-Expedition flow. Select Logic Gates from the Central Library Partition pulldown and highlight g244a. select Logic_Gates from the Central Library partition field and highlight Logic_Gates:g244a.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) 1. Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With Symbols Tab (DC/DVExpedition flow) Ensure values and settings match for the DxD-Expedition flow (see Figure 2-67): Library Manager Process Guide. a single slot will be created. the Part Editor will create an equivalent number of slots and map the pin numbers accordingly. If the symbol contains pins with multiple comma-separated pin numbers. the software imports the Property and Value information for the pins on the Logical tab. EXP2005 SPac1 . you can also use the Include pin number mapping option when importing DxDesigner symbols.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Figure 2-67. The Part Editor will import and map the pin numbers accordingly. Click the Cells tab in the Import dialog box and set the values and settings as shown in Figure 2-68 (for both the DC/DV-Expedition and DxD-Expedition flows). Tip: Though it is not used in this exercise. Note that Cell Names in the DxD-Expedition flow are in uppercase with no spaces (20_PIN_DIP and 20_PIN_SOIC). the software creates slots for mapping pin names with pin numbers. the Part Editor searches the symbol pin numbers to determine the correct number of slots to create. When selecting the Include Pin Properties option. Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With Symbols Tab (DxD-Expedition flow) When selecting the Create New Gate Information option and entering a value in the Number of Slots in Component field. 2. Ensure that you select 20 pin SOIC (or 20_PIN_SOIC for the DxD-Expedition flow) as shown in Figure 2-68: 2-78 Library Manager Process Guide. When this option is selected. For symbols with one assigned pin number per pin. Click OK. The software returns you to the Pin Mapping dialog box. 4. Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With Cells Tab 3. the software imports the symbol and cell name information. Library Manager Process Guide. Select 20 pin dip (20_PIN_DIP if you are using DxD-Expedition Library Manager) and set the Import Cell As option to Alternate (Figure 2-69). 5. the Import dialog box displays (the Cells tab displays by default). Click the Import icon in the Assign Package Cell section.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Figure 2-68. EXP2005 SPac1 2-79 . Click OK. Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With Cells Tab Updated 6. EXP2005 SPac1 . The software places this device as a surface mount device or a through-hole device. 2-80 Library Manager Process Guide.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Figure 2-69. When using DxD-Expedition Library Manager. Figure 2-70. EXP2005 SPac1 2-81 . 3. Click the Physical tab to assign the pin numbers to each slot.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Note The software automatically assigns the pin names to Slot #1 in the Logical tab (Figure 2-70). Note that DxD-Expedition Library Manager may order gates in inverted order so the pin numbers may not exactly match those in this figure. Pin Numbers Assigned to Slots Library Manager Process Guide. Enter pin numbers for each slot as shown in Figure 2-71. Figure 2-71. You do not need to enter pin names in the remaining slots since they are all the same. You can also key in the pin numbers into the Pin # field for each slot. Select the Paste Across icon to move the physical pin number into the slot. Pin Names Assigned to Slot #1 Assigning Pin Numbers Use the following steps to assign pin numbers to the associated slots: 1. Select a pin number from the Physical Pins list. assign the pin number that corresponds to the pin name by clicking in the Pin # field. For each slot. If this occurs. be careful when assigning pin numbers because they may not exactly match the graphics in this document. the order of the Value column and pin names in Slot #1 may vary in appearance. 2. 5. and select the Paste Across icon. Click in the Supply Name field (in the Supply and NC Assignments box) below gnd and enter vcc. Ground. Use the options in this dialog box to assign the power. Click OK in the Pin Mapping dialog box to return to the Part Editor environment. Click in the Supply Name field (in the Supply and NC Assignments table) and enter gnd. Click on Pin 20 in the Physical Pins list. and select the Paste Across icon. If you are using DxD-Expedition Library Manager. corresponding Supply Name entries and values are created and display on the Supply/NC tab. and NC Pins For the DxD-Expedition flow. and no connect pins. enter VCC. 10. 2-82 Library Manager Process Guide. 6. Click File > Save in the Part Editor to save the design.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Tip: Use CTRL+C to copy and CTRL+V to paste common pins from one field to another. if the SIGNAL attribute and value are built into the symbol and the Include pin number mapping option is used. Figure 2-72. ground. select the Pin # field to the right of gnd. 7. If you are using DxD-Expedition Library Manager. 9. enter GND. 8. Note When importing the symbol using DxD-Expedition Library Manager. EXP2005 SPac1 . Assigning Power. Click the Supply and NC tab. select the Pin # field to the right of vcc. Click Pin 10 in the Physical Pins list. ensure that Supply Name is GND and VCC (upper case text). 4. EXP2005 SPac1 2-83 . Ensure other values and settings match Figure 2-73: Library Manager Process Guide.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Assigning Alternate Symbols Use the following steps to assign alternate symbols to the design: 1. in the Assign Symbol section of the dialog box. Click the Pin Mapping command (bottom-right of the dialog box). the Pin Mapping dialog box displays. select Logic_Gates from the Central Library Partition pulldown and highlight Logic_Gates:74F244_Half. Click the Import icon dialog box displays. 2. If you are using the DxD-Expedition flow. Select Logic Gates from the Central Library Partition pulldown and highlight 74F244_Half. the Import 3. Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With 74F244_Half Package Displayed Ensure values and settings match for the DxD-Expedition flow Figure 2-74: 2-84 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 .Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Figure 2-73. Assigning Pin Names to the Half Package Use the following steps to assign the pin names to each slot in the 74F244_Half package using the Logical tab: 1. The software automatically assigns the pin numbers to the slots in the Logical tab. Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With 74F244_Half Package Displayed (DxD-Expedition flow) 4. the software incorporates the symbol information. Library Manager Process Guide. assign the pin name that corresponds to the pin number by clicking in the Slot # field and selecting the Paste Across icon to move the logical pin name into the slot. EXP2005 SPac1 2-85 .Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Figure 2-74. Tip: Use CTRL+C to copy and CTRL+V to paste common pins from one field to another. Select a pin name from the Logical Pins list. Note that the DxD-Expedition flow may order pin in inverted order so the pin numbers may not exactly match those in Figure 2-75. You can also key the pin names into the Slot # field for each slot manually. Click OK. Enter pin names for each slot as shown in the following figure. 2. Do not enter the pin names in the remaining slots since they are the same for each half of the device. For each slot. Importing and Assigning Pin Names to the Full Package Use the following steps to assign the pin names to each slot in the 74F244_Full package using the Logical tab: 1. 2. If you are using DxD-Expedition Library Manager. the Import 3. Assigning Pin Names to 74F244_Half Package 3. Click OK on the Pin Mapping dialog box to return to the Part Editor dialog box. Select Logic Gates from the Central Library Partition pulldown and highlight 74F244_Full.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Figure 2-75. EXP2005 SPac1 . the Pin Mapping dialog box displays. select Logic_Gates from the Central Library Partition pulldown and highlight Logic_Gates:74F244_full. 4. Ensure other values and settings match Figure 2-76: 2-86 Library Manager Process Guide. in the Assign Symbol section of the dialog box. Click File > Save in the Part Editor to save your work. Click the Import icon dialog box displays. Click the Pin Mapping command. Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With 74F244_Full Package Displayed Ensure values and settings match for the DxD-Expedition flow match Figure 2-77: Library Manager Process Guide.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Figure 2-76. EXP2005 SPac1 2-87 . You can also key the pin names into the Slot # field for each slot manually. Import Dialog Box (Part Editor) With 74F244_Full Package Displayed (DxD-Expedition flow) 4. the pin numbers may not exactly match those in Figure 2-78. For each slot. EXP2005 SPac1 . 2. Assigning Pin Names to the Full Package Use the following steps to assign pin names to each slot in the 74F244_Full package using the options in the Logical tab: 1. 2-88 Library Manager Process Guide. Enter pin names for each slot as shown in Figure 2-78. Note that the DxDExpedition flow may order pins in inverted order.Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Figure 2-77. Do not enter the pin names in the remaining slots since they are the same for each half of the device. Tip: Use CTRL+C to copy and CTRL+V to paste common pins from one field to another. the software incorporates the symbol information and automatically assigns pin numbers to the slots in the Logical tab. assign the pin name that corresponds to the pin number by clicking in the Slot # field and select the Paste Across icon to move the logical pin name into the slot. therefore. Select a pin name from the Logical Pins list. Click OK. Using Library Manager Creating Parts (Using Part Editor) Figure 2-78. type uppercase text. 6. vcc = 20 for the DC/DV-Expedition flow. Use the options in this dialog box to assign the power. ground. For example. and no connect pins (gnd =10. Click the Supply and NC tab. GND = 10 and VCC = 20. See Figure 2-72 on page 2-82 for additional information. Figure 2-79. Assigning Pin Names to 74F244_Full Package 3. 7. Note that the Parts entry in the workspace tree shows the relationships you assigned via the dialog box (Figure 2-80). Click File > Save in the Part Editor to save the design. For the DxD-Expedition flow. Assigning Default Symbol in the Part Editor 5. EXP2005 SPac1 2-89 . Library Manager Process Guide. Click File > Exit to exit the Part Editor environment. This is the default symbol that the software uses during Symbol Device Place within Design Capture (DC) or placing symbols in DxDesigner (Figure 2-79). Select the 74F244_Full symbol (or Logic_Gates:74F244_Full if you are using the DxD-Expedition flow) in the Assign Symbol section. Click OK in the Pin Mapping dialog box to display the Part Editor environment. 4. you can create model data partitions and manage model data files (edit. view. See “Copying Objects in the Workspace Tree” on page 2-99 and “Moving Objects in the Workspace Tree” on page 2-101 for more information. Model data files are stored in the Models subdirectory within the DxD-Expedition flow central library. Subnodes within the Models node segregate the data by supported model type (Spice and Verilog) as shown in Figure 2-81. such as parts. Viewing Model Types in the Workspace Tree Model files types and partitions are viewable in the Models node in the navigator tree.Using Library Manager Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-80. Model data files are not managed in a DC/DV-Expedition flow central library. 2-90 Library Manager Process Guide. and delete) that you import to the central library. Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow) Library Manager and DMS Librarian in the DxDesigner-Expedition flow provides tools to manage models (SPICE and Compiled Verilog-A only). copy. Part With Associated Symbols and Cells in the Workspace Tree Copying and Moving Parts in the Workspace Tree Central library objects. Note You cannot use Library Services to import or manage models. EXP2005 SPac1 . Using commands in the workspace tree. can be copied and moved using popup menu commands in the workspace tree. Models Node in the Workspace Tree (DxD-Expedition Flow) Creating a New Model File Partition Use the popup menu commands in the workspace tree to create model file partitions in the central library. Creating a New Models Partition in the Workspace Tree 2. select the New Partition popup menu command and key in the partition name (Figure 2-82). 1. Click OK to add a partition to the SPICE or Verilog model nodes (Figure 2-83). Figure 2-82. 3. Library Manager Process Guide. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary to add as many partitions as you require. EXP2005 SPac1 2-91 .Using Library Manager Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-81. To create a new model partition for either SPICE or Verilog. . . the software allows you to import other valid SPICE and Verilog files with different extensions. The Files of Type dropdown box provides a filtered list of valid file name extension for both SPICE and Verilog (note that SPICE is used as an example in Figure 2-84). the Select a Model File to Import dialog box appears and allows you to browse for or key in a model file based on the type of model (SPICE or Verilog) you are importing. Partitions in the Models Node of the Workspace Tree Importing a Model File Use the Import Model popup menu command to import a Verilog or SPICE model file into a select Model partition in a central library. EXP2005 SPac1 . The valid file name extensions supporting in this release are outlined in Table 2-5: Table 2-5.Using Library Manager Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-83.cir.mod. 2-92 Library Manager Process Guide. Valid Model File Name Extensions File Type SPICE Verilog File name extensions . When you invoke the command.ai. .va Tip: While the file type filters for the file name extensions (see previous table). .spi .ckt. The model file you selected appears in the appropriate model partition in the workspace tree (Figure 2-85). 3. Browse for or enter a model file name and extension in the dialog box. Click Open to dismiss the dialog box and copy the file into the model partition in the central library. Figure 2-85. EXP2005 SPac1 2-93 . Highlight a partition in the Models tree and select the Import Model popup menu command. The Select a Model File to Import dialog box appears which allows you to browse for and choose the appropriate model file for the type you selected 2. Tip: Use the Files of Type dropdown box to limit the files that appear in the Select a Model File to Import dialog box to those that have the appropriate file name extensions (see Step 3 in Figure 2-84). Importing a Model File to a Models Partition 1. Imported Model File in the Workspace Tree Library Manager Process Guide.Using Library Manager Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow) Figure 2-84. Click Refresh from the Library Manager toolbar to reset the workspace tree view and view the newly imported model files in their select partition(s). 3. Ensure that you import the correct model type into the correct partition (in other words. 2-94 Library Manager Process Guide. Figure 2-86. use file management tools to copy and paste multiple model files into select partitions. the model file you created appears in the selected Models partition in workspace tree and in the central library. Highlight a Models partition in the workspace tree and select the New Model popup menu command. EXP2005 SPac1 . Enter the name of the new SPICE or Verilog Model file that you want to create. Use the appropriate file name extensions (Table 2-5 on page 2-92) when creating a new model file. Upon completion. SPICE models must appear in partitions in the SPICE node) or errors will occur. the New Model File Editor environment appears and allows you to create a new model file. Creating a New Model File Use the New Model popup menu command in the workspace tree (from a Models partition) to create a Verilog or SPICE model file in a select Model partition in a central library. New Model File Command in the Workspace Tree 2. the New Model dialog box dismisses and the software invokes the DxDesigner model file editor environment to create the new model. 1. Click OK. When invoked.Using Library Manager Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow) Tip: To import more than one model file (or “bulk load”) into a models partition. The New SPICE Model or New Verilog Model dialog box appears depending upon the type of model file you are creating (Figure 2-86). If you edited the file. Upon completion. and returns you to the model file you selected in the Library Manager workspace tree. Figure 2-87. Use commands in the DxD Model Editor to edit the file as needed. 3. Create the SPICE or Verilog model file in the editor using tools in the editing environment. View and Edit Model File Commands in the Workspace Tree 1. Viewing and Editing a Model File Use the View and Edit popup menu commands in the workspace tree (from a Models partition) to view a Verilog or SPICE model file in a select Model partition within the DxD Model Editor environment. the DxD Model Editor environment appears and allows you to view and make edits to an existing model file. click File > Save in DxD Model Editor. If you select the View popup menu command. dismisses the DxD Model Editor. simply exit the DxD Model Editor. Note The Edit popup menu command is disabled if you select a compiled Verilog-A file or model files originating from a model library (a model file containing multiple models). When invoked. click File > Close and File > Exit in the DxDesigner model file editor environment. 5. EXP2005 SPac1 2-95 . The software invokes the DxD Model Editor environment and displays the model file contents in the viewer.Using Library Manager Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow) 4. Highlight a SPICE or Verilog model file in the workspace tree and select the View or Edit popup menu commands (Figure 2-87). The appropriate Model file partition in the workspace tree updates to show the new model file you just created. save changes and exit the DxD Model Editor. To close the model file without saving changes. click File > Exit or File > Close in the DxD Model Editor. 2. The software saves the changes. This dismisses the DxD Model Editor and returns you to the model file you selected in the Library Manager workspace tree. To save edits. This automatically updates the model file you selected. Library Manager Process Guide. The Copy command is disabled for compiled Verilog-A model files. Deleting a Model File Use the Delete popup menu command in the workspace tree to remove a model file from a models partition in a central library (Figure 2-89). Note You cannot copy a model file to a SPICE model partition. such as a model file. Figure 2-88. EXP2005 SPac1 . See “Copying Objects in the Workspace Tree” on page 2-99 and “Moving Objects in the Workspace Tree” on page 2-101 for more information. the software removes the model file from the central library and from the workspace tree.Using Library Manager Managing Model Data (DxD-Expedition Flow) Copying a Model File Use the Copy popup menu command in the workspace tree (on a model file within a Models partition) to copy a model file from one partition in a central library to another (Figure 2-88). When deleting a model file. 2-96 Library Manager Process Guide. can be copied and moved using the Copy command in the workspace tree. Copy Model File Command in the Workspace Tree Central library objects. Click on the pin in the New Pin column and update the pin name/number. Swap Pins . available when you click Tools > Modify Cell & Symbol Pins. Using the Modify Pins Dialog Box The Modify Pins dialog box. allows you to rename and renumber cell and symbol pins. Tip: You can select the Auto Generate Numbers icon when at least one pin of a slot is selected. You can enter the prefix. Delete Model File Command in the Workspace Tree Deleting a model file is similar to deleting other objects (such as symbols. Auto Number Pins . Click Refresh from the Library Manager toolbar to reset the workspace tree view and remove deleted model files from the viewer. The only difference between this dialog and the one found in the Parts Editor is that the Numbering direction option is not available. starting number. See “Deleting Objects and Partitions from the Workspace Tree” on page 2-102 for more information. cell. use file management tools to remove multiple model files from select partitions. EXP2005 SPac1 2-97 . the entries can be swapped by clicking the Swap icon. • • Direct Edit . increment (positive or negative) and the suffix to be used when the pin numbers or names are automatically generated. There are three ways to modify the pins. and padstacks) from the central library. • Library Manager Process Guide. Tip: To delete more than one model file. This icon is only active when two pins are selected. Use Auto Generate Numbers to create logical pin names or physical pin numbers.Using Library Manager Using the Modify Pins Dialog Box Figure 2-89.When two entries are selected in the New Pin column.When more than one pin is selected. the Auto Generate Numbers icon enables you to automatically generate numbers. 2. To use the Modify Pins dialog box: 1.Using Library Manager Using the Modify Pins Dialog Box Most symbol or cell changes will affect one or more Part Editor entries. then a confirmation dialog box appears detailing all the part database entries that are affected by the change. Pin changes cannot be completed if any cell or symbol partitions are reserved. when you click OK or Apply. The pin names you just defined for the symbol appear in the adjacent list (Figure 2-90). EXP2005 SPac1 . a message dialog box displays with information on which partitions are reserved. Change the Type field to Symbol and highlight the Logic_Gates. Modify Pins Dialog Box 2-98 Library Manager Process Guide. therefore. Click Tools > Modify Cell & Symbol Pins.74f244_full symbol from the list. the active central library (*.lmc) file is checked for affected cells or symbols and related Part Editor entries. If any partitions are reserved. If none of the cell or symbol partitions are reserved. Figure 2-90. the Modify Pins dialog box displays. part. You can also copy an object and rename it within an existing central library partition. cell. Tip: To quickly find something in the list you can select a cell in the list and type the first few letters of the desired name or partition and the list will scroll to the first name or partition that matches those letters. EXP2005 SPac1 2-99 . 5. When a match is found.Using Library Manager Copying Objects in the Workspace Tree 3. Edit the pins in the second column in the Modify Pins List to reflect your requirements. When the Type is set to Cell. The find function does not find partition names and is case-insensitive. Select a partition to filter the item list or choose (All) to see items from all partitions. Library Manager Process Guide. the column headers are labeled "Existing Pin Number" and "New Pin Number". The columns can be sorted in ascending or descending order by pressing the column header. Use the Find option to enter a specific cell or symbol name. When an item is selected in this list. models. Click Close to dismiss the dialog box without changes. the Item list scrolls to that item and selects the item. and reusable blocks) that appear in the workspace tree (and exist in the central library) between partitions within the selected central library. the column headers are labeled "Existing Pin Name" and "New Pin Name". 4. the associated pins are displayed in the Modify Pins List on the right side of the dialog box. The first column is Read Only and contains the existing pins. padstack. Copying Objects in the Workspace Tree Use the Copy popup menu command to copy and move objects (such as a symbol. Note Do no modify the pin names. The list contains cells or symbols. The columns can be sorted in ascending or descending order by pressing the column header. 6. This exercise simply illustrates the tools used to modify pin names of cells and symbols in a central library without using the Part Editor dialog box. The Copy popup menu command allows you to conveniently manage central library objects within the workspace tree without invoking Library Services to copy and move objects in a central library. depending on the selected Type. Click Find to continue searching the list for the next match. Note When the Type is set to Symbol. asterisks (*) can be used as wildcards. If the object name you key in matches an object that already exists in the 2-100 Library Manager Process Guide. The software copies the object to the selected partition in the central library. and Copy Verilog Model dialog boxes). Using the Copy Popup Menu Command (Parts in Library Manager) To copy the object to another partition. Figure 2-91 shows the Copy Part dialog box (which is similar in use with the Copy Symbol. The Copy dialog box appears. By default. The object or empty partition is removed from the central library and no longer appears in the workspace tree. key in the new object name. The copied object appears in the workspace tree. Copy Cell. To rename the object. To move several objects in a central library or perform a “bulk move” or “bulk copy”. use Library Services.Using Library Manager Copying Objects in the Workspace Tree Tip: The Copy popup menu command moves only one object at a time. select a Target Partition. EXP2005 SPac1 . the Target Partition dropdown displays the current name and partition (if applicable) of the selected object. and click OK. Right-click the object in the workspace tree and select Copy from the popup menu. select one from the Target Partition dropdown and click OK. Figure 2-91. Copy Spice Model. Using Library Manager Moving Objects in the Workspace Tree selected partition. you cannot move and rename the object. and reusable blocks) that appear in the workspace tree (and exist in the central library) between partitions within the selected central library. EXP2005 SPac1 2-101 . Moving Objects in the Workspace Tree Use the Move popup menu command to move objects (such as a symbol. a part is being moved from one partition to another within the central library. Figure 2-92. the software generates and error and prompts you for a unique object name and/or target partition. The Move popup menu command allows you to conveniently manage central library objects within the workspace tree without invoking Library Services to move objects in a central library. part. Note For information on reusable blocks. Copying a Padstack For padstacks. Unlike the Copy popup menu command “Copying Objects in the Workspace Tree” on page 2-99). cell. the software generates an error and prompts you to rename the padstack. If you enter a padstack name that already exists. Library Manager Process Guide. In Figure 2-93. see “Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 4-35. model data. Copy Padstack Dialog Box Click OK and the new padstack name appears in the correct partition type in the workspace tree. use the Copy popup menu command to copy an existing padstack and enter a new name. select one from the Target Partition dropdown and click OK. EXP2005 SPac1 . Deleting Objects and Partitions from the Workspace Tree Use the Delete popup menu command to remove objects (such as a symbol. and parts) from the central library as long as they are not referenced by other parts in the central library. and parts data partitions (in other words. symbol.Using Library Manager Deleting Objects and Partitions from the Workspace Tree Figure 2-93. Empty symbol. The object or empty partition is removed from the central library and no longer appears in the workspace tree. Move Part Dialog Box To move the object to another partition. Right-click the object or empty part. or cell partition in the workspace tree and select Delete from the popup menu. partitions that are void of objects in the workspace tree) can also be removed from the central library using the Delete popup menu command (Figure 2-94). The software copies the object to the selected target partition in the central library. The copied object appears in the workspace tree. cell. cell. 2-102 Library Manager Process Guide. These files are located in the job's LogFiles directory within the central library structure. a utility that allows you to view the contents of ASCII process log files generated by the software. If text is not highlighted within the file. You can collapse File Viewer to an icon on the desktop by clicking on the minimize button in the top right-hand corner of the viewer. The workspace is divided into two areas: the left side displays the names of the files generated by the software. EXP2005 SPac1 2-103 . If you highlight some of the text within a file. the software disables the Delete popup menu command. When you rightclick the mouse on a file name. Using File Viewer Library Manager features the File Viewer. only that selected text is printed. Library Manager Process Guide. Delete Popup Menu Command Note If a central library partition is reserved or contains objects. If you exit the application without exiting File Viewer. ensure that you have a printer installed.Using Library Manager Using File Viewer Note Dx Symbols can be renamed using popup menu commands in the project workspace tree. If you click the right mouse button in the list of text files. you must manually close it. See “Renaming a Dx Symbol in the Project Workspace Tree” on page 2-52 for more information. This enables you to define and print only relevant information. the entire file is printed. the popup menu displays View and Arrange commands. Figure 2-94. Before printing a file. a popup menu appears with quick access to Print. and the right hand side displays the text of the selected file. Delete and Rename commands. Type Ctrl+C or Alt + E + C 5. Upon completion. Use one of the following methods to define and copy text: • • • Select Copy from the Edit pulldown in the File Viewer. 7. Highlight any text file displayed in the File Viewer workspace. delete the text file you just created in this section. When the text is highlighted.Using Library Manager Summary Use the following steps to invoke the File Viewer and view a report file generated by Library Manager: 1. The selected file appears in the viewer. click the right mouse button and select Select All from the popup. Summary You have now successfully used Library Manager and the software tools necessary to continue to the next exercises. click the right mouse button and select Copy from the popup menu or after highlighting sections of the file. If Parts Manager Administrator software is unavailable (DC/DVExpedition Library Manager only). 2. Do not attempt to use this command unless you have a Microsoft Mail account set up on your system. 2-104 Library Manager Process Guide. 6. 3. the File Viewer utility displays. Open another application (Mail or Notepad or other text editor) and press Ctrl + V to paste the selected text. proceed directly to “Using Library Manager” on page 2-1. click the right mouse button again and select Copy from the popup. perform the optional exercises in “Using PM Administrator” on page 3-1. Note You can attach a selected file to a Microsoft Mail message using the File > Send command. A list of ASCII text files generated by Library Manager displays in the workspace. Select the text from the file displayed in File Viewer by highlighting the text with the left mouse button. Other options included in the File Viewer utility are documented in online help associated with the File Viewer software (Help > Contents command). Select File > File Viewer or click the File Viewer icon in the toolbar . After highlighting sections of the file. If Parts Manager Administrator software is available (DC/DV-Expedition Library Manager only). Select the Copy icon in the File Viewer. 4. EXP2005 SPac1 . lmc) file. When using Parts Manager. If so. such as Design Capture (DC) and DesignView. Parts data. perform the procedures in this chapter in the following order: • • • • “Invoking and Configuring Parts Manager Administrator” on page 3-4 “Creating a Parametric Table” on page 3-5 “Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table” on page 3-8 “Renaming Parametric Tables” on page 3-17 Library Manager Process Guide. Parts Manager (PM) is an electronic component management tool that provides access to parametric data and interfaces with parts data stored in a relational database. can access this data from nodes on the network. Note This process guide uses Design Capture as the design entry software tool. and cells in partitions in the central library (*. You can also use DesignView for design entry tasks. command paths may be different when using DesignView. Users of electronic design applications. you cannot use Parts Manager Administrator. Proceed to “Implementing a Design” on page 4-1. Note If Parts Manager Administrator (PMA) software is not available. you are not required to perform the procedures in this chapter.Chapter 3 Using PM Administrator Introduction If you are using Library Manager in the DxDesigner-Expedition flow or the Design Architect to Expedition PCB flow. A copy of the finalized library (resulting from this exercise) is located in the following directory: <SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr\final_library This exercise assumes that you have successfully completed the exercise in “Implementing a Design” on page 4-1 and the Library Manager interface displays on your workstation. If you are using the DC/DV flow. EXP2005 SPac1 3-1 . the Parts Manager icon on the Library Manager interface becomes non-selectable. Parametric data in the PM database works in tandem with the Library Manager software which stores information on symbols. However. PM stores and retrieves parametric data from a database. proceed to “Implementing a Design” on page 4-1. Using PM Administrator Introduction • • • • • • • • • • • • • • “Deleting Parametric Tables” on page 3-21 “Inserting Parametric Tables from ASCII” on page 3-24 “Adding Part Numbers to the PM Database” on page 3-29 “Deleting Part Numbers from the PM Database” on page 3-33 “Inserting PPS Data into the PM Database” on page 3-34 “Modifying the Central Library” on page 3-39 “Adding Parametric Data to Parts” on page 3-55 “Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility” on page 3-70 “Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts” on page 3-79 (using the Parts Manager Batch Update Utility) “Using the PM/PDB Synchronization Utility” on page 3-89 “Using the Parts Manager Batch Update Utility” on page 3-91 “Adding Attachment Data” on page 3-97 “Importing PPS Data With Attachment Data” on page 3-101 “Exiting / Logging Out of PMA” on page 3-103 The flowchart in Figure 3-1 illustrates the order of procedures in this chapter: 3-2 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . Using PM Administrator Introduction Figure 3-1. Parts Manager Administrator Software Process Flow Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 3-3 . Parts Manager Administrator Window 2. Click the Configure icon on the PMA toolbar or select File > Configure. the Parts Manager Configuration dialog box displays. 3-4 Library Manager Process Guide.Using PM Administrator Invoking and Configuring Parts Manager Administrator Invoking and Configuring Parts Manager Administrator In this procedure. EXP2005 SPac1 . Use the following steps to configure Parts Manager Administrator software on your Windows machine: 1. Click the Parts Manager icon in the Library Manager interface and the Parts Manager Administrator window displays: Figure 3-2. click Tools > Parts Manager to invoke Parts Manager Administrator (PMA) from the Library Manager interface. Note that PMA is not available on Linux and UNIX. You will configure the software for the remaining procedures in this chapter. Note Refer to the Parts Manager Process Guide and Parts Manager Administrator online help for additional information on fields and options on the Parts Manager Configuration dialog box. Now that you have defined a PM working directory. you can create parametric tables. Consult the Parts Manager Process Guide for additional information on parametric tables. Parts Manager Configuration Dialog Box 3.Using PM Administrator Creating a Parametric Table Figure 3-3. Library Manager Process Guide. electrical. Creating a Parametric Table Parametric tables consist of user-definable component parameters (such as thermal. Set the Parts Manager (PM) Working Directory to the following directory: <drive>:\temp Tip: If PMA software does not detect a temp directory. cost. Click Yes. and other information). a dialog box displays and prompts you to create this directory. EXP2005 SPac1 3-5 . and the software automatically creates the temp directory. Parametric Tables Dialog Box 2. Insert. and Extract Parametric Tables dialog boxes. The Create/Update/Delete dialog box displays.Using PM Administrator Creating a Parametric Table Now that you configured the Parts Manager Administrator (PMA) software. 3-6 Library Manager Process Guide. Figure 3-4. The top half contains the PM Classification Tree and the bottom half contains the Create/Update/Delete. Click the Create/Update/Delete tab in the lower half of the Parametric Tables dialog box. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click the PPS Tables icon on the icon bar or File > PPS Tables to invoke the Parametric Tables dialog boxes. 3. Note The dialog boxes contain two sections. Click the PM Classification Tree text in the top half of the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box. use the following procedure to create a parametric table: 1. Key in the name of a second table (Logic IX) and click the New Table icon. PM Classification Tree With One Undefined Table 5. Figure 3-5. Key in Logic IC in the text field in the lower half of the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box and click the New Table icon or press the Enter key. This adds the Logic IC table to the Parts Manager (PM) database. The Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box updates as shown in the following figure. EXP2005 SPac1 3-7 .Using PM Administrator Creating a Parametric Table 4. Library Manager Process Guide. The Create/Update/Delete Parametric Table dialog box appears as shown in the following figure. EXP2005 SPac1 . 3-8 Library Manager Process Guide. PM Classification Tree With Two Undefined Tables Note You delete the Logic IX table later in this exercise. add parameters to these tables and use the Property Definition Editor (available from the Library Manager interface) to make modifications to these individual parameters. Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table Now that parametric tables have been created. You have now successfully created parametric tables in the PM database. Select the Logic IC table in the upper half of the Parametric Tables dialog box. these tables must be populated with parameter information.Using PM Administrator Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table Figure 3-6. Use the following steps to add parameters and define the parametric table: 1. However. Using PM Administrator Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table 2. Click the New Parameter icon in the Parameters field in the lower half of the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box. Adding a Parameter to a Parametric Table 4. Click the name of the first new parameter (param name) to highlight the parameter and key in the following: Cost Library Manager Process Guide. The software adds a new parameter (called param name) to the table. 3. Click the New Parameter icon to add a second parameter to the table. EXP2005 SPac1 3-9 . Figure 3-7. Specifying a Parameter in a Parametric Table 5. Click in the Property column and a list of property names display. EXP2005 SPac1 . 3-10 Library Manager Process Guide. 6. Select the Cost property to map the Cost parameter to the Cost property (defined in the Property Definition Editor).Using PM Administrator Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table Figure 3-8. Library Manager Process Guide. The following message displays in the message field: PPS table created successfully.Using PM Administrator Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table Figure 3-9. Click Apply to save the parameter-to-property mapping in the table. EXP2005 SPac1 3-11 . Mapping a Parameter to a Property in a Parametric Table 7. Populating a Parametric Table With Parameters Note Properties and their corresponding attributes (visibility.prp file can be modified using the Property Definition Editor dialog box in Library Manager. the Part Editor.Using PM Administrator Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table Figure 3-10. Click Advanced on the Property Definition Editor to enlarge the dialog box. This file also controls property accessibility in other tools such as Design Capture (DC). DesignView. color. Mapping Properties to Parameters in Parts Manager Use the following steps to map parameters in Parts Manager to properties in the Property Definition Editor: 1.prp file. The CentLib. and so forth) are defined in the CentLib. Click the Property Definition Editor icon on the Library Manager interface to invoke the Property Definition Editor dialog box. EXP2005 SPac1 . 3-12 Library Manager Process Guide. and Parts Manager (PM). If the PM option is enabled. Sort the list by any of the four columns by clicking on the column’s title bar header. Library Manager Process Guide. such as Design Capture or DesignView. Locate the Include selected property in property lists for field in the right half of the Property Definition Editor dialog box.Using PM Administrator Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table Figure 3-11. 4. The field consists of four columns: • • • • Checkboxes Property types Property names Property formats 3. Find the Property list field in the left half of the dialog box. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box 2. This field lists all properties in the central library. Clicking on it again sorts the list in the reverse order. EXP2005 SPac1 3-13 . that property appears in the Property dropdown list in the Parametric Tables dialog box in Parts Manager. Note Selecting a checkbox in the Place property in schematic when Packager or Place Device is used column enables the software to place that property on a schematic when using the Packager Utility or the Place > Device command in design entry software. 4. Select the Description property in the Property List field within the Property Definition Editor dialog box. Click the checkbox adjacent to the Description property. modify the Description property using the following steps: 1. Modifying a Property in the Property Definition Editor 3-14 Library Manager Process Guide. 3. The software applies all modifications made in this half of the dialog box to the Description property. Click Advanced at the bottom of the Property Definition Editor dialog box to display additional property options and settings.Using PM Administrator Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table Adding Properties to Parts Manager Using the Property Definition Editor dialog box. Change the default property visibility from Visible to Hidden by changing the Visible field from Yes to No. 2. The settings in the Property Definition Editor must match the following figure: Figure 3-12. EXP2005 SPac1 . Select the Parts Manager checkbox in the Include Selected Property in Property Lists For field. This instructs the software to allow access to the Description property in Parts Manager. 5. This enables the Description property for access by the Packager Utility or the Place > Device command in design entry software. Select the param name parameter. 3. Return to the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box in Parts Manager Administrator and click Apply to save the table.Using PM Administrator Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table 6. The parameter type changes from Integer to Char(64). Click OK in the Property Definition Editor to save all property changes and close the dialog box. Mapping Properties to Parameters in Parts Manager Use the following steps to map the Description property you activated using the Property Definition Editor to the Description parameter in Parts Manager: 1. EXP2005 SPac1 3-15 . The software adds the Description property to Property list in the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box. Library Manager Process Guide. The software re-reads the changes you made in the Property Definition Editor dialog box (saved to the CentLib. Change the name of the parameter to Description. Map the Description parameter to the Description property by choosing the Description property in the Property dropdown list. 4.prp file). 2. EXP2005 SPac1 . When changing a property type in the CentLib. 3-16 Library Manager Process Guide.prp file. the parameter type automatically changes to the type listed in the CentLib. 5. With Text property types. the software sets the Type to Char (Character). The software sets the amount of characters specified in the Max Number of Characters field in the CentLib.Using PM Administrator Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table Figure 3-13. The following informational dialog box appears.prp file.prp file. Click Apply to save all changes. change the type of its corresponding parameter in Parts Manager by remapping the parameter to its corresponding property. Mapping a Parameter to a New Property in a Parametric Table Tip: When mapping a parameter to a property. Click Apply and the software adds the Cost and Description parameters to the Logic IX table. Click Yes and the new Logic IC table overwrites the existing Logic IC table. If a table does not contain any parameters. Note that all of the Logic IC parameters display in the Parameters field. Applying Parameters from One Parametric Table to Another Table Use the following steps to apply the parameters you defined in the Logic IC table to the Logic IX table: 1. Renaming Parametric Tables Tables in the PM Classification Tree can be renamed without changing the parameters within that table. Double-click on the Logic IX table in the top half of the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box. Parts Manager Administrator Information Dialog Box 6. The table name field changes to an editable field. This message only appears when you save a table with existing parameters. The software did not display a message to replace an existing table definition. Library Manager Process Guide. the Parameters field displays the previous table’s parameter list. 2. This allows you to add parameters to a new table. Select the Logic IX table in the PM Classification Tree.Using PM Administrator Renaming Parametric Tables Figure 3-14. EXP2005 SPac1 3-17 . Use the following procedure to change the name of a table in the PM Classification Tree: 1. The software automatically saves the Memory IX table name. 3-18 Library Manager Process Guide. the lower half of the Parametric Tables dialog box still displays Logic IX. 3.Using PM Administrator Renaming Parametric Tables Figure 3-15. Click the Logic IC table in the top half of the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box. the software saves the new table name. Click Apply to save only the Logic IX table to disk. Changing a Parametric Table Name 2. Rename the table by keying in the following new table name: Memory IX Tip: If you change the name of the table in the PM Classification Tree and click Apply. EXP2005 SPac1 . However. EXP2005 SPac1 3-19 .Using PM Administrator Renaming Parametric Tables Figure 3-16. Key in the following text in the text input field in the bottom half of the Parametric Tables dialog box: Memory IC Library Manager Process Guide. Renaming a Parametric Table 4. 5. Select the Memory IX table in the top half of the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box. Using PM Administrator Renaming Parametric Tables Figure 3-17. 3-20 Library Manager Process Guide. Renamed Parametric Table in the PM Classification Tree 6. Click Apply and then click Yes on the informational dialog box to save the new table name. EXP2005 SPac1 . In this procedure. Renamed Parametric Table in the PM Classification Tree With Message Displayed Deleting Parametric Tables Parametric tables can be quickly deleted from the Parts Manager database. Library Manager Process Guide. Remember that a parametric table must be void of all part numbers before it can be deleted (removed) from the database. Use the following steps to remove an empty parametric table (named Test) from the Parts Manager (PM) Classification Tree.Using PM Administrator Deleting Parametric Tables Figure 3-18. Note Ensure that you select the PM Classification Tree in the upper half of the Parametric Tables dialog box. create a table and then delete it. EXP2005 SPac1 3-21 . Click the Delete Table icon message: to delete the table. Click Yes in the dialog box and the following message displays in the PM status bar: PPS table deleted successfully. 3-22 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 .Using PM Administrator Deleting Parametric Tables 1. Figure 3-19. Key in Test in the lower half of the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box and click the Create Table icon. 3. Select the Test table from the PM Classification Tree in the upper half of the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box. Creating a New Parametric Table 2. A dialog box displays the following Are you sure you want to delete this table? 4. Repeat the same steps to remove the Memory IC table. the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box resembles the following graphic: Library Manager Process Guide.Using PM Administrator Deleting Parametric Tables Figure 3-20. 5. Deleting the Test Table Tip: You do not have to click Apply to delete a table from the PM database. Upon completion. EXP2005 SPac1 3-23 . use the Parametric Tables dialog boxes to create the Capacitor and Resistor folders and tables by inserting ASCII files: 1. Click the Insert tab in the Parametric Tables window. EXP2005 SPac1 . In the following procedure.txt 3. Click the File Browse icon and navigate to the following directory: <drive>:\<SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr\cap_tables. Select the cap_tables. 2.Using PM Administrator Inserting Parametric Tables from ASCII Figure 3-21. Deleting the Memory IC Table Inserting Parametric Tables from ASCII PMA software also allows insertion of an ASCII file that contains one or more tables with predefined parameters. Use this dialog box to add the Capacitors table and associated parameters to the PM database. The Insert Parametric Tables dialog box displays. 3-24 Library Manager Process Guide.txt file. txt Library Manager Process Guide. the following tables display: • • • Axial Radial Surface Mount <drive>:\<SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr\cap_tables. Insert Parametric Tables Dialog Box 5.Using PM Administrator Inserting Parametric Tables from ASCII 4. Open the PM Classification Tree and the Capacitors sub-folder by clicking the “+” to the left of the folder or double clicking on the folder name in the lower half of the Parametric Tables window. EXP2005 SPac1 3-25 . Figure 3-22. After opening all the folders. Click Open on the dialog box and the bottom half of the Insert Parametric Tables dialog box displays a PM Classification Tree folder. Click Apply in the Insert Parametric Tables dialog box. Only the tables were selected.txt 3-26 Library Manager Process Guide. 7. Select the Axial. and Surface Mount tables by holding down the shift key and clicking in each table name. not the Capacitors folder. Radial. <drive>:\<SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr\cap_tables. EXP2005 SPac1 . the associated icons change color from blue to red (indicating that these tables are already in the PM database). The software inserts these tables into the PM database and displays the following message in the status bar: Parametric tables inserted successfully.Using PM Administrator Inserting Parametric Tables from ASCII Figure 3-23. Inserting Parametric Tables into an ASCII File 6. Note After inserting tables into the PM database. The software inserted the Capacitors folder into the database with the tables. txt file and click Open in the Open dialog box. the bottom half of the Parametric Tables window displays a PM Classification Tree folder. Click the File Browse icon in the lower half of the Parametric Tables window and navigate to the directory where the software is loaded. Library Manager Process Guide. Note that the browser points to the same directory that contained the cap_tables. When you click OK.txt file. EXP2005 SPac1 3-27 . Select the PM Classification Tree in the lower half of the Insert Parametric Tables dialog box. 3.Using PM Administrator Inserting Parametric Tables from ASCII Figure 3-24. 4. 2. Click Apply in the Parametric Tables window to insert the Resistor folder and associated tables into the PM database. Displaying Successful Parametric Table Insertion into an ASCII File 1. Click the res_tables. EXP2005 SPac1 . 3-28 Library Manager Process Guide. Displaying Successful Parametric Table Insertion into an ASCII File Tip: The blue star on the Capacitors and Resistors folder in the upper half of the Parametric Tables window indicates that all tables in the folder contain identical parameters. <drive>:\<SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr\cap_tables.txt Figure 3-25. Open the PM Classification Tree folder and the Resistor folder to display the Axial. you can perform searches at the folder level and at the table level. Click Cancel or the Quit icon in the upper right corner of the window to close the Parametric Tables dialog boxes and return to the PMA window. and Surface Mount tables.Using PM Administrator Inserting Parametric Tables from ASCII 5. Radial. Since the parameters are identical. 6. Click the Create/Update tab in the lower half of the Parametric Data window. 2. Use the following procedure to add part numbers to the PM database: 1. 3. EXP2005 SPac1 3-29 . Extract. Library Manager Process Guide. Click the PPS Data icon on the icon bar to invoke the Parametric Data window. The Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box displays.Using PM Administrator Adding Part Numbers to the PM Database Adding Part Numbers to the PM Database Parts Manager Administrator (PMA) provides the ability to add part numbers to the PM database using the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. Select the Logic IC table from the PM Classification Tree in the upper half of the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. Insert. and Delete tabs. The associated parameters display in the lower half of the dialog box. The upper half displays the PM Classification Tree and the lower half displays the Create/Update. The Parametric Data window contains two halves. Click in the Part Numbers field in the lower half of the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box and key in the following: 9999 5. 6. Click in the Value column on the Cost row in the Parameters field to select the Cost parameter. Select the Description parameter and key in the following text in the Value column: Test description 3-30 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . Key in the following for the cost (in the Value column): 1 7. The entire row highlights (blue) and the column displays in white. Using Create/Update Parametric Data Dialog Box to Manually Add Part Numbers to the PM Database 4.Using PM Administrator Adding Part Numbers to the PM Database Figure 3-26. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 3-31 .Using PM Administrator Adding Part Numbers to the PM Database Figure 3-27. Click Apply to save the part number and parametric information to the PM database. Adding a Parameter and Value to a Parametric Table 8. The status bar displays the following message: Part number inserted successfully. Entering Parameters and Values for a Part Number Field Name Cost Description Key in 1. Enter the following data in the Parameters table: Table 3-1.Using PM Administrator Adding Part Numbers to the PM Database Figure 3-28. EXP2005 SPac1 . Updating Part Number Information in the PM Database 9.25 74F244 Octal Buffer/Driver 3-32 Library Manager Process Guide. 10. Click in the Part Numbers field and key in the following: 100-1000000-001 All of the values for the parametric data from part number 9999 display in the lower half of the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. This provides a quick method to add parametric data to a new part number. Select part number 9999 from the drop down list in the Part Numbers field. Library Manager Process Guide. 2. EXP2005 SPac1 3-33 . The software displays the PPS data associated with part number 9999. The status bar displays the following message: Part number inserted successfully. Click Apply to save the part number and parametric information to the PM database. Note To remove multiple part numbers from the PM database. Select the Logic IC table from the PM Classification Tree in the upper half of the Parametric Data window. As long as the current PM session is active.Using PM Administrator Deleting Part Numbers from the PM Database 11. The status bar displays the following message: Part number deleted successfully. 12. 4. 3. the software selects the last selected item and the last tab that was active in the Parametric Data and Parametric Tables windows. 5. Click the Create/Update tab in the lower half of the Parametric Data window. Use the following procedure to remove one of the part numbers you added in a previous procedure: 1. Click the PPS Data icon to display the Parametric Data window. The Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box displays. Click the Delete Part Number icon to delete the part number from the PM database. Deleting Part Numbers from the PM Database Use the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box to remove a part number from the Parts Manager (PM) database. Click Cancel or click the Quit icon to close the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. use the Delete Parametric Data dialog box. Tip: The Logic IC table may be selected when you open the Parametric Data window because the software defaults to the last selection in this window. EXP2005 SPac1 . the values remain displayed. The values disappear when you refresh the display by selecting another table in the PM Classification Tree.Using PM Administrator Inserting PPS Data into the PM Database Figure 3-29. its values display in the window. You can apply those values to another part number in the same table. such as a properly formatted ASCII file (in PM or tab-separated value format). Inserting PPS Data into the PM Database PMA software also allows "bulk loading" of parametric part selection (PPS) data to the Parts Manager (PM) database from an external source. 3-34 Library Manager Process Guide. If you close the Parametric Data window and reopen it. Deleting a Part Number from the Create/Update Parametric Data Dialog Box Note Even though the part number was deleted from the PM database. Exclude and Include.Using PM Administrator Inserting PPS Data into the PM Database Use the following procedure to access an ASCII file and import three part numbers and corresponding PPS data into the PM database: 1. Click the Insert tab in the Parametric Data window and the Insert Parametric Data dialog box displays. Click the File Browse icon in the lower half of the dialog box (to invoke the Open dialog box) and navigate to the directory where you loaded the Mentor Graphics tools. Two other fields. six part numbers display in the Exclude field. 2. Note The dialog box contains two halves. Library Manager Process Guide. the lower half allows you to specify a PPS file. 3. Use this dialog box to insert part numbers and their associated parametric (PPS) data into the PM database. Browse to the following directory: <SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr 4. EXP2005 SPac1 3-35 . 5.txt file. However. Click Open in the Open dialog box. Select the cap_pps. also display. Selecting Part Number Data for Insertion into the PM Database 6. Click the Move all items icon to transfer the part numbers from the Exclude field to the Include field.Using PM Administrator Inserting PPS Data into the PM Database Figure 3-30. 3-36 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . Inserting Part Number Data into the PM Database 7.Using PM Administrator Inserting PPS Data into the PM Database Figure 3-31. the software inserts the six part numbers into the PM database. EXP2005 SPac1 3-37 . The status bar displays the following message: Insertion successful. Library Manager Process Guide. The part numbers no longer display in the Include field. Click Apply. EXP2005 SPac1 . to close the Parts Manager Administrator 3-38 Library Manager Process Guide. 9. Successful Insertion of Part Number Data into the PM Database Note Do not select a table to insert the data into because the PPS data is in PM format. Click File > Exit or the Exit icon window. select a specific table that receives the parametric data. 8. If the PPS data is in tab-separated value (TSV) format. Click Cancel or the Quit icon on the Insert Parametric Data dialog box to return to the Parts Manager Administrator window.Using PM Administrator Inserting PPS Data into the PM Database Figure 3-32. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box 3. The software creates a new user property called New Property1. 1. Click the New Property icon. EXP2005 SPac1 3-39 . The Property Definition Editor dialog box displays. For that reason.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Modifying the Central Library A central library that supports a manufacturing process is never stagnant because the manufacturing process is constantly enhanced and refined. Figure 3-33. scrolls the property list to the end.lmc) file by creating extra properties and partitions. the central library must undergo modification from time to time. 2. Library Manager Process Guide. Use the following procedure to modify the existing central library (. Click the Property Definition Editor icon on the Library Manager interface to invoke the Property Definition Editor. The modifications usually consist of adding additional properties or partitions. Click the check box in the Place property in schematic when Packager or Place Device is used column to enable this option. populate the new partitions with data. Once they are created. and automatically highlights the new property. Click OK to save the new property and close the Property Definition Editor dialog box. 3-40 Library Manager Process Guide. 5. Verify that the Cell Name property attributes match Figure 3-34: Figure 3-34. Select the Parts Manager option in the Include selected property in property lists for field. Expanded Property Definition Editor Dialog Box With “Cell Name” Property Attributes Selected 8. 6. 7. Rename the property from New Property1 to Cell Name. EXP2005 SPac1 .Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library 4. Click Advanced to enlarge the Property Definition Editor dialog box. Click the property name (New Property1) to enable editing in this field. Tip: Selecting the Parts Manager option ensures that this property appears in the Property dropdown list in the Parametric Tables dialog box in Parts Manager (PM). Click Apply to save the Symbol partition changes. Partition Editor Dialog Box (Symbols Tab) 5. Using the Symbols tab. 4. click the New Partition icon from New to Capacitor. Verify that the partitions match Figure 3-35. The Partition Editor dialog box displays. Figure 3-35. Click on the Library Partition Name column heading to sort the partitions. Click the Setup > Partition Editor command in the Library Manager interface. EXP2005 SPac1 3-41 . and change the partition name 3. 2. Add another new symbol partition to the library named Resistor using the same methodology. Creating a Cell Partition Use the following steps to create a cell partition in the active central library: Library Manager Process Guide. The software creates the new symbol partitions in the active central library file.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Creating Symbol Partitions Use the following steps to create new symbol partitions in the active central library using the Library Manager interface: 1. See “Creating a Part Partition from the Project Workspace Tree” on page 2-16 for more information. Click on the Cells tab and add a new cell partition named SM. The software creates the new cell partition in the active central library file. EXP2005 SPac1 . Partition Editor Dialog Box (Cells Tab) 2. 1. Click the Parts tab in the Partition Editor dialog box and add two new part partitions called Capacitor and Resistor. Click Apply to save the partition changes. 3-42 Library Manager Process Guide.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Tip: You can also create a cell partition from the Project workspace tab in the Library Navigator Tree. 1. Creating a Parts Partition Use the following steps to create a Parts (formerly PDB) partition in the active central library: You can also create a Parts partition from the Project workspace tab in the Library Navigator Tree. Figure 3-36. See “Creating Cell Partitions from the Project Workspace Tree” on page 2-15 for more information. 3. 5. The software creates the new Part partitions in the active central library file. 4.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Figure 3-37. Set the Operation field to Import and the Import From field to ASCII file. Click on the Browse icon in the Import From field and navigate to the directory where the Mentor Graphics tools are loaded. The Library Manager interface displays. 7. The Symbols dialog box displays. Click the Symbols tab in the Library Services dialog box. Select the cap_slb. See “Using Library Services to Import DC/DV-Expedition Flow Symbols” on page 2-25 for more information. the Symbols in ASCII file field contains a symbol. EXP2005 SPac1 3-43 . Click Open in the navigator dialog box. the Library Services dialog box displays. Partition Editor Dialog Box (Parts Tab) 2. Browse to the following folder: <SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr 6. Using Library Services to Import Symbols Use the Library Services dialog box to import symbols into the symbol partitions you just created.txt file. 1. 2. Click the Library Services icon . Library Manager Process Guide. Click OK to save the partition changes and close the Partition Editor dialog box. Selecting a Symbol and Associated Data Using Library Services 8. Click the Include All icon to move the symbol from the Symbols in ASCII File field to the Symbols to Import field. Click Apply to import the symbols into the selected partition. 9. 3-44 Library Manager Process Guide.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Figure 3-38. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click the Padstacks tab in the Library Services dialog box to display the Padstacks dialog box. and navigate to the directory where you loaded the Mentor 4. EXP2005 SPac1 3-45 . Click the Browse icon Graphics tools. 3.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Figure 3-39. Browse to the following folder: <SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr Library Manager Process Guide. Set the Operation field to Import and the Import From field to ASCII file. 2. Importing a Symbol and Associated Data Using Library Services Using Library Services to Import Padstacks Use the Library Services dialog box to import padstacks as outlined in the following steps: 1. Click the Include All icon to move the two padstacks from the Padstacks in Import Partition field to the Padstacks to Import field. Selecting Padstacks and Associated Data Using Library Services 7. Select the sm_pad. the Parts in ASCII file field displays two padstack names.txt file. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click Open in the navigator dialog box. 8. 3-46 Library Manager Process Guide. Click Apply to import the padstacks into the specified partition in the active central library.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library 5. Figure 3-40. 6. and navigate to the directory where you loaded the Mentor 4. Browse to the following folder: <SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr Library Manager Process Guide. Set the Operation field to Import and the Import from field to ASCII file.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Figure 3-41. EXP2005 SPac1 3-47 . 3. 2. Importing Padstacks and Associated Data Using Library Services Using Library Services to Import Cells Use the Library Services dialog box to import cells into the cell partitions you just created: 1. Click the Cells tab in Library Services and the Cells dialog box displays. Click the Browse icon Graphics tools. Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library 5.txt file. Set the Current Partition dropdown box to SM. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click Open in the navigator dialog box. 8. Click the Include All icon to move the two cells from the Cells in ASCII file field to the Cells to import field. Selecting Cells and Associated Data Using Library Services 7. 9. Figure 3-42. 6. Select the sm_cell. the Parts in ASCII file field displays two cell names. Click Apply to import the cells into the selected partition as shown in the following figure: 3-48 Library Manager Process Guide. 3. Importing Cells and Associated Data Using Library Services Using Library Services to Import Parts Use the Library Services dialog box to import part information into the partitions you just created: 1. 2.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Figure 3-43. Library Manager Process Guide. Click the Browse icon in the Import from field. EXP2005 SPac1 3-49 . Click the Parts tab in Library Services and the Parts dialog box displays. Change the option on the Import From field from Library Database to ASCII File. Use the navigator dialog box to browse to the directory where the Mentor Graphics software tools reside on your machine. Select the cap_pdb.txt file.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library 4. Browse to the following directory: <SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr 5. Click Open in the navigator dialog box and the Parts in ASCII file field displays six part numbers. EXP2005 SPac1 . 3-50 Library Manager Process Guide. Click the Include All icon to transfer the six part numbers from the Parts in ASCII file field to the Parts to import field. 6. Verify that the Library Services dialog box matches the following figure: Figure 3-44. Selecting Parts and Associated Part Data Using Library Services 7. 8. Change the Current Partition field from Logic Gates to Capacitor. the software automatically imports the corresponding symbols. Click Apply to import the part numbers into the active central library. When importing part data entries from an ASCII file. cells. the software removes them from the Parts to import field and displays them in the Parts in ASCII file field. cells.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Figure 3-45. and pads. Library Manager Process Guide. Note When importing part database entries into a central library from another central library. After importing the part numbers. EXP2005 SPac1 3-51 . and pads separately. Importing Parts and Associated Part Data Using Library Services 9. import all corresponding symbols. These part numbers now display in blue text (indicating that they already exist in the current library) instead of black. 2. Click the Browse icon and navigate to the directory where you loaded the Mentor Graphics tools. Click Open in the navigator dialog box. and padstacks) from an inactive central library file to the active central library: 1. Browse to the following folder: <SDD_HOME>\wg\tutorial\LibMgr\small_library 5. 3-52 Library Manager Process Guide. Select the small_library. the Parts in Import Partition field displays six resistor part numbers.lmc central library file. 4. Set the Operation field to Import and the Import From field to Library database. Click the Parts tab in the Library Services dialog box (if it is not currently active). cells.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Using Library Services to Import Data from Another Central Library File Use the Library Services dialog box to import part numbers and corresponding library data (symbols. The Parts dialog box displays. 6. 3. EXP2005 SPac1 . Library Manager Process Guide. 8. Selecting Parts Data to Import from Another Central Library 7. EXP2005 SPac1 3-53 . Set the Current Partition field to Resistor using the drop down list to the right of the Current Partition field. Click the Include All icon to move the six part numbers from the Parts in Import Partition field to the Parts to Import field.lmc file to the active central library file. cells. and padstacks) from the small_library. Ensure that you set the Mode to Copy. 9. Click Apply to import the part numbers and corresponding library data (symbols.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Figure 3-46. Importing Parts Data from One Central Library to the Active Central Library Tip: The software automatically imports the corresponding symbols. 10. and pads when importing part data entries from one central library to another central library.Using PM Administrator Modifying the Central Library Figure 3-47. 3-54 Library Manager Process Guide. Click Close to dismiss the Library Services dialog box and return to the Library Manager interface. EXP2005 SPac1 . cells. Click the Extract tab to display the Extract Parametric Data dialog box. In this procedure. you must modify the Parts Manager (PM) database to reflect these changes. Therefore. The PMA window displays. 3. deleting PPS data. Select the Logic IC table in the PM Classification Tree. The following message displays in the PMA status bar: Parts exist in table . The single part number associated with this table displays in the Exclude field. and the Exclude and Include fields. Note The Parametric Data dialog box displays on top of the Parametric Tables window and becomes the active dialog box.you are not allowed to edit this table. some file formatting fields. 2. use Parts Manager Administrator software to modify the existing PM database by exporting PPS data. adding additional parameters. Click the PPS Tables icon on the icon bar and the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box displays by default. importing the deleted PPS data. Click the Parts Manager icon on the Library Manager interface to invoke Parts Manager Administrator (PMA) software.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Adding Parametric Data to Parts A library that supports a manufacturing process is constantly enhanced and refined. The most common database modifications include adding parameters and modifying existing parameters in the database. Library Manager Process Guide. 3. The lower half displays a field for a PPS file. 2. Click the PPS Data icon on the icon bar in the PMA window. Remove all PPS data from the table by exporting the data to a file and then deleting it. EXP2005 SPac1 3-55 . Exporting Parametric Data to an ASCII File Export parametric data in the Logic IC table to an ASCII file using the following steps: 1. and inserting PPS data to parts: Viewing a Parametric Table 1. Tip: Tables that contain PPS data cannot be edited using the Parametric Tables dialog box. the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box displays by default. The dialog box contains two halves. Select the Logic IC table in the PM Classification Tree. Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-48. the software creates the file in the default working directory defined in the Parts Manager Configuration dialog box in Figure 3-3 on page 3-5). 3-56 Library Manager Process Guide. Type the following in the File field: logic_ic. to move the part number from the Exclude field to Note If you do not type a path in the File field. EXP2005 SPac1 . Selecting a Part Number to Extract from the Database 4.txt 5. Click the Move All Items icon the Include field. the following message appears in the Parts Manager Administrator status bar: Part numbers extracted successfully. use the Delete Parametric Data dialog box to remove the part number and parametric data from the Logic IC table using the following steps: 1. Extracting a Part Number from the Database to an ASCII File 6. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 3-57 .txt file. After the software writes the data to the database. The dialog box contains two halves. Removing Parametric Data from the PM Database Now that you extracted (copied) the part number and corresponding parametric data associated with the Logic IC table to an ASCII file. Click Apply to transfer the part number and its corresponding PPS data to the logic_ic.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-49. the Delete Parametric Data dialog box displays. Click the Delete tab in the Parametric Data dialog box. The lower half contains the Exclude and Include fields. seven part numbers display in the Exclude field.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-50. Delete Parametric Tables Dialog Box 2. 3-58 Library Manager Process Guide. They represent all part numbers that currently reside in the PM database. EXP2005 SPac1 . Select the PM Classification Tree. Library Manager Process Guide. Displaying all Part Numbers in the PM Database 3. EXP2005 SPac1 3-59 . Select the Logic IC table.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-51. only one part number displays in the Exclude field. to move the part number from the Exclude field to 3-60 Library Manager Process Guide. Click the Move All Items icon the Include field. EXP2005 SPac1 . Selecting a Part Number to Delete from the Logic IC Table 4.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-52. EXP2005 SPac1 3-61 . Notice that the part numbers no longer display in the Include field. the following message displays in the status bar: Delete successful. Deleting a Part Number from the Logic IC Table 5. Library Manager Process Guide. Click Apply to delete the part number and its corresponding PPS data from the Logic IC table. the part number in the part database is not deleted. However.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-53. After the software deletes the data. This enable the PMA software to read the changes you made to the database using the Delete Parametric Data dialog box. Note Before performing the following step. use the following steps to add a parameter to the parametric table: 1. Click the PPS Tables icon on the PMA toolbar. The Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box becomes active and displays it in front of the Delete Parametric Data dialog box. EXP2005 SPac1 . select the PM Classification Tree and then select the Logic IC table.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-54. 3-62 Library Manager Process Guide. Logic IC Table With Part Number Deleted Adding a Parameter to the Parametric Table Now that you have removed part number and parametric part selection (PPS) data from the parametric table. 6. Click Yes on the subsequent dialog box. Ensure that the list of Parameter names are in the following order: • • • Cost Description Cell Type Use the Move Up and Move Down icons to put the parameter names in the proper order. Click and highlight the new parameter name (param name) and key in the following: Cell Type 3. 8. Click the Move Down icon to move the Cell Type parameter to the bottom of the Parameters list. Note When mapping a parameter to a property. Click in the Property column to enable the dropdown list and map the new Cell Type parameter to the Cell Name property. After mapping the parameter. Use the scroll bar to display the first column (Name).Cell Name from the list of properties in the pulldown. 5. Click in the middle of the column or on the left side of the column. Click Apply to save the table modifications. the horizontal scroll bar may move to the right. the first column that appears is the Type column.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts 2. EXP2005 SPac1 3-63 . the dropdown list displays (or click on the right side of the column to display the dropdown list). 7. 4. The following message appears in the dialog box: PPS table created successfully. Highlight 221 . Library Manager Process Guide. Click Cancel to close the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box. EXP2005 SPac1 .txt file to the modified parametric table: 1. 3-64 Library Manager Process Guide.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-55. Click the Parametric Data dialog box to make it active and select the Insert tab. Adding a Parameter to a Parametric Table 9. The Insert Parametric Data dialog box displays. Select the Logic IC table in the PM Classification Tree. Importing Parametric Data into the Table Use the following steps to import part number and PPS data you extracted to the logic_ic. 2. the Open dialog box displays.txt file and click Open. Library Manager Process Guide. The software loads the PPS data from the previously exported logic_ic. EXP2005 SPac1 3-65 . Click the File browse icon. 4.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-56. Selecting a Table to Receive Parametric Data 3. Select the logic_ic.txt file into the Exclude field. to move the part number from the Exclude field to 3-66 Library Manager Process Guide. Selecting Part Number Data to Import from an ASCII File 5.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-57. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click the Move All Items icon the Include field. Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-58. Click Apply. Insertion successful. EXP2005 SPac1 3-67 . Library Manager Process Guide. the following message displays in the Parts Manager Administrator status bar. Upon completion. the software imports the part number and its corresponding PPS data into the Logic IC table. Inserting a Part Number into the Logic IC Table 6. The part number no longer appears in the Include field. Successful Part Number Insertion into the Logic IC Table Updating the Part Number in the PM Database Use the following procedure to update the part number you just inserted into the PM database: 1. Click the Create/Update tab to display the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box and select the Logic IC table from the PM Classification tree in the upper half of the dialog box. EXP2005 SPac1 . 3-68 Library Manager Process Guide. 2.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-59. Select part number 100-1000000-001 from the dropdown list in the lower half of the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. The PMA status bar displays the following message: Part number updated successfully.Using PM Administrator Adding Parametric Data to Parts Figure 3-60. Library Manager Process Guide. 4. Select the Value column in the Cell Type row and key in SM. Parameters Associated With a Part Number 3. EXP2005 SPac1 3-69 . Click Apply to save the PPS data modifications. and execute the PM Validation Utility again to verify that all discrepancies are resolved. Use the following procedure to modify a property in the CentLib.prp file. Part Number With a New Parameter Added to the PM Database 5. The software records any discrepancies to the PMValidate. execute the PM Validation Utility (to generate errors).Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility Figure 3-61.prp file). correct the errors. EXP2005 SPac1 .txt file. Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility The Parts Manager Validation (PM Validate) Utility compares the parametric part selection (PPS) data in the PM database against the property settings in the Property Definition Editor (CentLib. 3-70 Library Manager Process Guide. Click Cancel to close the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box and exit out of PMA. The first warning indicates the Mfg parameter’s corresponding property does not exist in the CentLib. The File Viewer window 4. for the given parameters. Library Manager Process Guide. to invoke the File Viewer. Click the Parts Manager icon on the Library Manager interface to invoke the Parts Manager Administrator software.Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility Invoking the Parts Manager Validation Utility 1. Property mapping for parameter 'Mfg' does not exist in the Central Library Property mapping for parameter 'Mfg Part No' does not exist in the Central Library These warnings state that. The following message displays in the status bar when the utility completes the validation process: Parts Manager Validation complete. 3. such as “Capacitors\Axial\”.txt file from the left half of the File Viewer window. The first line after the file headers indicate the table where the problem exists.txt in your working directory for results. Messages.prp file. Tools Menu Showing Parts Manager Validation Command The validation software starts after you select the command. The PmValidate. Select the PmValidate. indicates that the PM Validation Utility validated against the Axial table in the Capacitors folder. See PmValidate. EXP2005 SPac1 3-71 . Select Tools > Parts Manager Validation from the Parts Manager Administrator menubar to invoke the PM Validation Utility.txt file opens in the right half of the window. The remaining warnings are the previous four warnings which occurred in subsequent tables. The first warnings for this table are: Parameter 'Tolerance' is not the same length as the property that it maps to Parameter length:10 Property length:127 Parameter 'Cell Type' is not the same length as the property that it maps to Parameter length:6 Property length:132 The next warnings appear separately in the table. Click the View Log icon displays. 2. Figure 3-62.prp file. the property that they are mapped to do not exist in the CentLib. 3. View the Cell Type parameter and note that it is mapped to the Cell Name property. Click in the Name column header to sort the properties by name. Note The Tolerance parameter is mapped to the Tolerance property. 3-72 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 .Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility 5. to invoke the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables 2.prp file using the following steps: 1. Click the Property Definition Editor icon on the Library Manager interface to invoke the Property Definition Editor. Correcting Problems Detected by the Parts Manager Validation Utility Use the following steps to correct problems resulting from the PM Validation Utility: 1. Change the Max Number of Characters from 127 to 10 by keying in the correct value in the Value field (to the right of the Option Attribute field). 3. Highlight the Axial table. Double-click on the Capacitors folder in the PM Classification Tree to open it. Scroll down through the list until you find the Tolerance property. 2.txt file. Select the Tolerance property and click Advanced to expand the Property Definition Editor dialog box. 4. The Property Definition Editor dialog box displays. use the Property Definition Editor to modify the CentLib. Using the Property Definition Editor to Correct Tolerance Property Problems To resolve the four warnings in the PmValidate. Click the PPS Tables icon dialog box. Click the Quit icon to dismiss the File Viewer window. 2. Using the Property Definition Editor to Correct Cell Name Property Problems Use the following steps to correct cell name property problems detected by the PM Validation Utility: 1. Library Manager Process Guide. Click Apply to save the Tolerance property changes in the Property Definition Editor dialog box. EXP2005 SPac1 3-73 . Correcting Tolerance Property Problems Using the Property Definition Editor 5. After the second click. Double click on the Type column header to sort the properties by the type of property in reverse order. Select the Cell Name property and change the Max Number of Characters value from 132 to 6 in the Value field (to the right of the Option Attribute field). the Cell Name user property displays at the top of the list.Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility Figure 3-63. Click the New property icon properties. Click Apply to save the Cell Name property changes in the Property Definition Editor dialog box. in the Property List two times to add two additional 3-74 Library Manager Process Guide. use the Property Definition Editor to add two additional properties (Mfg and Mfg Part No). Correcting Cell Name Property Problems Using the Property Definition Editor 3. EXP2005 SPac1 . 1.Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility Figure 3-64. Using the Property Definition Editor to Add Properties To correct the last two warnings detected by the PM Validation Utility. Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility Figure 3-65. Click on the Parts Manager option in the Include Selected Property in Property Lists For field. Change the name of NewProperty1 to Mfg and change the Max Number of Characters value from 132 to 50. Library Manager Process Guide. Adding a New Property Using the Property Definition Editor 2. 3. EXP2005 SPac1 3-75 . This enables the property to be displayed in Parts Manager dialog boxes. Enabling the Parts Manager Option in the Property Definition Editor 4. EXP2005 SPac1 . 3-76 Library Manager Process Guide.Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility Figure 3-66. Change the name of NewProperty2 to Mfg Part No. Change the Max Number of Characters value from 132 to 30 and select the Parts Manager option. txt file by renaming it to PmValidate. The PM Validation Utility generates a new error which appears in the Logic IC table: Parameter 'Cell Type' is not the same length as the property that it maps to Parameter length:132 Property length:6 Use Parts Manager Administrator software to remap the Cell Name property to the Cell Type parameter in the Logic IC table. If a PMValidate. invoke the PM Validation Utility. Note The PM Validation Utility saves the last PmValidate.bak. Click OK in the Property Definition Editor dialog box to save property changes and close the dialog box.txt file in the file viewer. Return to the Parts Manager Administrator window. Setting Up a New Property in the Property Definition Editor 5. Using PM Administrator to Correct Property Problems Use the following procedure to correct property problems detected by the PM Validation Utility using the PMA dialog boxes: 1. the software overwrites the existing file. EXP2005 SPac1 3-77 .Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility Figure 3-67.bak file already exists. and open the PmValidate. Library Manager Process Guide. Export the PPS data from the Logic IC table into a file and delete the PPS data using appropriate steps in “Adding Parametric Data to Parts” on page 3-55. Click Apply to save the Logic IC table changes in the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog box. 4. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click OK in the subsequent dialog box to confirm the save. and the Create/Update/Delete Parametric Tables dialog 5. 6. Parametric Tables With Table Changes Saved 7. Click the PPS Data icon to activate the Parametric Data dialog boxes. Figure 3-68. you are not allowed to edit this 3.Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Validation Utility 2. Click the PPS Tables icon box displays. Select the Logic IC table on the PM Classification Tree in the upper half of the dialog box. The following message displays in the status bar: Parts exist in table table. 3-78 Library Manager Process Guide. the software must work closely with the Parts files to ensure that each library part contains the correct parametric information. 3. EXP2005 SPac1 3-79 . Re-invoking the Parts Manager Validation Utility Use the PM Validation Utility to verify that the parametric part selection (PPS) data in the PM database match the property settings in the Property Definition Editor (CentLib.txt file in the File Viewer. The PMValidate. Library Manager Process Guide. 2. Use the following procedure to create part numbers in the PM database using part data. Double-click the Resistors folder in the PM Classification Tree (in the upper half of the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box) to open the Resistor folder. the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog 3. or in both places. 2. Use the Parts Manager (PM) Batch Update Utility software to transfer data between the parts database files and the PM database in either part by part or batch mode. The parametric information can reside in a parts database file (in the active central library) in the form of properties. The validation software starts after you select the command. The PMA window displays. Close the File Viewer and the Parts Manager Administrator window. Select Tools > Parts Manager Validation from the Parts Manager Administrator menubar to invoke the PM Validation Utility. Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts Because Parts Manager (PM) does not contain symbol or cell information.prp file) based on the corrections you have made: 1.Using PM Administrator Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts 8. transfer PPS data from the PM database to the part database files. and execute the PM Batch Update Utility: Using PM Administrator to Create Part Numbers Use the following steps to create part numbers in PMA: 1. Re-import the PPS data into the Logic IC table using the appropriate steps of “Adding Parametric Data to Parts” on page 3-55. Open the PMValidate. on the icon bar.txt file displays the following message: No errors detected. Click the PPS Data icon box displays. in the PM database as parametric part selection (PPS) data. Click the Parts Manager icon on the Library Manager interface to invoke the Parts Manager Administrator (PMA) software. Create Parts Numbers from PDB Dialog Box 6. EXP2005 SPac1 . Select the Surface Mount table on the PM Classification Tree (in the upper half of the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box). 5. Six part numbers display in the Exclude field.Using PM Administrator Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts 4. The Create Part Numbers from PDB dialog box displays. Click the Create Part Numbers from PDB icon in the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. Select Resistor from the drop down list in the PDB Partition field. Figure 3-69. 3-80 Library Manager Process Guide. Selecting Part Numbers in the Create Part Numbers from PDB Dialog Box Library Manager Process Guide.Using PM Administrator Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts Figure 3-70. Click the Move all items icon to the Include field. EXP2005 SPac1 3-81 . to move the six part numbers from the Exclude field Figure 3-71. Part Numbers Associated With the Resistor Partition 7. EXP2005 SPac1 . the software creates entries in the PM database based on the six part numbers. then the PPS parameters also receive the same values. if any PPS parameters are mapped to properties that are in the part and these properties have values. Click OK. 3-82 Library Manager Process Guide. The Create Part Numbers from PDB dialog box disappears and the following message appears in the Parts Manager Administrator status bar: Create part numbers from PDB common properties successful. Figure 3-72. Creating Part Numbers from PDB Data The software adds the six part numbers to the database in the selected table with values from the Part that are mapped through a common property (in the Property Definition Editor). When creating part numbers from the part.Using PM Administrator Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts 8. Select 800-3000000-001 from the Part Numbers drop down field. if the parameter is required.txt) contains information for each part number that could not be created. This software will not copy the Part properties to the PM database and. The Parts Manager Administrator log file (PmAdmLog. or . the function fails. Note that some PPS data displays in the dialog box. Viewing PPS Data With Part 800-3000000-001 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 3-83 .If the part is missing some PDB component properties that are mapped to required parameters for the part in PM.The Part properties exist but are not toggled in the PM Configuration dialog box. 9. Figure 3-73.Using PM Administrator Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts Note The Create Part Number from PDB function can fail due to the following conditions: . 2. Select part number 100-1000000-001 from the dropdown list in the Part Numbers field. 3. in the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. if any PPS parameters are mapped to properties that are in the parts database and these properties have values.Using PM Administrator Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts Note When creating part numbers from the parts database data. 3-84 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . 1. Click the Parts Database icon in the Library Manager interface to invoke the Parts Database Editor. 4. then the PPS parameters also receive the same values. Applying Part Number Information to the Parts Database Editor Use the Parts Database Editor in Library Manager to ensure that part number information from PM is correctly applied to parts database information in the active central library. select the Logic IC table in the PM Classification Tree. Select Logic Gates in the Partition field. Return to the Parts Manager Administrator window and. EXP2005 SPac1 3-85 . Select the Update This Part Number in the PDB Upon Apply option and click Apply. The software modifies the part number in the Logic Gates PDB. The following message displays in the Parts Manager Administrator status bar: Updating Central Library When the cursor returns to its normal state. Viewing PPS Data With Part 100-1000000-001 5. the following message displays in the status bar: Errors occurred during create/update operation. Consult log file. Library Manager Process Guide.Using PM Administrator Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts Figure 3-74. EXP2005 SPac1 . and date) and the following transcript. Click the View Log icon on the toolbar.Using PM Administrator Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts Figure 3-75. The file contains header information (title. version. The PmAdmLog.txt file displays in the File Viewer. Error Condition When Updating Part Numbers in the PDB 6. Creating part numbers from PDB 800-3000000-001 800-3000000-002 800-3000000-003 800-3000000-004 800-3000000-005 800-3000000-006 Update part number 100-1000000-001 Unable to open PDB file for this part number Unable to update part number in PDB 3-86 Library Manager Process Guide. Figure 3-76. The log then lists the step “Update Part Number”. Part number updated successfully. 7. Since the Logic Gates PDB file was open in the Part Editor.txt file lists the six part numbers that were created using the Creating Part Numbers from PDB procedure. Exit the Part Editor. Updating Part Numbers in the PDB from the Create/Update Parametric Data Dialog Box in the upper right hand corner to dismiss the File Viewer.Using PM Administrator Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts Note The PmAdmLog. EXP2005 SPac1 3-87 . PM software could not update the parts database entry. Click the Quit icon 8. Return to PMA and click Apply in the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. This step is followed by the part number and a status of the operation. The PMA status bar displays the following message. Library Manager Process Guide. 9. The log file states that the PDB file for the part number could not be opened. Parts Database Editor Dialog Box 3-88 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . Invoke the Part Editor from the Library Manager interface. Select part number 100-1000000-001 in the Logic Gates partition. 2.Using PM Administrator Moving Data Between the PM Database and Parts Using the Part Editor to Verify Updates Use the Part Editor dialog box to view the updates you just made in the Part using the following steps: 1. Verify that the Part Editor matches Figure 3-77: Figure 3-77. Open Dialog Box (PM/PDB Synchronization Utility) 5. EXP2005 SPac1 3-89 . For information on executing this utility from the keyboard. In this exercise. consult the Parts Manager Process Guide.Using PM Administrator Using the PM/PDB Synchronization Utility Using the PM/PDB Synchronization Utility The Parts Manager PM to PDB Synchronization Utility synchronizes data stored in the PM database with PDB part number properties in the Parts partition of the central library. Using file management software on your machine.exe to execute the PM/PDB Synchronization Utility. Use the PM/PDB Synchronization Utility to copy PPS data mapped to properties from the PM database to parts database files: 1. The PM/PDB Synchronization Utility will not execute when PMA software is running. Select the Company_Library. Figure 3-78. 4. you will execute the PM/PDB Synchronization Utility using the dialog box. Double-click the PmPdbSync. The Open dialog box displays. You can execute the PM/PDB Synchronization Utility from a dialog box or by keying in command strings from an MS-DOS prompt. This utility transfers data from one location to the other for each part number that exists in the PM database. 2. browse to the following directory: <drive>:\<SDD_HOME>\wg\win32\bin 3. Exit Parts Manager Administrator software. or in the Parts partitions in the active central library.lmc file (the active central library file). Click Open and the Parts Manager PM/PDB Synchronization dialog box displays: Library Manager Process Guide. the PmPdbSync. Upon completion.001' 900-2000000-002 In partition Capacitor Changing property 'Value' from '0. EXP2005 SPac1 . 7.001' 900-2000000-004 In partition Capacitor Changing property 'Value' from '0. The PM/PDB Synchronization Utility creates the PMPdbSync. Click OK.Using PM Administrator Using the PM/PDB Synchronization Utility Figure 3-79.9E-012' Added property 'Cell Name' value '0805' Added property 'Mfg' value 'Kemet' Added property 'Mfg Part No' value 'C0805C479K1G' Added property 'Cost' value '0. This instructs the software to synchronize PPS data in the PM database with parts database data in the Parts partition of the active central library.001' 900-2000000-003 In partition Capacitor Changing property 'Value' from '0.0000000000049' to '4.0000000000049' to '4.000000000068' to '6.txt log file in your working directory and writes results of the synchronization process to this file.9E-012' Added property 'Cell Name' value '0805' Added property 'Mfg' value 'Kemet' Added property 'Mfg Part No' value 'C0805C479K2G' Added property 'Cost' value '0. the software begins the synchronization process.9E-012' Added property 'Cell Name' value '0805' Added property 'Mfg' value 'Kemet' Added property 'Mfg Part No' value 'C0805C479K5G' Added property 'Cost' value '0. Select the Update PDB with PM Data option.0000000000049' to '4.8E-011' Added property 'Cell Name' value '0603' 3-90 Library Manager Process Guide. Processing classification path: Capacitors\Surface Mount\ 900-2000000-001 In partition Capacitor Changing property 'Value' from '0. The following text displays: Processing classification path: Capacitors\Axial\ No part numbers in this classification.txt file displays in the File Viewer. Parts Manager PM/PDB Synchronization Dialog Box 6. Processing classification path: Capacitors\Radial\ No part numbers in this classification. Using the Parts Manager Batch Update Utility Parts Manager (PM) software features the Parts Manager Batch Update (PM Batch Update) Utility (PmBatch. EXP2005 SPac1 3-91 . Processing classification path: Resistors\Surface Mount\ 800-3000000-001 In partition Resistor No changes to part number 800-3000000-002 In partition Resistor No changes to part number 800-3000000-003 In partition Resistor No changes to part number 800-3000000-004 In partition Resistor No changes to part number 800-3000000-005 In partition Resistor No changes to part number 800-3000000-006 In partition Resistor No changes to part number Processing classification path: Logic IC\ 100-1000000-001 In partition Logic Gates No changes to part number 6 part numbers updated 8.000000000068' to '6. Library Manager Process Guide. Close the PmPdbSync.8E-011' Added property 'Cell Name' value '0603' Added property 'Mfg' value 'Kemet' Added property 'Mfg Part No' value 'C0603C680K5G' Added property 'Cost' value '0.Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Batch Update Utility Added property 'Mfg' value 'Kemet' Added property 'Mfg Part No' value 'C0603C680K1G' Added property 'Cost' value '0.8E-011' Added property 'Cell Name' value '0603' Added property 'Mfg' value 'Kemet' Added property 'Mfg Part No' value 'C0603C680K2G' Added property 'Cost' value '0. Processing classification path: Resistors\Radial\ No part numbers in this classification. Also. use the PM Batch Update Utility to update or insert part numbers and/or parametric data in the PM database.000000000068' to '6.001' Processing classification path: Resistors\Axial\ No part numbers in this classification.exe) which allows edits of the Parts Manager database in batch mode.txt file in File Viewer upon completion.001' 900-2000000-006 In partition Capacitor Changing property 'Value' from '0.001' 900-2000000-005 In partition Capacitor Changing property 'Value' from '0. Select 100-1000000-001 from the Part Numbers drop down list. 2. Figure 3-80. Select the Logic IC table in the PM Classification Tree. Invoke Parts Manager Administrator and click the PPS Data icon The Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box displays. 1. Close the Parts Manager Administrator window after verifying that the parameters are correct. EXP2005 SPac1 .Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Batch Update Utility In this procedure. 3. Verifying Parameters Associated With Part Number 100-1000000001 on the toolbar. use the PM Batch Update Utility to update some existing parametric values and insert some new part numbers in the PM database using both text format options (ASCII and Tab-Separated Value. or TSV). 4. 3-92 Library Manager Process Guide. The PMBatch. The following syntax illustrates how to execute the PM Batch Update Utility using the ASCII text format: pmbatch -pm=<pmppsfile> -centrallib=<librarypath> -mode=<insert|update> -pdb <pmppsfile> is the full path to the data file that the utility reads. The software automatically generates this log file in the working directory specified earlier in this process guide.lmc -mode=update -pdb <Path> is the full path to the directory where the software is loaded. EXP2005 SPac1 3-93 . The PM Batch Update Utility outputs data to the PmBatch.txt -centrallib= <Path>\2005\wg\tutorial\ LibMgr Company_library\Company_library.txt log file. Update modifies existing Parts Manager part numbers. <drive>:\.Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Batch Update Utility 5.txt file should contain text similar to the following example: Parts Manager Batch Update Version: <NUMBER> <DATE and TIME> Using central library C:\<Path>\tutorial\LibMgr\Company_library\Company_library. -pdb is an optional argument that instructs the utility to update any parameters that are mapped to properties to be updated in the parts database file. Key in the following at the MS-DOS prompt to update the Cell Type field for part number 100-1000000-001 in the Logic IC table and add a Cell Name property to the Logic IC’s Parts partition in the central library using the PM Batch Update Utility: pmbatch -pm=<Path>\2005EXP\wg\tutorial\ LibMgr logic_pps1. 6. <insert|update> is the mode that the utility executes. <librarypath> is the full path to the central library file.lmc Using update mode Updating pdb Updating part numbers from file C:\<Path>\tutorial\LibMgr\logic_pps1. Insert adds new part numbers. The pmppsfile format is identical to the file format when exporting PPS data from the Parts Manager database. Invoke an MS-DOS window and go to the directory where Parts Manager Administrator software is loaded.txt Library Manager Process Guide.\<SDD_HOME>\wg\win32\bin You execute the PM Batch Update Utility by keying in the appropriate usage statement. When omitted. the utility only modifies the PPS data.. the PM Batch Update Utility adds the property Cell Type to the Logic IC’s PDB file in the active central library. EXP2005 SPac1 . Reverifying Parameters Associated With Part Number 1001000000-001 While updating the Cell Type parameter in the Parts Manager database.Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Batch Update Utility 100-1000000-001 Changing Cell Type from SM to SO20 Adding part property Cell Type value SO20 The parameters for part number 100-1000000-001 should match as shown in Figure 3-81 Figure 3-81. 3-94 Library Manager Process Guide. <librarypath> is the full path to the central library file. Use the TSV control file to update parts in multiple tables in the Parts Manager database by pointing to a unique TSV file for each updated table.txt) contains the following: . Key in the following at the MS-DOS prompt type to add a new part number (1001000000-002) to the Logic IC table: pmbatch -tsv=<Path>\tutorial\LibMgr\logic_tsv_ctl. Insert mode adds new part numbers. 7. EXP2005 SPac1 3-95 . Use the following syntax to execute the PM Batch Update Utility using the TSV (tabseparated value) text format option: pmbatch -tsv=<TSV control file> -centrallib=<librarypath> -mode=<insert|update> -pdb <TSV control file> is the full path to the data file that the utility reads.CLASSIFICATION "Logic IC" <Path> is the full path to where you have Parts Manager software loaded.FILE "C:\\<Path>\\tutorial\\LibMgr\\logic_tsv. 8. Library Manager Process Guide.lmc Using update mode Database is in use by <machine>:<user> for Parts Manager Administrator If this is incorrect.FILETYPE TSV_UPDATE_CONTROL . -pdb is an optional argument that instructs the utility to update any parameters that are mapped to properties for update in the parts data file. If this argument is omitted.lmc -mode=insert <Path> is the full path to where Parts Manager software is loaded. Update mode modifies existing PM part numbers.0" .txt file that contains this message is provided as an example: Parts Manager Batch Update Version: <NUMBER> <DATE and TIME> Using central library C:\<path>\tutorial\LibMgr\Company_library\ Company_library. The PMBatch. If this occurs. the software modifies only the PPS data. exit Parts Manager Administrator and re-execute the PM Batch Update Utility.txt" . The TSV control file (logic_tsv_ctl. Exiting the PMA software clears this status..VERSION "1.txt -centrallib=<Path>\tutorial\LibMgr\Company_library\Company_library. execute the Parts Manager Administrator from this node and by this user. <insert|update> is the mode that the utility executes.Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Batch Update Utility Note If the PM Batch Update Utility executes with the Parts Manager Administrator software active. the software displays a message stating that the database is in use. The . logic_tsv.Using PM Administrator Using the Parts Manager Batch Update Utility The .txt contains the following: Part Number 100-1000000-002 Cell Type DIP20 Description 74F244 Octal Buffer/Driver Cost 1. EXP2005 SPac1 .25 The PMBatch.lmc Using insert mode Processing file C:\<Path>\tutorial\LibMgr\logic_tsv.txt for classification Logic IC Inserting part numbers from file C:\<Path>\tutorial\LibMgr\logic_tsv.CLASSIFICATION keyword specifies the file where the software places the PPS data. The TSV file.txt 100-1000000-002 Part number added to database The parameters for the new part number 100-1000000-002 should match Figure 3-82: 3-96 Library Manager Process Guide.txt file contains the following data: Parts Manager Batch Update Version: <NUMBER> <DATE and TIME> Using central library C:\<Path>\tutorial\LibMgr\Company_library\Company_library.FILE keyword calls for the file name of the TSV file. Using PM Administrator Adding Attachment Data Figure 3-82. EXP2005 SPac1 3-97 . Library Manager Process Guide. the software ignores the -pdb option. GIF image. An attachment can be a URL to a web address. a text file. Adding Attachment Data Parts Manager Administrator (PMA) software allows the addition of one or more attachments to a part number in the Parts Manager (PM) database. and executable on your machine. The utility cannot create a new parts data entry without specific symbol or cell information. Parameters Associated With Part Number 100-1000000-001 After Running PM Batch Update Utility Note When executing the PM Batch Update Utility in Insert mode using the -pdb option. or any other piece of data that your system can interpret. The attachment is a pointer to data available on the network (either internal or external network). Select part number 100-1000000-001 and click the Edit Attachments icon Attachment Data dialog box displays: Figure 3-83. Attachment Data Dialog Box . Select the Logic IC table in the PM Classification Tree. Note Attachments used in this procedure are PDF files. and how to view the attachments. 3-98 Library Manager Process Guide. Click the New Attachment icon to add an attachment to part number 100-1000000-001. Click in the Path text entry field and a Browse icon displays. Invoke this dialog box from either the Parts Manager Administrator interface or from the Parts Manager Client interface.Using PM Administrator Adding Attachment Data Use the Attachment Data dialog box to assign attachments to part numbers. The software adds a text entry field in the Path column. Use Adobe Acrobat Reader to view these attachments. 2. The 4. 5. Adding Attachment Data to a Part The following procedure describes how to add an attachment manually. add attachments through PPS data inserted into the PM database. 3. Invoke the Parts Manager Administrator and click the Parametric Data icon to invoke the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. EXP2005 SPac1 . 1. Select the 74f244. 7.pdf file in Adobe Acrobat Reader. The file displays in the Adobe window. Browse to the following folder: \. EXP2005 SPac1 3-99 . Library Manager Process Guide.Using PM Administrator Adding Attachment Data Figure 3-84.pdf file.. Click OK in the dialog box and the 74f244. Attachment Data Dialog Box With Description Field Highlighted 6. . Viewing Attachment Data Use the following steps to view the data file you saved as an attachment to part number 1001000000-001 using the Attachment Data dialog box: 1. Figure 3-85. Click the View Attachment icon to view the 74f244. Select part number 100-1000000-001 and click the Edit Attachments icon Attachment Data dialog box displays.\2005EXP\SDD_HOME\wg\tutorial\LibMgr 8. Click the Browse icon and navigate to the directory where you loaded the Mentor Graphics tools. The 2. Attachment Data Dialog Box With Valid Path Entry 9.pdf file and directory path displayed in the Path column is saved as an attachment to part number 100-1000000-001. Figure 3-86. Dismiss the 74f244. Note that the text of part number 100-1000000-001 is blue and the text of part number 100-1000000-002 is black. Click in the Part Numbers dropdown list in the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. The Attachment Data dialog box displays. Type Vendor specification in the Description field. Click in the Description field. The software displays the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. Attachment Data Dialog Box With Description Field Displayed 4.pdf file in Adobe Acrobat Reader by exiting the Adobe window. 7. Click OK in the Attachment Data dialog box to save the attachment and description text to part number 100-1000000-001 in the Logic IC table. EXP2005 SPac1 . enter the proper name of the document. to reference a titled document. Click in the Description field. 2. Dismiss Adobe Acrobat Reader. (Optional) Click the View Attachment icon Reader. For example. Adding a Description to Attachment Data Use the Description field in the Attachment Data dialog box to associate a name to the attachment data. to view the PDF file in Adobe Acrobat 6. 3-100 Library Manager Process Guide. 5.Using PM Administrator Adding Attachment Data 3. the software automatically shifts the horizontal view to show only the Description field. 3. Note that the Path field disappears. The blue text indicates that the part number has attachment data associated with it. 1. Conversely. Do not click Apply in the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box to save an attachment. EXP2005 SPac1 3-101 . When exporting PPS data. when importing PPS data with attachments. Click the Insert tab to display the Insert Parametric Data dialog box. Use the following procedure to import PPS data that contains attachment information: 1.Using PM Administrator Importing PPS Data With Attachment Data Figure 3-87. Importing PPS Data With Attachment Data Attachment data is stored in the PM database as parametric part selection (PPS) data. Part Number With Associated Attachment Data Note Click OK in the Attachment Data dialog box to automatically update the PPS data in the Logic IC table. Library Manager Process Guide. the imported data contains attachment information. the software exports attachment information as well. 6. Figure 3-88. Select the res_pps. Browse to the following directory: \.Using PM Administrator Importing PPS Data With Attachment Data 2.txt file. 4. Importing Part Numbers With Attachment Data 5. Double-click on the Resistors folder in the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box and select the Surface Mount table.\2005EXP\SDD_HOME\wg\tutorial\LibMgr 3. EXP2005 SPac1 . Import the resistor PPS data into the PM database using the same procedure performed earlier in this process guide. 3-102 Library Manager Process Guide. 7.. Click the Create/Update tab to display the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. Select the Update existing parts in database option on the Insert Parametric Data dialog box. Exiting / Logging Out of PMA Use the File > Exit command or the Exit icon in the PMA toolbar to close all open PMA dialog boxes and exit the Parts Manager Administrator (PMA) software. Click Cancel to close the Create/Update Parametric Data dialog box. Click in the Parts Numbers field and note that the text of all part numbers are now blue (this indicates that these part numbers have attachment data). Library Manager Process Guide. Part Numbers With Associated Attachment Data (in Blue) 9. EXP2005 SPac1 3-103 . Figure 3-89.Using PM Administrator Exiting / Logging Out of PMA 8. You must complete all work before exiting the application. EXP2005 SPac1 .Using PM Administrator Exiting / Logging Out of PMA 3-104 Library Manager Process Guide. See “Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 4-35 for information on the Reusable Blocks Editor. cells and parts. Note You must successfully complete the exercise in “Using Library Manager” on page 2-1 before you begin the exercise in this chapter. Perform the procedures in the following order for the DC/DV-Expedition flow: • • • • “Creating a Design Project in Design Capture” on page 4-2 “Placing DC/DV Symbols and Devices” on page 4-6 “Compiling and Packaging the DC/DV Schematic” on page 4-10 “Using Expedition PCB” on page 4-24 Use the following flowchart (Figure 4-1) to guide you through the procedures in this section. go to “Creating a Design in DxDesigner” on page 4-13. and place device symbols in a schematic using design entry software. Library Manager Process Guide. create a design.Chapter 4 Implementing a Design Introduction Now that you have created symbols. EXP2005 SPac1 4-1 . use the procedures in this chapter to define a project. performing gate swapping. If you are using DxD-Expedition flow software. and replacing a cell. placing cells. This chapter also includes procedures for using Expedition PCB to link to a schematic project. DC/DV-Expedition flow users are not required to complete the optional exercises in “Using PM Administrator” on page 3-1. compiling a PCB design. pushing a cell. If you are using the DxD-Expedition flow. to define various project settings and file paths for library. Creating a Design Project in Design Capture Note If you are using the Design Capture/DesignView flow. you must have Design Capture software loaded onto your machine. go to “Creating a Design in DxDesigner” on page 4-13.prj) file is used by design entry software (Design Capture and DesignView) and other tools. Software Tools Process Flow (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Note For detailed information on dialog boxes displayed during these exercises. and configuration files.Implementing a Design Creating a Design Project in Design Capture Figure 4-1. 4-2 Library Manager Process Guide. A project (. EXP2005 SPac1 . schematic. click the online help icon or press F1. such as Expedition PCB. and so forth). Select Start > Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > Design Capture Design ViewExpedition Flow > Design Entry > Design Capture to display the Design Capture software. Location of the central database (CDB). EXP2005 SPac1 4-3 . command paths may be different when using DesignView. Information to facilitate integration between PCB layout and design entry tools. Location of other design source files (schematics. hierarchy browsing. Location of the central library. Unless otherwise specified. 2. HDLs. the software uses default configuration information. Location of libraries used in the design (symbols and parts). specify a location for the project directory on your machine. and several other basic functions. Information to facilitate integration between VHDL and DC. Information to facilitate integration between FPGA Synthesis and DC. An active project file is required for design verification. inter-tool communication. state diagrams. Click the Project > New command to display the New Project Wizard. Note Using design entry software without an active project file is not recommended. If you edit a schematic when a project file is not open. The directory where a project file is stored is called the project directory. Location of ASIC/FPGA toolkits in the design. the software writes all output files created during the design process in the project directory. Information to facilitate integration between Analog and DC. and identify design files for the new project: 1.Implementing a Design Creating a Design Project in Design Capture Tip: This process guide uses Design Capture as the design entry software tool. However. Location of configuration files used in the design. You can also use DesignView for design entry tasks. A typical project file contains the following information: • • • • • • • • • • • Location of the root schematic in the design. Using the New Project Wizard to Create a Project The following steps illustrate how to use the New Project Wizard to name a project file. design compilation. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . 1. This page displays a summary of your selections. Figure 4-2. 6. The New Project Wizard displays the directory structure created for the project. Click File > New to display the New dialog box (Figure 4-2).\company_library 5. This enables you to customize the project "seed" and start all new projects from your customized project file.. Tip: New projects can also be created from existing. Click Finish to save all settings. the software automatically creates the project. the project file selections are complete. Selecting a Schematic Design With the New Dialog Box 4-4 Library Manager Process Guide. "seed" project using the Project > Copy command. The new project file name displays in the design entry software banner. Note The software automatically appends the project name you enter to the end of the default directory name in the Project Location field. This is the name of the project file used in this exercise. Creating a New DC/DV Schematic Use the following steps to create a schematic workspace in Design Capture and associate it with the Company_Library. the command paths documented in this chapter assume you are using Design Capture software. Browse to and select the following directory in the Project Location field.lmc central library file: Note You can use DesignView software to perform these steps. Click Next to advance to the next page of the New Project Wizard. . 7. However. You will add a design later in this exercise. At this point. Key in gate_test in the Project Name text entry field. Click Next to advance to the last page of the wizard. 4.Implementing a Design Creating a Design Project in Design Capture 3. the Central Library dialog box displays in the Project Settings interface. The software creates a workspace where you can create a schematic design.lmc) file as outlined in the following steps: Note This procedure assumes that the correct project file displays in the design entry software banner. Linking a Central Library With a Project File Use commands in Design Capture to link the project (. Browse for and select the Company_Library. Library Manager Process Guide.lmc file in the Central Library field.Implementing a Design Creating a Design Project in Design Capture 2. Click OK in the Central Library dialog box to attach the Company_Library. 2. 3. Project Setting Dialog Box (Design Capture) The Capacitor and Resistor entries do not appear if you skipped the exercises in “Using PM Administrator” on page 3-1. Click Open in the Open dialog box (Figure 4-3).lmc file to the project file. EXP2005 SPac1 4-5 . Highlight Schematic and click OK. Figure 4-3. 1. Click Project > Settings.prj) file with the active central library (. and the selected Layout Template will be specified in the project file. the Layout Template dialog box displays when you select the Place > Device command. the software copies various PCB configuration files to the project's Common Database directory (. Select Place > Device or click the Device icon Templates dialog box displays. 5. Click the Partition dropdown box and highlight Logic Gates. Highlight the part in the list (see Figure 4-4). 3. the Place Device dialog box displays. Select the default Layout Template (4 Layer Template) for use during PCB layout of this design. 4. Note If a PCB job has not yet been associated with the project.cdb). Click OK on the Layout Templates dialog box. When you select a Layout Template and click OK. 4-6 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . from the toolbar.Implementing a Design Placing DC/DV Symbols and Devices Placing DC/DV Symbols and Devices Now that you linked the project file and the Company_Library. place the symbols you created into a Design Capture (DC) workspace using the following steps: Assigning a Layout Template 1. The Layout 2.lmc file. The part you created earlier displays in the Parts Found list box. Parts Database Dialog Box (Place Device Command) The Select Symbol field displays the symbols defined for the part. select the g244a (*. The symbol graphics display in the view window below the Slot field. The cell graphics display in the view window below the Preview Available Cells field. This provides the option to individually place the eight slots of the device in the schematic. These are the top and alternate cells you defined with the Pin Mapping dialog box in the Part Editor. Library Manager Process Guide.Implementing a Design Placing DC/DV Symbols and Devices Figure 4-4. Use the Include PDB Data option to add Part data to the symbol when placed in the schematic. The software only places the symbol data when you de-select this option. Use the Slot field to select individual slots for placement. The Preview Available Cells field lists the cells for placement within Expedition PCB.slb extension) symbol from the Select Symbol field and select the Slot dropdown box. EXP2005 SPac1 4-7 . For example. consult PM online help or the Parts Manager Process Guide. Select g244a from the Select Symbol field and place four symbols above the 74F244_Half device. the Place Device dialog box displays. Refreshing the Display Use the following steps to refresh and reorient the display of the symbols in the schematic design: 1.Implementing a Design Placing DC/DV Symbols and Devices The Include PPS Data option is only available if Parts Manager (PM) software resides on your machine. Click the right mouse button to display the popup menu. Highlight and click Cancel on the popup menu. Place the first symbol directly above the 74F244_Half symbol and stack the remaining three symbols above the first from bottom to top. the Place Device dialog box displays. Click the right mouse button to display the popup menu. 6. Highlight and click Cancel on the popup menu. The design should resemble Figure 4-5: 4-8 Library Manager Process Guide. 8. the Place Device dialog box displays. 4. Placing Devices in a Design Use commands in Design Capture to place the symbols you created earlier in this process guide in the schematic design: 1. the Place Device dialog box dismisses and the 74F244_Full device attaches to the cursor. 7. 5. Select 74F244_Half from the Select Symbol field and place it to the right of the 74F244_Full device. For more information. Position the device in the workspace and single click the left mouse button to enter it into the design. Click the right mouse button to display the popup menu. Click Close in the Place Device dialog box. 2. ensure that 74F244_Full is highlighted in the Select Symbol field. Click View > Refresh to update the display in Design Capture. 3. EXP2005 SPac1 . Note Before proceeding. Click Place. Highlight and click Cancel on the popup menu. and place a zoom window around the symbols. note that the software adds part name. When the window updates. press the middle mouse button. click the Display tab. Select View > Zoom Area (or click the Zoom commands from the toolbar) and place a zoom window around the symbols. part number. EXP2005 SPac1 4-9 . and select the Invisible Text option. Select the Place > Wire command (or click the Place Wire (connect) the devices as shown in Figure 4-6: icon) and wire Library Manager Process Guide. Connecting Devices Use the following steps to connect the devices you just placed in the schematic design: 1. select the Properties command. Note If the text does not display.Implementing a Design Placing DC/DV Symbols and Devices Figure 4-5. Schematic Design in Design Capture 2. and cost place holders from information you specified in the part data. Tip: You can also hold the SHIFT key. 4-10 Library Manager Process Guide. Click Save. This format can then be transformed into the target format such as Verilog. 4.sbk in the File Name text box. The Common Database Compiler (CDBC) reads the schematics from the project file and writes the CDB into the location defined by the CDB entry in the project file. 5. Netlists are read into and saved in a neutral format in the Common Database (CDB). Click File > Close to dismiss the schematic design. Click the right mouse button and select Cancel from the popup menu when completed. EXP2005 SPac1 . Compiling and Packaging the DC/DV Schematic In this exercise. and so forth. run the central database (CDB) compiler on the schematic you just created. Click Yes to save the design in the current project file. 3. PCB. The CDB Compiler Utility is a bidirectional interface that enables the interchange of structural netlist data between the software tools.Implementing a Design Compiling and Packaging the DC/DV Schematic Figure 4-6. A confirmation dialog box prompts you to add the schematic file to the current project. 6. EDIF. Key in gate_test. Click File > Save to save the schematic design. Schematic Design With Wires 2. Click Tools > Package Design to invoke Packager software on the schematic design. The software prompts you to save all changes you made to the design. EXP2005 SPac1 4-11 . The following message appears in the Command output window below the DC workspace. 2. Compiler finished. Reviewing Packaging Use the following steps to review work performed by the Packager software: 1.Implementing a Design Compiling and Packaging the DC/DV Schematic The Tools > Compile CDB command in Design Capture (DC) invokes the CDB compiler in default mode (that is. Figure 4-7. The software adds the Reference Designator. Compiling and Packaging the DC/DV Schematic Use the following steps to compile and package the schematic design in DC/DV: 1. However. !THE CDB IS UP-TO-DATE! Note You must scroll up in the Command output window to view this message. Select View > Zoom or click the Zoom command from the toolbar and place a zoom window around the symbols. the following message appears in the Command output window: Packager finished successfully. and pin numbers to the symbols from the part database. for this exercise. it writes various informational messages to the screen and displays any error messages and/or warning messages associated with incorrectly constructed schematics. As the CDBC executes. you should verify your design (using the Tools > Verify command) and correct all errors before compiling the design. no errors found.sbk to open the schematic (Figure 4-7). Double-click gate_test. Library Manager Process Guide. it flattens and runs in incremental compile mode) on the active design. do not run Verify on the schematic. Note Normally. Selecting a Schematic File in Design Capture 2. Click Tools > Compile CDB to activate the CDB Compiler. Upon completion. properties. and Part Label. Tip: If the text does not display. The Place > Device command places the selected symbol and also adds text properties from the part data to the symbol during placement. click the Display tab. EXP2005 SPac1 . Other properties are added to the symbol if enabled in the Property Definition Editor dialog box. Click File > Exit to exit the design entry software. are automatically added to the symbol. Figure 4-8. 4-12 Library Manager Process Guide. When compiled. Part Name. such as the Part Number. select the Edit > Properties command. It is recommended that symbols contain minimal part-specific information. The schematic is now considered complete for this exercise. the software combines all data and displays the following schematic (Figure 4-8). Properties. and select the Invisible Text option to display the text. Completed Schematic Design 3.Implementing a Design Compiling and Packaging the DC/DV Schematic Note You placed minimal information in your symbols when building them with Symbol Editor software. Perform the procedures in this chapter in the following order: “Creating a DxDesigner Project/Linking to Central Library” on page 4-14 “Attaching a Symbol Library to a DxD Project Search Path” on page 4-17 “Adding Symbols to a DxD Schematic” on page 4-20 “Compiling and Packaging the DxD Schematic” on page 4-23 “Using Expedition PCB” on page 4-24 Note See “Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 4-35 for information on the Reusable Blocks Editor. EXP2005 SPac1 4-13 .Implementing a Design Creating a Design in DxDesigner Creating a Design in DxDesigner Use DxDesigner to create and define a new project. Library Manager Process Guide. and place symbols in a schematic. create a design. Note You must successfully complete the exercises in “Using Library Manager” on page 2-1 before you begin the exercises in this chapter. 4-14 Library Manager Process Guide. create a project in which to store the schematic design files. link that project to the central library. Creating a New DxD Project and Linking to a Central Library Use the following steps to create a new DxD project file and establish a link to the Company_Library central library: 1. On Windows. Then.Implementing a Design Creating a DxDesigner Project/Linking to Central Library Use the flowchart in Figure 4-9 to guide you through the procedures in this section: Figure 4-9. Software Tools Process Flow (DxDesigner-Expedition Library Manager) Creating a DxDesigner Project/Linking to Central Library Before you create a schematic. EXP2005 SPac1 . and WIR files that result when you generate a netlist for a schematic. symbols. You must also define a library search path that will indicate the order in which you want to search your part libraries for schematic symbols and other design elements that you will be using to create the schematic designs. click Start > Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > DxDesignerExpedition Flow > Design Entry > DxDesigner to invoke DxDesigner. 3. such as what libraries to load in the library search order. Select the category (General) and type of project (Default) you want to create. open a terminal window and type viewdraw. This type is appropriate for most design types. 7. Click File > New and select the Project tab. Figure 4-10. all projects are of a General category. Set the design configuration as shown in Figure 4-11. 2. Browse to the \Company_Library directory in the Location field. Key in gate_test in the (project) Name field. Click More to display the design configuration information. It contains information relating to the type of project you want to create.Implementing a Design Creating a DxDesigner Project/Linking to Central Library On Linux and UNIX. Figure 4-11. This instructs the software to create the DxD project file in the \Company_Library\gate_test directory (Figure 4-10). 4. Specifying Central Library Path Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 4-15 . The Default project type adds the built-in library to the project. 5. Note Currently. Specifying a DxDesigner Project Name 6. See “Configuring Linux and UNIX Workstations” on page 1-5 for more information. A project type is like a template. Implementing a Design Creating a DxDesigner Project/Linking to Central Library 8. 11. use the pcb_dx. expand the view and enable the “Zoom Style” property (Figure 4-12). Select the following DxD project file within the central library as follows: <drive>:\Company_Library\gate_test\pcb_dx\pcb_dx. you can specify a path and the software creates the project file and stores the settings in it as specified in the Design Configuration dialog box. In this exercise. Enabling Expedition Style Zoom 9.pcb 10. Figure 4-12. Ensure the design has the following settings (in Table 4-1): Table 4-1.prj file. For example: <drive>:\Company_Library\LayoutTemplates\4 Layer Template\template.prj Tip: If no DxD project file existed. When you click the Expedition PCB check box. EXP2005 SPac1 . Establishing Project File Settings Setting Keybindings Configuration File Allow Forward Annotation Allow Back Annotation Constrain in CES Use CDB Flow Automatic Update of Schematic Files Value Disable expedition.cfg Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable 4-16 Library Manager Process Guide. Select the appropriate layout template within the central library structure. Click OK. If not.Implementing a Design Attaching a Symbol Library to a DxD Project Search Path Tip: You cannot disable the Constrain in CES option. select Expedition PCB (Figure 4-13). EXP2005 SPac1 4-17 . Library Manager Process Guide. Having set the active Design Configuration to Expedition PCB (performed in the previous procedure).dproj project file in the \Company_Library\gate_test directory. See procedures in “Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations” on page E-1 for information on using the netlist-based flow. Also. the software creates a gate_test. Design Configuration Pulldown Menu Attaching a Symbol Library to a DxD Project Search Path Use the following steps to attach a symbol library to your DxD project: 1. and select the Invoke Project Editor command (Figure 4-14). go to the Navigator Project tree. 12. Note The central library you create and work with in this process guide should not be used or associated with any central library you currently have or will create when using Library Manager. To use a netlist-based flow. rightclick the mouse button to display the popup menu. 13. The DxDesigner interface appears. DO NOT ENABLE the Use CDB Flow option. you cannot return to a non-CDB flow. Figure 4-13. highlight Design Roots. Ensure that Expedition PCB appears in the Design Configuration pulldown menu. when you enable the Use CDB Flow option. Figure 4-15. EXP2005 SPac1 . 4-18 Library Manager Process Guide. Project Editor Search Order Scheme 2. Changing the Search Order Scheme Logic_Gates appears in the Library Search Order list (Figure 4-17). Change the search order scheme to Central Library default (Figure 4-16): Figure 4-16.Implementing a Design Attaching a Symbol Library to a DxD Project Search Path Figure 4-14. Selecting Invoke Project Editor Command (DxDesigner) The Project Editor dialog box displays with a default search order scheme (Figure 4-15). Creating a Schematic in DxDesigner Library Manager Process Guide.ini file. Key in gate_test in the Name field. If you re-invoke the Project Editor. Click OK. Note that the location of the schematic file is automatically updated in the Location field (Figure 4-18). Click File > New > File tab. Project Editor With Symbol Library Search Order Defined 3. 3.Implementing a Design Attaching a Symbol Library to a DxD Project Search Path Figure 4-17. 2. Click Schematic to create a new empty schematic file. These will appear in the Project Editor search order listing with full paths displayed. This library path and search order information is written to the project's viewdraw. you would see the Search order scheme field again set to “{Local to Project}” again. Subsequent changes made to the search order scheme (if you click Apply or OK) will overwrite the current search order information in the viewdraw. the Project Editor dialog disappears and the software attaches the symbol library to your DxD project. This allows you to distinguish between the central library libraries and local libraries. local library paths (libraries that do not exist in the central library) will be preserved in the project. Figure 4-18.ini file. Also. create a schematic in DxDesigner using the following steps: 1. This is correct behavior as the active scheme is always saved locally to the project. Creating a Schematic Workspace in DxDesigner Now that you have created a project and linked it to a valid central library. EXP2005 SPac1 4-19 . the Place Device dialog box appears. the schematic is created in your active project directory.1 symbol (Figure 4-19). Click Add > Device from PDB . Place Device Dialog Box 4-20 Library Manager Process Guide. Adding Symbols to a DxD Schematic Now that you have created a project file and associated it with the central library. Click OK. You can work on the schematic contents in the workspace. EXP2005 SPac1 . Select the 74f244_full. 3. Be sure the pin numbers that were previously built in to the symbols appear in the pin list dropdown box (below Select Symbol list). place the symbols you created (via DxDesigner) using the following steps. Select the Logic_Gates partition. 1. The symbols you manipulated earlier in this process guide display in the Select Symbol list.Implementing a Design Adding Symbols to a DxD Schematic 4. Figure 4-19. 2. 6. EXP2005 SPac1 4-21 . 9. The schematic should resemble the design in Figure 4-20. The component attaches to the cursor. 8. Click to place the component in the design. Zoom in close enough for the grid to display. Close the Add Component dialog box when completed. Library Manager Process Guide. Select the g244a.1 components above the 74f244_half component. 7.1 symbol from list and click Place. 10. 5. Positioning Components in the DxD Schematic 11. the component attaches to the cursor. Position the 74f244_half component to the right of the 74f244_full component. Select the 74f244_half. Click to place the component in the design. Place the 74f244_full component at the bottom left of design space. Use Zoom by Rectangle to improve resolution for wiring purposes. Click Place.Implementing a Design Adding Symbols to a DxD Schematic 4. Place four g244a. The component attaches to the cursor.1 symbol from list and click Place. The DxD project workspace should appear as shown in Figure 4-20: Figure 4-20. 1. DxD Schematic Design With Nets Included 3. Click Add > Net and wire (connect) the components as shown in Figure 4-21. 2.Implementing a Design Adding Symbols to a DxD Schematic Connecting Components Use the following procedure to wire (connect) the components in your schematic. Note that the appearance of symbols in the schematic may vary if you are using DxD-Expedition Library Manager. The schematic should resemble the following figure: Figure 4-21. Click File > Save to save your work. Click Select to exit the Add Net command. EXP2005 SPac1 . 4-22 Library Manager Process Guide. Go to Step 4 in “Opening a New PCB Job” on page 4-25 to use Expedition PCB software to forward annotate the design. the following message should display in the Results tab: Packager finished successfully. you can use the Tools > Create PCB Netlist (common) command to invoke the ViewPCB dialog box. Perform the following steps to prepare the schematic design for export to a PCB layout system and package the schematic: 1. This format can then be transformed into the target format. The software runs the CDB Compiler on the design and the following message appears at the bottom of the DxDesigner window: CDB was generated successfully. Use the default settings in the Basic tab. such as Expedition PCB. Click Tools > Compile CDB. Click Tools > Launch Expedition to execute Expedition PCB. Click Run in the CDB Packager dialog box to run CDB Packager and generate a netlist. which allows you to run forward annotation on a DxD design. The Results tab displays the outcome of the netlist generation. The CDB Compiler is a bidirectional interface that enables the interchange of structural netlist data between the software tools. 2.Implementing a Design Compiling and Packaging the DxD Schematic Compiling and Packaging the DxD Schematic In this exercise. Click Tools > Package CDB. Library Manager Process Guide. While the software displays various notes and warnings. EXP2005 SPac1 4-23 . Note If you do not select the Use CDB Flow options in the Design Configurations dialog box. !THE CDB IS UP-TO-DATE! Tip: You must scroll up the Results tab to view this message. the CDB Packager dialog box appears. The project you are working on appears in the Expedition PCB viewer. 4. Netlists are read into and saved in a neutral format in the Common Database (DCB). run the central database (CDB) compiler on the schematic you just saved. Ensure the correct project file appears at the top of the dialog box (Basic tab). 3. Select Start > Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > <Design Capture DesignViewExpedition Flow> or <DxDesigner-Expedition Flow> > Layout > Expedition PCB to invoke Expedition PCB software (if not already invoked). the Job Management Wizard displays. Click File > New. go to Step 4 in “Opening a New PCB Job” on page 4-25 to forward annotate. and replace a cell in the PCB job. Use Expedition PCB software to automate the design of printed circuit boards. It can push aside routed traces and vias and work in a gridded or gridless environment. and output generation. analysis. 2. push into a cell. EXP2005 SPac1 . PCB design functions. perform gate swapping. placement optimization. Expedition PCB contains the Auto Router which is a shape-based router and interconnect editor. Note If you are using the DxD-Expedition Library Manager flow. This section contains the following topics: • • • • • • • Invoking Expedition PCB “Opening a New PCB Job” on page 4-25 “Swapping Gates” on page 4-27 “Pushing from Top Cell to Bottom Cell” on page 4-32 “Replacing a Cell” on page 4-33 “Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 4-35 “Summary” on page 4-34 Invoking Expedition PCB Use the following steps to invoke Expedition PCB software and create a new PCB design file: 1. 4-24 Library Manager Process Guide. such as placement layout. providing both interactive and batch routing capabilities. routing. The Expedition PCB window displays. Use Expedition PCB software to open a new PCB job. are performed using Expedition PCB.Implementing a Design Using Expedition PCB Using Expedition PCB This section provides information on using Expedition PCB to build a PCB design with the entities created earlier in this process guide. The routing process is controlled by the design rules and routing algorithms that you define. Click File > Open in Expedition PCB and browse to the following path: . Note The layout template copied by the software is the template you designated in the Job Management Wizard. Information on creating and manipulating layout templates is included later in this process guide.pcb). 6. Click Next. the Project Integration dialog box displays. 5. Click Close on the Project Integration dialog box. Click the Browse icon on the Job Management Wizard and browse for the following source project filename: .prj 4. 3.\company_library\gate_test\pcb_dx 2. Click Apply. 8. Library Manager Process Guide. 9. 7.. Click the Place Mode icon and select the Place Parts and Cells command (or click the Place Parts and Cells icon). Click Open on the Select Project File dialog box.Implementing a Design Using Expedition PCB 3. 8. the software creates a new PCB source project filename (gate_test. Select 4 Layer Template in the Job Management Wizard and click Next to advance to the next dialog box. Select Forward Annotate. Select the Unplaced option (from the list of Include options).. 7.pcb and click the Open button.\company_library\gate_test\gate_test. 5. The Place Parts and Cells dialog box displays. Click Setup > Project Integration. Click OK in the Information dialog box when it displays. Opening a New PCB Job Use the following steps to open a new PCB job in the PCB source project: 1. The software performs a database load and netload and brings the schematic data into the design. 6. Select gate_test. 4. EXP2005 SPac1 4-25 . Click the Include All icon. The Place Parts and Cells dialog box dismisses and the part U1 attaches to the cursor. 10. The software opens the PCB job. Click Close to dismiss the Job Management Wizard dialog box. Click Finish to accept the default settings. Click in the screen area to deselect the cell graphics (see Figure 4-22). EXP2005 SPac1 . 13. 15. Position part U2 at the top (inside the board outline) and click the left mouse button to place it in the design. part U2 attaches to the cursor.Implementing a Design Using Expedition PCB 11. Click Close to dismiss the Place Parts and Cells dialog box. Tip: U1 and U2 are the cells created earlier in this chapter. PCB Design With Cells U1 and U2 Displayed 4-26 Library Manager Process Guide. Move the cursor up. 12. 14. Position part U1 at the bottom (inside the board outline) and click the left mouse button to place it in the design. Figure 4-22. Pins 4:L. and 8:L also highlight (Figure 4-23).Implementing a Design Using Expedition PCB Swapping Gates Use the following steps to swap gates between the U1 and U2 parts that are displayed in Expedition PCB: 1. 2. 6:L." )." 3. The status bar (at the Library Manager Process Guide. Zoom in between parts U1 and U2 until the pin numbers are visible. Click Pin 2:L on U2. The status bar displays the following message: "Select pin from second gate to swap. EXP2005 SPac1 4-27 . Select Route > Swap > Gates (or click the Swap Gates icon bottom of the window) displays the following message: "Select pin of first gate to swap. " 4-28 Library Manager Process Guide. Click on Pin 8:L and the Expedition PCB status bar displays the following message: "Confirm swap. EXP2005 SPac1 .Implementing a Design Using Expedition PCB Figure 4-23. Cells With Selected Pins Highlighted 4. Click anywhere in the workspace to confirm your selection. Click the Fit Board icon. The board displays properly within the template. 7.Implementing a Design Using Expedition PCB Figure 4-24. Cells With Pins Selected for Gate Swapping 5. The board should appear as illustrated in Figure 4-25: Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 4-29 . 6. Notice that net lines are no longer crossed. Swap gates 4:L and 6:L using the process outlined in Steps 1-5. The Back Annotation indicator should change from red to green. EXP2005 SPac1 . Board With All Gates Swapped 8. 4-30 Library Manager Process Guide. Select Setup > Project Integration to invoke the Project Integration dialog box. Click Back Annotation in Expedition PCB which annotates the swap information back to the schematic.Implementing a Design Using Expedition PCB Figure 4-25. 9. 10. Close the Project Integration dialog box. Click File > Save to save the design. The software swaps the pin numbers between the symbols according to the swapping performed in Expedition PCB. Figure 4-26. Click Run. and warnings (Figure 4-27). This includes change information regarding pin swaps. return to ViewPCB dialog box. gate swaps. EXP2005 SPac1 4-31 . ViewPCB Dialog Box (DxDesigner) Running Back Annotation 12.Implementing a Design Using Expedition PCB 11. notes. and so forth. Library Manager Process Guide. Be sure to deselect the Run command line before processing option. Change the process to run Back Annotate Information From Layout to Schematic (Figure 4-26). Use back annotation to bring layout information from your PCB place and route tool back to the schematic. The Results tab displays without errors. (DxD-Expedition Library Manager Flow only) To complete the Back Annotation process. The software pushes the cell to the opposite side of the board. 3. Click in the workspace to deselect the component. Note When pushing a cell. 2. the cell updates with the opposite side padstack that you specified earlier in the Padstack Editor. Select part U1.Implementing a Design Using Expedition PCB Figure 4-27. EXP2005 SPac1 . 4-32 Library Manager Process Guide. ViewPCB Dialog Box (Results tab) with Back Annotation Results Pushing from Top Cell to Bottom Cell Use the following steps to push from one cell to another in Expedition PCB: 1. the part highlights. The part number and reference designator text are now mirrored. Click the Place action key (below the PCB workspace) or press the F12 function key on the keyboard. Press the F5 function key on the keyboard or click the Push action key. 4. Select the arrow. The software automatically places the alternate cell on the original cell’s origin as shown in Figure 4-28. EXP2005 SPac1 4-33 . The Reference Designator and Replacement Cell lists update. 4.Implementing a Design Using Expedition PCB Replacing a Cell Use the following steps to replace a cell in the design: 1. click (20_PIN_SOIC). and click OK. For the DxD-Expedition Library Manager flow. a dropdown arrow displays. You can also place the alternate cell in the design using the Place Cells dialog box. 3. 2. Click ECO > Replace Cell in Expedition PCB. Tip: You defined the alternate cell earlier in this process guide using the Part Editor. Library Manager Process Guide. select 20 pin dip (or 20_PIN_DIP if you are using DxD-Expedition Library Manager) from the list. Click (20 pin SOIC) in the Replacement Cell list for part U2. Select 100-100000-001 from the Parts with Multiple Cells list. the Replace Cell dialog box displays. See “Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 4-35 to learn more about Reusable Blocks functionality in Library Manager for the DC/DV-Expedition flow. EXP2005 SPac1 .Implementing a Design Summary Figure 4-28. Be sure to read “Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities” on page 5-1 for more information on tools and utilities available from the Library Manager interface. 4-34 Library Manager Process Guide. Board Design With Replaced Cell Defined Summary You have completed the exercises in this process guide using the central library you created. plane information. interconnect. It cannot contain a board outline or route border. mounting holes. A reusable block can contain parts. and related design information (see “Creating a Logical/Physical Reusable Block” on page 4-36).Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Use the Reusable Blocks function in Library Manager to create circuit blocks and store them in the central library for future use. slots. Figure 4-29. shape fills. design rules. PCB layout. and store it in the central library. Reusable Blocks Node in Workspace Tree Invoking Reusable Block Software Use any of the following methods to invoke the Reusable Blocks Editor: Click Tools > Reusable Blocks Editor to invoke the Reusable Blocks Editor dialog box or click the icon in the toolbar. You can create a Logical/Physical reusable block design that contains the schematic. vias. You design the circuit block using design entry tools (such as Design Capture and DesignView in the DC/DV-Expedition flow) and layout tools (such as Expedition PCB). verify the circuit block. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 4-35 . This allows you to utilize verified quality circuitry with the ease of placing a single element in a design. You can also invoke the Reusable Blocks Editor using commands from the popup menu accessible from the Reusable Blocks node in the workspace tree (Figure 4-30). contours. user-defined graphics and rules by area. obstructs. This reusable block type appears under the Reusable Blocks node in the workspace tree (Figure 4-29). select the New Logical/Physical Reuse Block popup menu command from the Logical/Physical Reusable Blocks node in the workspace tree. use the Reusable Blocks software in Library Manager to create a reusable block from the gate_test project. the Reusable Blocks dialog box displays (Figure 4-31). and related design information and is supported in the DC/DV-Expedition flow. PCB layout. Using this method allows you to skip Step 2 in this procedure. The New Reusable Blocks dialog box appears (Figure 4-32). In this procedure. Tip: To access the New Reusable Blocks dialog box without invoking the Reusable Blocks dialog box. 1. Creating a Logical/Physical Reusable Block A Logical/Physical reusable block design contains the schematic. Select Tools > Reusable Blocks Editor or click the Reusable Blocks icon on the Library Manager interface or click the Reusable Blocks Dialog popup menu command from the Logical/Physical Reusable Blocks node in the workspace tree.Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Figure 4-30. EXP2005 SPac1 . 4-36 Library Manager Process Guide. Accessing Reusable Blocks (Logical/Physical) Commands from the Workspace Tree The Reuse Blocks dialog box appears (Figure 4-31) and allows you to create reusable blocks based on the type you selected from the popup menu. if you click the New Logical/Physical Reuse Block popup menu command (Figure 4-30). the New Reusable Block dialog box appears. Reusable Blocks Dialog Box 2. Click the Browse icon and select the following source project file: <drive>:\Company_Library\gate_test The following appears by default in the Reusable Block Name field. EXP2005 SPac1 4-37 . 4. See Table 4-2 on page 4-40 for a description of the properties associated with an reusable block. New Reusable Block Dialog Box (Logical/Physical) 3. Or. Click OK to dismiss the New Reusable Blocks dialog box. If not. Click the New Reusable Block icon and the New Reusable Block dialog box displays (Figure 4-32). key in gate_test.Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Figure 4-31. Figure 4-32. Library Manager Process Guide. The Reusable Blocks dialog box now displays the gate_test circuit with a status of “Unverified” (Figure 4-33) and lists all properties associated with the new reusable block. Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Figure 4-33. Reusable Blocks Dialog Box with Block Name Displayed The project workspace tree also adds the reusable block to the Logical/Physical Reusable Blocks node (Figure 4-34). Figure 4-34. Logical/Physical Reuse Block in the Workspace Tree The software creates a new subdirectory (ReusableBlocks) in the active DC/DVExpedition flow central library file structure (see “Subdirectories and Files Created by Library Manager” on page 2-6). Within the ReusableBlocks subdirectory within the central library structure, the software creates a subdirectory using the name of the reusable blocks you create (for example, gate_test). Note that the software creates two subdirectories below the directory named for the reusable block: • Work - contains the project file, schematic objects, and supporting entities needed for the reusable block to have logical and physical attributes. When entities reside in the Work subdirectory, the Status field in the Reusable Blocks dialog box shows “Unverified” for the specific reusable block. Cert - When the reusable block is successfully verified, the software moves the project file, schematic objects, and supporting entities from the Work subdirectory to this subdirectory. When entities reside in the Cert subdirectory, the Status field in the Reusable Blocks dialog box shows “Verified” for the specific reusable block. See Table 4-2 on page 4-40 for more information on reusable block properties. • 4-38 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Viewing Reusable Block Properties Note The following sections illustrate how to use Reusable Block object commands in the workspace tree. Do not manipulate reusable block objects in the sample central library you created for use in this process guide. Use the Reuse Properties popup menu command in the workspace tree to view the object properties of any reusable block in the central library. When invoked, the Reusable Block Properties dialog box appears and displays properties of the selected object, such as name, status, modification time/date stamps, and description. Tip: This provides an easy method to view reusable block object properties without invoking the Reusable Blocks Editor (Figure 4-33 on page 4-38). To view reusable block properties: 1. Highlight the reusable block in the workspace tree. 2. Invoke the Reuse Properties popup menu command in the workspace tree; the Reusable Block Properties dialog box appears (Figure 4-35). Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 4-39 Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Figure 4-35. Reusable Block Properties Dialog Box (Invoked from Workspace Tree) Table 4-2 describes the fields and options on the Reusable Block Properties dialog box. Table 4-2. Reusable Block Properties Dialog Box Fields and Options Dialog Box Field Block Name Block Layers Description By default, the reusable block name matches the project file (*.prj) name associated with the central library. Identifies the number of layers within the reusable block design. 4-40 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Table 4-2. Reusable Block Properties Dialog Box Fields and Options Dialog Box Field Status (non-editable field) Description Verified - Indicates that the reusable block has been verified and can be placed in schematic designs or extracted into Expedition PCB designs. The project file, PCB job, and files supporting the reusable block object are stored in the Cert subdirectory in the central library (ReusableBlocks). Unverified - Indicates that a change has occurred that requires re-verification of the reusable block and a re-save of the reusable block cell. A reusable block that is unverified is not allowed to be placed within schematics or extracted into Expedition PCB designs until it is reverified. If there are newer cells or padstacks referenced by the reusable block, Forward Annotation does not bring them into the local design until the reusable block is reverified. This ensures that the local reusable block cell remains in synchronization with the central library. The project file, PCB job, and files supporting the reusable block object are stored in the Work subdirectory in the central library (ReusableBlocks). Displays when the reusable block was last updated. The time and date stamp and the username of the individual who processed the reusable block appears in this field. Displays the modification status of the physical cell (footprint) characteristics within the reusable block. Unmodified - Displays when the physical attributes of the reusable block has not been modified since the last successful verification. Modified - Displays when the physical attributes of the reusable block has been modified and successfully verified. This also indicates that other designs that include the same block may be impacted by the change. Design Modified (non-editable field) Cell Modified (non-editable field) Reusable Block Description Key in a verbose description of the reusable block. This (Optional) text is saved to the ReuseInfo.txt file located in the subdirectory associated with the reusable block (same level as the Work and Cert subdirectories). 3. Key in a reusable block description (if one is not specified already for the reusable block). 4. Click OK to save changes and dismiss the dialog box. Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 4-41 Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Note Once a reusable block has had its reusable block cell saved, any changes to padstacks, parts or cells within the central library, referenced by the reusable block, causes the reusable block to be marked as Unverified (see Table 4-2). Editing a Reusable Block Library Manager features two ways to select a reusable block of any type within a central library for editing; from the Reusable Blocks dialog box (Figure 4-33) or the Edit popup menu command in the Reusable Blocks node in the tree (Figure 4-36). Figure 4-36. Edit Reusable Block Command in the Workspace Tree The software invokes Expedition PCB and provides the tools necessary to edit the reusable block objects. Upon completion, save your work in Expedition PCB and exit. When edits are made to a “Verified” reusable block object, the status changes to “Unverified” until the object is recompiled, packaged, and successfully completes all verification checks. Once all verification checks are completed, the reusable block status changes to “Verified” (see Table 4-2). Copying a Reusable Block There are two methods to copy a reusable block: • Use the Copy popup menu command to copy an existing reusable block and create a new one. Highlight the reusable block in the workspace tree and use the Copy popup menu command (Figure 4-37). 4-42 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Figure 4-37. Copying a Reusable Block in the Workspace Tree • Use the Copy icon in the Reusable Blocks dialog box. Highlight the Reusable Block you want to copy in the dialog box, click Copy , key in a unique name for the new reusable block, and press Enter (Figure 4-38). Figure 4-38. Copying a Reusable Block The software creates a new reusable block with the same name but with _1 appended to the source reusable block. For example, if you copy the gate_test reusable block (Figure 4-38), the software creates a new reusable block named gate_test_1 (Figure 4-39). Figure 4-39. Results of Copying a Reusable Block in the Workspace Tree Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 4-43 Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Renaming a Reusable Block Use the Rename popup menu command to edit any reusable block name. Any renamed reusable block name cannot be the same as another name within the reusable block type or the software generates errors. To change a reusable block name: 1. Highlight the reusable block in the workspace tree. 2. Invoke the Rename popup menu command. The Rename Reusable Block dialog box appears (Figure 4-40). 3. Key in the new name for the reusable block in the dialog box (Figure 4-40). Figure 4-40. Renaming a Reusable Block in the Workspace Tree 4. Click OK. The new reusable block name appears in the workspace tree (Figure 4-41). In this example, the sampletest_1 reusable block was renamed to SRAM15 and the revised name appears in the workspace tree. An error message appears if enter a reusable block name that is already defined (to avoid duplicate names). 4-44 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Figure 4-41. Renamed Reusable Block in the Workspace Tree Tip: The Reusable Blocks dialog box (Figure 4-33) also provides a user interface to perform this operation. Simply highlight the reusable block name in the Block Name field, type the new name, and click again in the field to save the changes. Deleting a Reusable Block Use the Delete popup menu command in the workspace tree to remove any reusable block from a reusable block type partition in a central library. 1. Highlight the reusable block in the workspace tree that you want to delete and select the Delete popup menu command (Figure 4-42). Figure 4-42. Deleting a Reusable Block in the Workspace Tree The software displays a warning message and asks you to confirm the deletion. Caution Deleting a reusable block from a central library can have detrimental affects on designs that use that reusable block and cause the CDB Compiler, Packager, and Verification to fail. 2. Click OK in the message dialog box; the software removes the file from the central library the workspace tree refreshes (Figure 4-43). Click Cancel to exit the Delete command. Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 4-45 Implementing a Design Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow) Figure 4-43. Reusable Block Removed from the Workspace Tree Tip: The Reusable Blocks dialog box (Figure 4-33) also provides the Delete icon to perform this operation. Simply highlight the reusable block in the dialog box and click Delete. The software displays a warning message and asks you to confirm the deletion. Click OK. 4-46 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Chapter 5 Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Introduction Library Manager provides additional tools to manipulate central library data. The dialog box displays all the available layout and panel templates in the central library. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 5-1 . which adjusts central libraries that were created on the Windows operating system prior to SDD2004 SPac1 for use on the Linux operating system. See Appendix C: “Upgrading Central Libraries for Linux and UNIX Use” on page C-1 includes information on the lmcwin2unix script. Using Layout Templates Use the Layout Templates dialog box to create and manage PCB layout or panel templates that can be used to start new PCB or panel designs. This chapter discusses the following Library Manager utilities and administrative procedures that are part of central library file management: • • • • • • • • • • • • Using Layout Templates “Using IBIS Software” on page 5-3 “Using Symbol Editor for DC/DV Symbols” on page 5-6 “Using Symbol Editor for DxD Symbols” on page 5-7 “Using Padstack Editor” on page 5-7 “Using Library PDF Documenter” on page 5-8 “Creating a User-defined Script or Dialog Box” on page 5-9 “Opening an Existing User-defined Script or Dialog Box” on page 5-11 “Using DxDatabook Data Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow)” on page 5-11 “Using the Material / Process Editor” on page 5-12 “Performing Backups” on page 5-14 “Using File Viewer” on page 2-103. Select Tools > Layout Template Editor or click the Layout Templates icon Manager interface and the Layout Templates dialog box displays (Figure 5-1). Layout Templates Dialog Box in the Library The software provides two design templates (4 Layer Template and 8 Layer Template) that contain predefined configuration settings such as layer stackup. Figure 5-1. 5-2 Library Manager Process Guide. Gerber plot file definitions. Creating a New Design Template from an Existing Design File Creating a new design template from an existing design allows you to use the original board outline and job settings. consult online help. and so forth. net class information. EXP2005 SPac1 . trace spacings. as a starting point for the new template. edit. such as layer stackup. For additional information on managing layout templates. Gerber plot setup file. Note Consult online help for more information on creating and using Panel layout templates in a Fablink XE job. and delete templates associated with the active central library.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Using Layout Templates Note The Layout Templates icon is disabled when Library Manager is invoked from within Design Capture. and so forth. You can create new templates and copy. The following exercises illustrate how to create a new user-defined design template from an existing design file and how to copy an existing design layout template that appears in the Layout Templates dialog box. default clearances. and so forth. EXP2005 SPac1 5-3 . Using IBIS Software Note IBIS Librarian supports the Design Capture/DesignView-Expedition flow on Windows only. 1. trace spacings. Click No or Cancel and proceed to Expedition PCB. Note The software prompts you for a project file which is not required. IBIS is an industry standard format used to describe the behavior of inputs and outputs of active devices. Copying an Existing Design Layout Template You can copy an existing design layout template and use the existing board outline and job settings. Select the layout template and click the Edit Template icon to edit the file. 1. Click OK to copy the entire PCB layout directory structure into the following central library: . Click the New Template icon . Gerber plot setup file. Library Manager uses IBIS Librarian software which organizes and verifies device models for use in transmission line simulation by Signal Vision and Signal Analyzer software (available on Windows only).Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Using IBIS Software Tip: For Design type. 2. The models are then verified for compliance with the IBIS format prior to Library Manager Process Guide. Rename the template _1 that you copied to a new template name.. the software prompts you to browse for a source design file and define a new template name. and so forth. For DC/DV-Expedition flows that do not use Constraint Editor System™ (CES) software. as a starting point for the copied template. function.\central_library\layout templates 3. create a template from a design prior to running Forward Annotation in Expedition PCB. 2. IBIS Librarian facilitates organization of models by device vendor. The software copies the template directory structure and appends _1 to the new name. Otherwise. the net names and part data associated with the template will conflict with subsequent designs. technology. Select an existing Design layout template from the list and click the Copy Template icon. such as layer stackup. net class information. Select Tools > Visual IBIS Editor or click the icon access the software. For additional information on the IBIS Librarian software. The IBIS Librarian interface displays and provides the tools necessary to create and edit models. Since IBIS modeling software supports multiple product flows. It is not available in Library Manager using Linux or UNIX and is only available when Signal Analyzer and Signal Vision are used in flows that do not use CES software.2 of the IBIS Model specification. Note IBIS Librarian software operates on the Windows operating system. function. These limitations and rules apply when you use the Part Editor software (see “Using IBIS Functionality in Part Editor” on page 5-5) and Library Services (IBIS Models tab) in Library Manager (see “Using IBIS Functionality in Library Services” on page 5-6 for specific flow-based solutions). UNIX. Visual IBIS Editor software facilitates organization of models by device vendor. Invoking IBIS Librarian Select Tools > IBIS Librarian or click the icon in the Library Manager interface to access IBIS Librarian software. click online help within the applicable IBIS software interface. Library Manager uses Visual IBIS Editor software. The models are then verified for compliance with the IBIS format prior to simulation. Invoking Visual IBIS Editor Note Visual IBIS Editor (which supports both the DC/DV-Expedition and DxD-Expedition flow on all platforms) can store IBIS models anywhere on your machine (and are not controlled by Library Manager). A graphical viewer displays I/V curves for pulldown/pull up states and power/ground clamps as well as V/T curves for rising and falling edges. Note Visual IBIS Editor software operates on Windows.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Using IBIS Software simulation. See “Invoking Visual IBIS Editor” on page 5-4 for more information. in the Library Manager interface to 5-4 Library Manager Process Guide.1 of the IBIS Model specification. See “Invoking IBIS Librarian” on page 5-4 for more information. and Linux operating systems but only with Dx symbols. EXP2005 SPac1 . and so forth. there are some limitations and usage guidelines to consider when using the IBIS Models software. Visual IBIS Editor software supports Version 3. technology. For all flows that use CES software. IBIS Librarian software supports Version 2. Expedition PCB in CES Mode When invoking Library Manager from Expedition PCB in CES mode. click online help within the application interface. A list of IBIS models appears in the Available IBIS Models dialog box. If Library Manager is invoked in standalone mode. However. select Browse to find and display a list of IBIS models in the Available IBIS Models dialog box. Standalone Mode Note The Browse functionality in the Component Properties section is enabled for the DC/DVExpedition flow IBIS Librarian and becomes active if the Online Property Verification option is toggled On in the Verification pulldown menu. Expedition PCB in Non-CES Mode When invoking Library Manager from Expedition PCB in a non-CES mode.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Using IBIS Software For additional information on the Visual IBIS Editor software. the dialog box displays a valid list of IBIS models. If the central library has been used previously in a non-CES flow with Signal Analyzer or Signal Vision. Using IBIS Functionality in Part Editor Note Part Editor IBIS integration applies to the DC/DV-Expedition flow only IBIS software (IBIS Librarian). the software automatically enables the appropriate IBIS software tool. Use the Part Editor software to assign IBIS models to parts. If the Online Property Verification option is enabled in the Part Editor software. Note If Library Manager is invoked within Expedition PCB. the Browse feature is enabled and may display an empty list of IBIS models. This allows you to browse for/find IBIS models in the active central library. these models may not be adequate for use in ICX Pro Verify. reassign the proper IBIS models from the CES Parts tab. the Browse feature is enabled if you use Signal Analyzer or Signal Vision software. When invoking Library Manager in standalone mode. If IBIS models are not adequate. Library Manager Process Guide. the Browse feature does not work properly unless you use Signal Analyzer or Signal Vision in a non-CES mode. EXP2005 SPac1 5-5 . both IBIS model editors will be operational in the Library Manager interface. If you make modifications in the rotation views (for example. Library Services cannot process IBIS models that are later than Version 2. 90°. Place all graphics. See online help for each symbol editor for information on that specific software application. Expedition PCB in CES Mode When using Library Manager invoked from Expedition PCB in CES mode. Using Symbol Editor for DC/DV Symbols Note Symbol editing environments are different for the DC/DV-Expedition flow and DxDesigner-Expedition flow.1 from/to partitions in a central library or copy and move IBIS models from one central library to another. Use Library Services to move IBIS models within a central library from one partition to another or import IBIS models from other Expedition PCB jobs or other ASCII IBIS files. and text in Composite view and (if desired) modify the position and rotation of text properties in the eight rotation views. Use symbol editing software to open multiple libraries and edit multiple symbols during a single session. Each symbol window contains tabs along the bottom which represent the composite view of the symbol and the eight available rotations to build for a symbol (0°. EXP2005 SPac1 . pins. the IBIS Models tab in Library Services allows you to copy and move IBIS models in Version 2. views other than the Composite view). Since the DC/DV-Expedition flow is only supported on Windows. the IBIS Models tab in Library Services is available but is only functional if you plan to use Signal Analyzer or Signal Vision in a nonCES flow. 270° and the mirrors for each). the IBIS Models tab in Library Services is disabled.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Using Symbol Editor for DC/DV Symbols Using IBIS Functionality in Library Services Note Library Services only supports DC/DV-Expedition flow IBIS Librarian models. the Composite view reflects the text position and rotation in the 0° view. Standalone Mode When using Library Manager in standalone mode. the IBIS Models tab in Library Services is disabled on UNIX/Linux.1. Symbol editing software in the DC/DV-Expedition and DxD-Expedition flow is a separate editing environment used to create and edit symbols. 5-6 Library Manager Process Guide. Expedition PCB in Non-CES Mode When using Library Manager invoked from Expedition PCB in non-CES mode. 180°. The file name extension of a symbol library is . Using Padstack Editor The Padstack Editor provides tools to create and edit padstacks. The library files are binary compatible across all supported hardware platforms and operating systems. to create and edit symbols for use in the DxD-Expedition flow. available from the Library Manager interface. To edit an existing symbol. All details of symbol creation also apply to modification. open an existing library or create a new one. To create a new symbol. Each padstack is one of the following types: • • • • • • • Fiducial Mounting Hole Pin-SMD Pin-Through Shearing hole Tooling hole Via Library Manager Process Guide. This symbol editor software eliminates the need for you to invoke and configure DxDesigner to create and edit DxD symbols. Dx Symbol Editor provides the tools you need to create a Dx symbol and edit an existing symbol. EXP2005 SPac1 5-7 . only the latest version is editable in the Symbol Editor.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Using Symbol Editor for DxD Symbols Symbols are stored in library files (also referred to as partitions). Symbols are identified within a library by symbol name and internal time stamp. Using Symbol Editor for DxD Symbols Use Dx Symbol Editor.1> extension. however. All DxD symbols created by the symbol editor have a <symbol name. The software creates a new version each time the symbol is saved. Consult online help within the symbol editing software you are using for more information. simply browse for and open the existing library containing the symbol and then doubleclick on the symbol name to open the symbol for editing. Tabs at the top of the symbol workspace area allow you to have multiple symbols open for editing at the same time.slb. See “Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-36 for procedures on using DxD Symbol Editor. These symbols are saved within the central library directory structure (SymbolLibs directory). Each library can contain multiple versions of each symbol. Using Library PDF Documenter Use the Library PDF Documenter dialog box to generate a customized PDF document containing a listing of selected layers (system. define pads to use within stacks. Figure 5-2.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Using Library PDF Documenter Assign one of the padstack types to the padstack. specify pad filters. define holes. Select File > Output PDF to invoke the Library PDF Documenter within Library Manager (Figure 5-2). Tip: You can also invoke and use the Padstack Editor from the Padstacks node in the project workspace. Library PDF Documenter Dialog Box 5-8 Library Manager Process Guide. assign different pads to padstack layers. part and symbol information and graphics that are present within the central library partitions. the Padstack Editor dialog box displays. See “Creating a Surface Mount Padstack” on page 2-55 for more information. Once defined and named. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click the Padstack Editor icon on the Library Manager interface or click Tools > Padstack Editor. user) with cell items. and define any custom pads or drill symbols. The Padstack Editor dialog box appears. Right-click on the Padstacks node and select New Padstack from the popup menu. Linux On Linux systems. The default file name is the <central_library_name>. you can set custom parameters and save these to either a new or overwrite an existing PDF file. Use scripting to automate time-consuming. This command invokes the Select Script Language dialog box which allow you to choose what programming language to use (Java or VisualBasic). Use the Other Options tab to enter header and footer information (created by and created for) to personalize the PDF document. A script is a series of automation instructions that you group together as a single command to accomplish a task automatically. The options selected on the Library PDF Documenter dialog box are saved in the file libpdf. After you have loaded an existing central library. Consult online help associated with the Library PDF Documenter for more information. Creating a User-defined Script or Dialog Box Select File > New Script Form to create your own customer scripts and dialog boxes and add them to the Library Management user interface. You can edit the output directory and PDF file name to fit your needs. The software writes the PDF file to the Output directory of the active job (design). repetitive operations.cfg file are automatically displayed on the dialog if the dialog box has been run at least once. Scripts can be self-contained.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Creating a User-defined Script or Dialog Box UNIX On UNIX systems. This ensures that the Acrobat Reader invokes on the PDF file created by Library PDF Documenter. This ensures that the Acrobat Reader invokes on the PDF file created by Library PDF Documenter.cfg in the Config directory of the job where the central library (.pdf. set the ACRO_HOME variable to the directory where the Acrobat Reader executable resides. such as design navigation aids and web browsing add-ins. EXP2005 SPac1 5-9 . custom commands or you can write script Library Manager Process Guide. Scripts can also provide new functionality. The options from the libpdf. default values display.lmc) file is located. You can run scripts automatically when you start running application software or opening them within an application. Use the Cell tab to select the system and user-defined layers on which you require information. set the EPD_ACROREAD_BIN variable to the directory where the Acrobat Reader executable resides. See “Subdirectories and Files Created by Library Manager” on page 2-6 for more information. Otherwise. Scripts can contain many subroutines or functions. forms remain open (and running) until you switch to Edit mode or close the form. Scripts do not wait for events so event handlers only apply in the context of forms (dialog boxes). Select either VBScript or JScript from the Form Language pulldown and click OK. EXP2005 SPac1 . 4. 5. the Select Script Language dialog box appears (Figure 5-3). Click File > Save to save the form and associated script. 3. Design your form by dragging objects from the toolbox and defining their properties as needed. Click File > New Script Form. When invoked. To create a new form: 1. Select Script Language Dialog Box 2. you must include the appropriate script code as part of the form. Note See “Library Manager Automation Scripting” on page G-1 for specific information on automation scripting. Scripts by themselves run and then exit immediately. The Form Editor appears.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Creating a User-defined Script or Dialog Box code to be executed through forms (dialog boxes). Switch to the Script View (click View Script in the Standard toolbar) and write the script code (event handlers) for each object. 5-10 Library Manager Process Guide. Figure 5-3. If you want a particular subroutine to run in response to an event. Add. Use DxDatabook Data Editor in the following ways: • • Search for parametric data entries in a database and receive a list of objects that meet the criteria you specify. Select. Library Manager Process Guide. To open an existing form: 1. The form executes. To stop the form. Using DxDatabook Data Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow) DxDatabook provides component search. To edit the form. For more information on using DxDatabook in the DxD-Expedition flow. Select File > Open Script Form. edit. click the Stop icon on the Standard toolbar. You can open an existing form to run it and to edit it from within an application. EXP2005 SPac1 5-11 . selection. drag and drop objects from the Object bar or click the View Script icon on the Standard toolbar to edit the code. or browse to the . and verification capabilities from databases located anywhere on the Internet or on your company's intranet. type. see “Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager” on page D-1 and the DxDataBook User’s Guide. It accelerates the design entry stage of PCB designs by adding parametric data to a DxD-Expedition flow schematic using an interactive library management system.efm file you want to open and click Open. and/or remove attributes to an existing object.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Opening an Existing User-defined Script or Dialog Box Opening an Existing User-defined Script or Dialog Box Select File > Open Script Form to open and edit your own customer scripts and dialog boxes associated with the Library Management software. 2. Note These scripts and dialog boxes are created using the New Script Form dialog box and can be written in Java or VisualBasic (see “Creating a User-defined Script or Dialog Box” on page 5-9. Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Using the Material / Process Editor Using the Material / Process Editor To design with embedded passives. conductors. a number of material properties must be defined. Figure 5-4. capacitors. and inductors). and resistors). When materials and processes are created using the Material / Process Editor. use Library Services to create and modify the local libraries and import material and process information from external sources. the data is stored in the MaterialDBLibs directory within the active central library (see “Subdirectories and Files Created by Library Manager” on page 2-6). Each process has three subcategories: • • • Additive Resistors Subtractive Resistors Capacitors Subcategories in the tree view cannot be altered and are the same for all processes (Figure 5-4). Managing Processes To effectively use the available materials in a design flow (for example. An embedded passive is built into the product and is a device that does not add energy to the signal it passes (for example: resistors. Tip: To limit the number of materials and processes within the Cell or Layout Editor. processes must be defined to use the available materials in a design flow Use the Material / Process Editor user interface to create and modify the process properties associated with the materials used in the central library. capacitors. a process is defined via the Material / Process Editor. Material / Process Editor (Processes Node) 5-12 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . In addition. insulators. When importing processes in ASCII via Library Services.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Using the Material / Process Editor Use Library Services to copy processes between central libraries and designs. Materials The Material properties are grouped for common properties and properties relevant to the following types of materials (Figure 5-5): • • • • Capacitors Conductors Inductors Resistors Figure 5-5. consult online help associated with the Material / Process Editor. processes can be copied from the central library to the design and processes can be exported from the design to ASCII. Material / Process Editor (Materials Node) Use the right mouse button popup menu commands to add new materials to the materials / process data that is stored in your central library. all required parameters must be present or the process will fail. For more information. EXP2005 SPac1 5-13 . you can copy processes from one central library to another central library and/or imported/exported to/from the central library via ASCII. Library Manager Process Guide. When invoking Library Services within Library Manager. Note When invoked from Library Services from within Expedition PCB. EXP2005 SPac1 . Do not use the following keyboard characters: • • • • \ (forward slash) ( (open parenthesis) ) (closed parenthesis) ! (exclamation or “bang”) Performing Backups Perform a nightly backup of your central library and all associated files and directories. Contact your system administrator for information on performing backups.Using Other Tools and Library Manager Utilities Performing Backups The name of the material must be unique within the library and is limited to a maximum of 80 characters. 5-14 Library Manager Process Guide. Use alphanumeric characters when creating materials. Information should be stored on a designated backup system or another machine with sufficient disk space. This ensures that all data is preserved in the event of a disk drive failure or if the data becomes corrupted. Use the DxDesigner/Library Manager Library Migration Wizard to add existing DxDesigner symbol libraries to a new or existing central library. click Start > Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > DxDesigner-Expedition Flow> Data and Library Management > DxD to Library Manager Migration Wizard to invoke the migration wizard software. The library created by the Library Manager is called a central library and integrates symbols. If you encounter problems. cells. IBIS models. Library Manager Process Guide. part data.lmc file.lmc) file or create a new central library and add DxD symbol libraries. centralized environment.Appendix A DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards Introduction This appendix provides information and procedures for using two workflow wizards associated with Library Manager using the DxD-Expedition flow: • • DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard “DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard” on page A-14 If you are using Library Manager for the DC/DV-Expedition flow. EXP2005 SPac1 A-1 . Invoking the Migration Wizard On Windows. and layout templates under a single directory structure. DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Library Manager software combines library editors and utilities used by Mentor Graphics into a single. and type DxDLMCWizard. padstacks. ignore this appendix. ensure the directory is set to $SDD_HOME/common/linux/bin. Note The migration wizard is case-sensitive on Linux and UNIX and operates on directories with lowercase syntax. check the symbol library (sym) directory and rename the directory using lowercase syntax. The software creates a <central_library_name>. This displays the DxDesigner/Library Manager Library Migration Wizard dialog box which allows you to add DxD symbol libraries to an existing central library (*. On Linux and UNIX. open a terminal window. the software creates a new central library file in the location you specify. The Select a new Central Library directory dialog box displays. Creating a New Central Library 1. • As you add DxD symbol libraries to a central library. Selecting or Creating a Target Central Library Use this dialog box to perform one of the following actions: • Create a New Central Library .DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Specifying a Target Central Library Before migrating DxD symbols. Figure A-1. A-2 Library Manager Process Guide. Library Manager maintains information on what library paths were used to create each central library symbol partition. Use an Existing Central Library . The central library filename matches the directory name where it resides. you must specify a central library that will receive the symbol libraries (Figure A-1).txt file in the SymbolLibs subdirectory of the central library. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click the Create a New Central Library radio button and either key in the full path of the directory where the new central library will reside or click Browse to select or create the destination folder for the central library. This information is stored in the DxDMigrationMap.the software accesses an existing central library. The Select a Central Library database file to open dialog box displays.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard 2.lmc) file. select the central library (*. EXP2005 SPac1 A-3 . Click Next to display the next dialog box which provides tools to add DxD symbol libraries to the central library file. and click OK. The software creates a new central library (*. The software provides three methods to add symbol libraries to the central library: • • • Specifying a List of Symbol Libraries Searching for Symbol Libraries in a Specified Directory Searching DxD Projects for Symbol Libraries Selecting a Migration Method The software provides three methods to add symbol libraries to the central library (as shown in Figure A-2): Library Manager Process Guide.lmc 3. 3. For example: <drive>:\MyNewDxCL\MyNewDxCL. Browse to a directory where the central library resides. Click Next to display the next dialog box which provides tools to add DxD symbol libraries to the central library file. Browse to a directory that will contain the new central library and click OK. Click the Use an Existing Central Library radio button and either key in the full path of the directory where the central library resides or click Browse to select the central library (*. Using an Existing Central Library 1. 2.lmc) file.lmc) file using the name of the directory you selected. wir and pkt) in these directories to the corresponding symbol partition(s) in the central library.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Figure A-2. The migration wizard reads the directories in the list. Specifying a List of Directories to be Searched for Central Libraries . Selecting a Migration Method • Specifying a List of Symbol Libraries . • • Select the migration method from the dialog box and click Next to proceed with the migration wizard. Specifying a List of Projects to be Searched for Symbol Libraries . The migration wizard verifies that the specified folder(s) are valid DxD symbol library folders and. EXP2005 SPac1 . migrates the symbols in these directories to a symbol partition of the same name in the central library. A-4 Library Manager Process Guide. searches for valid DxD Symbol library folder. This dialog box reads the DxDesigner project.lst file and displays the names and paths to these projects. if so. and migrates all symbol library files (including sym.Use this option to specify a list of directories that the wizard queries for symbol libraries. sch.Use this option to specify a list of defined DxD symbol libraries that the wizard will migrate to the selected central library.Use this option to select DxDesigner projects that contain symbol libraries that you want to migrate to a central library. EXP2005 SPac1 A-5 . verifies that the specified folder(s) are valid DxD symbol library folders. Library Manager Process Guide. 2. Specifying a List of Symbol Libraries to Migrate Use this dialog box to specify a list of defined DxD symbol library directories that the wizard will migrate to the selected central library. These symbol library folder and files appear in the SymbolLibs directory in the central library structure. Figure A-3. Click Add/Create to enter the full directory path to directories that contain symbol libraries you want to migrate. wir and pkt) in these directories to the corresponding symbol partition(s) in the central library. Repeat Step 1 to add additional symbol library directory paths. Use Delete to remove any directory path you specified earlier in the dialog box. sch. and migrates all symbol library files (including sym. You can also browse for the appropriate directory on your machine. The migration wizard reads the directories in the list. 1.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Specifying a List of Symbol Libraries The dialog box in Figure A-3 appears when you select the Specifying a List of Symbol Libraries radio button in the migration wizard and click Next. A-6 Library Manager Process Guide.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Tip: Use the Move Up and Move Down icons to reorder the list of directories in the dialog box. the dialog box (Figure A-4) displays the full directory path to all symbol libraries within the directory you queried. Highlight any entry in the Symbol Library Directory list and browse for a different symbol library directory. This increases the speed and efficiency of searches. By putting a frequently used partition at the top of the Symbol Library Directories list. Click Next. EXP2005 SPac1 . Figure A-4. Confirming Symbol Libraries to Migrate 4. the software displays an error. The order of symbol library directories you specify in the dialog box affects the partition search path scheme for symbol libraries in that partition. Click OK and the software removes the errant entry from the list. Note If you select a path that does not include DxD symbols. Use Add and/or Delete to edit the list of symbol libraries in the dialog box. 3. The partition name associated with each symbol library also displays. the software automatically searches that partition first during a search. txt file assumes the symbol libraries remain in the referenced central library and does not track symbol libraries once they are migrated to the central library. To invoke this command in DxD-Expedition Library Manager. the software records the transaction in the DxDMigrationMap.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Tip: You can also edit the partition name in the dialog box to place the symbol and associated files in a user-specified partition in an existing central library. highlight the symbol partition in the navigation tree. EXP2005 SPac1 A-7 . The DxDMigrationMap. However. if you delete these symbol partitions from the central library (for example. you can run the migration wizard again to migrate these symbols. Click Finish. using Library Services in Library Manager) and attempt to migrate the same DxD symbol libraries using the wizard.txt file in the SymbolLibs directory which records the symbol libraries that have been migrated. Library Manager Process Guide. The software also creates a migration. and select the DxDesigner symbols to import. Once these errant symbols are corrected. Searching for Symbol Libraries in a Specified Directory The dialog box in Figure A-5 appears when you select the Specifying a List of Directories to be searched for Symbol LIbraries radio button from the migration wizard and click Next. Note Once you import DxD symbols into a central library using the Library Migration Wizard.txt file. use the Import Symbol command from the popup menu to import these symbols. select Import Symbol.log file in each newly created symbol partition folder identifies the symbols migrated to a central library. The software creates the DxDMigrationMap. To work around this problem. Click No to exit the migration wizard. Would you like to run it again? Note Problematic DxDesigner symbols are not migrated by the wizard and the software generates errors. right click the mouse. Click Yes to repeat the migration process. 6. the wizard continues to migrate valid DxD symbols and adds them to the selected central library.log file in the newly created symbol partition folder to identify the symbols that have been successfully migrated. The following message appears: The Migration Wizard completed. However. the software generates errors. the software migrates all symbol libraries in the directories you specified in the dialog box. The migration. 5. The migration wizard reads the directories in the list and searches the specified folders for DxD symbol library folders. Searching for Symbol Libraries in a Directory Use this option when you are unsure of the exact path of the DxD Symbol Libraries. A-8 Library Manager Process Guide. However. then the software issues an error message. Repeat Step 1 to add additional directory paths. if no DxD symbol libraries are found in the specified folder(s). Click Add/Create to enter the full path to a directory that you want to search for symbol libraries. Use Delete to remove any directory path you specified earlier in the dialog box. 1.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Figure A-5. 3. 2. the dialog box (see Figure A-6) displays the full directory path to all DxD symbol libraries within the directory you queried. You can also browse for the appropriate directory on your machine. The partition name associated with each symbol library also displays. EXP2005 SPac1 . You can specify a parent folder and the Wizard can then search for symbol libraries to any arbitrary subdirectory depth. The DxD symbol library found in these folders are then listed on the next page of the wizard. Click Next. txt file in the SymbolLibs directory which records the symbol libraries that have been migrated. 5. Confirming Directories with Symbol Libraries to Migrate 4. The following message appears: The Migration Wizard completed. Would you like to run it again? Library Manager Process Guide. Figure A-6. This is useful when you want to have a different partition name than the one displayed.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Tip: You can edit the Partition name for any partition in the list. This can occur when library names collide. the software reads symbol libraries in the directories you specify and migrates them into partitions in the SymbolLibs directory within the central library. The software creates the DxDMigrationMap. Use the Add and Delete icons to edit the list of symbol libraries in the dialog box. EXP2005 SPac1 A-9 . Click Finish. Highlight any entry in the Symbol Library Directory list and browse for a different symbol library directory. txt file assumes the symbol libraries remain in the referenced central library and does not track symbol libraries once they are migrated to the central library. using Library Services in Library Manager) and attempt to migrate the same DxD symbol libraries using the wizard. if you delete these symbol partitions from the central library (for example. Click No to exit the migration wizard. the software generates errors. To invoke this command in DxD-Expedition Library Manager. and select the DxD symbols to import.log file in each newly created symbol partition folder identifies the symbols migrated to a central library. However. A-10 Library Manager Process Guide. However. select Import Symbol. the wizard continues to migrate valid DxD symbols and adds them to the selected central library. Searching DxD Projects for Symbol Libraries The dialog box in Figure A-7 appears when you select the Specifying a List of Projects (*. To work around this problem.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Problematic DxDesigner symbols are not migrated by the wizard and the software generates errors. Once these errant symbols are corrected. Note Once you import DxD symbols into a central library using the Library Migration Wizard. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click Yes to repeat the migration process. the software records the transaction in the DxDMigrationMap. The migration. right click the mouse. highlight the symbol partition in the navigation tree.txt file. you can run the migration wizard again to migrate these symbols. 6. use the Import Symbol command from the popup menu to import these symbols.dproj files) to be searched for Symbol Libraries radio button from the migration wizard. The DxDMigrationMap. partitions. Library Manager Process Guide. Searching DxD Projects for Symbol Libraries Use this dialog box to select DxDesigner projects that contain symbol libraries that you want to migrate to a central library. Select the appropriate projects from the Project list (using check boxes). Click Next. 2.lst file and displays the names and paths to these projects. the dialog box displays a list of symbol library directories. EXP2005 SPac1 A-11 .DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Figure A-7. This dialog box reads the DxDesigner project. The dialog box specifies the location of the projects that can be searched for symbol libraries to be added to the central library. The software uses the name in the Partition column when migrating symbols to the central library data structure. and aliases (Figure A-8). 1. the software reads symbol libraries associated with the DxD project files you specify and migrates them into partitions in the SymbolLibs directory within the central library. The following message appears: The Migration Wizard completed. These partition names will be written to the SymboLibs directory of the target central library. The migration. 5. Click Finish. Click Yes to repeat the migration process. 4. the wizard continues to migrate valid DxD symbols and adds them to the selected central library. A-12 Library Manager Process Guide. Click No to exit the migration wizard. Once these errant symbols are corrected. The software creates the DxDMigrationMap.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Figure A-8.txt file in the SymbolLibs directory which records the symbol libraries that have been migrated. Edit the Partition names as necessary before proceeding with the migration. you can run the migration wizard again to migrate these symbols.log file in each newly created symbol partition folder identifies the symbols migrated to a central library. Confirming DxD Projects to Migrate 3. However. EXP2005 SPac1 . Would you like to run it again? Problematic DxD symbols are not migrated by the wizard and the software generates errors. Library Manager Process Guide. or DxDesigner projects with symbol libraries before the migration wizard invokes. if you delete these symbol partitions from the central library (for example. Open properties on the newly added component to determine the new alias. Confirming Migration Libraries Use this information only dialog box to view a list of symbol libraries. Click Finish. Perform the following steps: 1. highlight the symbol partition in the navigation tree. The DxDMigrationMap. Use the altran utility to change the alias in a design. This also occurs using symbol libraries within DxD projects.txt file. Close the schematic without saving changes. Use the comp command with the symbol name only to find and add the named symbol. ePD2004 provides a procedure via the Altran command line utility to update the library aliases on their DxD schematic instances (after the symbols have been moved from one partition to other). DxD schematics have missing components on the schematic (highlighted by a box in place of the symbols on the schematic). the software records the transaction in the DxDMigrationMap. the software generates errors. 4. (note the old alias). However. using Library Services in Library Manager) and attempt to migrate the same DxD symbol libraries using the wizard.txt file assumes the symbol libraries remain in the referenced central library and does not track symbol libraries once they are migrated to the central library. select Import Symbol. the software displays messages to inform you of the results of the wizard. Moving Migrated Symbols to a Different Central Library Partition If you move migrated DxDesigner symbols from one symbol partition to another in a central library. Open schematic and note ViewBase errors in Output Log Window and empty white boxes where the component should be. use the Import Symbol command from the popup menu to import these symbols. To invoke this command in DxD-Expedition Library Manager.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard Note Once you import DxD symbols into a central library using the Library Migration Wizard. If you find discrepancies or errors. 3. click Back to return to the appropriate page in the migration wizard or make appropriate edits on this page. 2. To work around this problem. directories of symbol libraries. You must provide the command line parameters for both the old and new alias before running altran because there is no feature to automatically find the new alias. and select the DxD symbols to import. right click the mouse. Therefore. EXP2005 SPac1 A-13 . open a terminal window. Then. For information on using the Altran utility in DxDesigner. click Start > Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > DxDesigner-Expedition Flow> Translators and 3rd Party Interfaces > Project Translation Wizard to invoke the DxD Project Translation Wizard. centralized environment. See “DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard” on page A-1 for more information. run this Wizard (the DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard) to point these migrated DxD projects and their symbol libraries to the central library created by the Project Translation Wizard. On Linux. use the DxD Library Migration Wizard on DxD projects to migrate symbol libraries in selected projects into a central library. you must open the project in DxDesigner and translate it. part data. A-14 Library Manager Process Guide. Note The list of DxDesigner projects eligible to translate is generated from the project. and layout templates under a single directory structure.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard 5. ensure the directory is set to $SDD_HOME/common/linux/bin. Before invoking the DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard. and type PFProjWizard. EXP2005 SPac1 . Use altran with the correct old and new alias's to fix the design. Selecting DxD Projects to Translate Use the dialog box in Figure A-9 to select DxDesigner projects that will be upgraded to use the central library data model.lst file in the %WDIR%\vf directory. The Wizard displays the DxDesigner/Library Manager Project Translation Wizard dialog box which allows you to select DxDesigner projects to translate. The library created by the Library Manager is called a central library and integrates symbols. The software creates a <central_library_name>.lmc file. DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard Library Manager software combines library editors and utilities used by Mentor Graphics CAD and CAE tools into a single. To add a project to this list. padstacks. cells. See “Using IBIS Software” on page 5-3 for more information on IBIS software. IBIS models. Invoking the DxD Project Translation Wizard On Windows. see the DxDesigner online help and related documentation. txt file remain in the project as local libraries.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard Figure A-9. Upon completion.dproj) file to include information on central library references.txt file in the <Central_Library_Folder>/SymbolLibs directory. The DxD Project Translation Wizard reads the DxDesigner project (*. If the project already references a central library. The DxD Project Translation Wizard displays these local libraries so you can confirm that you want them to remain as local libraries or determine if they need to be translated. Library Manager Process Guide. the software displays the next Project Translation Wizard dialog box which allows you to browse for or select a central library. Note The original DxD Symbol Libraries remain in the current location and can be used until each project is translated.dproj) file to determine if the project already references a central library. Any libraries that the DxD project uses that are not specified in the DxDMigrationMap. the Migration Wizard creates/updates the DxDMigrationMap. Otherwise. EXP2005 SPac1 A-15 . the Wizard updates the DxDesigner project (*. Select DxDesigner Projects to Translate As you add DxD symbol libraries to the central library using the Library Migration Wizard.txt file stores the directory path from where the library was copied and the directory path where it is stored in the central library. The DxDMigrationMap. the software generates an error message. there may be symbols missing from the central library partition because some extra symbols were added to the local libraries after migration or some symbols were deleted by the librarian from the central library partitions). A-16 Library Manager Process Guide. 2. Select the DxD projects to upgrade to use the central library data model.ini file. The DxD Project Translation Wizard compares the library list in the DxDMigrationMap. If the project (*. You can select multiple projects if you want all of them to use the same central library 3.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard Specifying DxDesigner Projects to Translate 1. Invoke the Import Symbol popup command by selecting a symbol partition in the Project Navigator Tree. If some symbols are missing from the central library symbol partition and you are using (or want to use) those symbols in the design. A DC/DV-Expedition central library also has a *. Selecting a Central Library The dialog box in Figure A-10 appears after you select project(s) from the list to update them to use a central library. The project translation wizard updates paths to the local DxD symbol libraries to point to the central library symbol partitions using the DxDMigrationMap. click the right mouse button. EXP2005 SPac1 . This list is generated from the project. Browse for or select a central library that contains migrated symbol libraries using the DxD to Library Manager Migration Wizard.txt file with the library paths in the ViewDraw. Note Do not select a DC/DV-Expedition central library. This instructs the software to leave path information to additional local libraries that don't exist in the central library. and import symbols using the dialog box. Click Next to specify the central library that contains the symbol libraries you migrated using the DxD to Library Manager Migration Wizard (see Figure A-10 on page A-17).lmc filename extension. use the Import Symbol popup command to import the missing symbols.lst file in the %WDIR%/vf directory.txt to compare the paths of the local libraries. Review the list of projects (displayed with associated directory paths in Figure A-9 on page A-15). Note Libraries are not compared on a symbol-to-symbol basis (in other words.dproj) file already references a central library. an error message displays. txt file in the Central Library directory (in the <Central_Library_Folder>/SymbolLibs/ directory) and determines the corresponding partition in the selected central library by comparing the paths in the ViewDraw.dproj) files for the projects selected to use the central library. The software also updates the DxD project to include the path to the central library. Invoke the Import Symbol popup command by selecting a symbol partition in the workspace tree. If some symbols are missing from the central library symbol partition and you are using (or want to use) those symbols in the design. The wizard adds the path of the central library to the project (. The software updates the DxD project (*. Library Manager Process Guide. The wizard dialog box disappears if no libraries are found in the projects that were not migrated. EXP2005 SPac1 A-17 . Note Libraries are not compared on a symbol-to-symbol basis (in other words. Aliases will also be maintained but will be updated to point to the symbol library location in the central library. The wizard reads the DxDMigrationMap. there may be symbols missing from the central library partition because some extra symbols were added to the local libraries after migration or some symbols were deleted by the librarian from the central library partitions). click the right mouse button. the path in ViewDraw. the DxD Project Translation Wizard displays a list of these libraries so that you can migrate them or continue to use them as local libraries. use the Import Symbol popup command to import the missing symbols.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard Figure A-10.txt.dproj) file. Specifying a Central Library Destination for Translated DxD Projects Click Next. Otherwise.txt. and import symbols using the dialog box. If the paths match.ini is updated with the path of the symbol partition from the DxDMigrationMap.ini for the project and the DxDMigrationMap. The order of libraries in the project will be maintained. ini file and displays a list of all non-translated symbol libraries in the dialog box. the software reads the ViewDraw. Viewing Local Libraries in DxD Projects (Not Translated to a Central Library) This dialog box displays the libraries listed in the project’s ViewDraw. Changing Symbol Library Permissions Once DxD projects are translated via the DxD Project Translation Wizard. Note that you are making the DxD symbol library as read-only or writable for a specific design only.DxD to Expedition Flow Wizards DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard Library paths can still be used in the DxD Project Editor. Note If you decide and add these missing libraries to the central library using the DxD Manager Migration Wizard. You are not changing the actual permissions of the symbol libraries.Design Roots entry. For example. Confirm that the libraries are included in the central library search path scheme and then invoke the Project Editor from the Project Navigation Tree . A-18 Library Manager Process Guide. the software displays a list of translated symbol libraries. Click Finish to dismiss the dialog box and exit the DxD Project Translation Wizard. These libraries remain as local libraries in the project.ini file for which no corresponding entry was found in DxDMigrationMap. those libraries that were not migrated to a central library using the DxD to Library Manager Migration Wizard).txt file (in other words. EXP2005 SPac1 . This resets the library paths for the project to include the central library symbol partitions as well as the project's local libraries. You can migrate them to a central library or continue to use them as local libraries. if you set the Search Order Scheme field to "Local to Project". If the Search Order Scheme filed is set to "Central Library Default". you can change the permission of the DxD symbol libraries used in the design according to the permission provided to you by the librarian for the corresponding symbol partitions. Symbol library permissions are managed by the librarian. then you must update the library paths manually to the central library symbol partition by invoking the Library Settings dialog box and changing the path. 2.Appendix B Using Design Architect with Expedition Tools Introduction This appendix provides information on the Expedition only flow (using Design Architect with Expedition tools. Execute Package software. Prerequisites To minimize the disruption of the existing DA/BA process. EXP2005 SPac1 B-1 . Using Package 1. Set the PCB Design Viewpoint and save. Exit Design Architect (DA) software. a copy of Package is required. Invoke Design Architect software. Creating a New Central Library. Library Manager Process Guide. The information in this appendix assumes you do not access design data via DMS. and Selecting a Flow Type” on page 2-2 for more information. Translating a DA Schematic to Expedition PCB Use the following steps to translate a Design Architect schematic to Expedition PCB: Using Design Architect 1. Also set the MGC_PKG_XINFO environment variable as follows: • MGC_PKG_XINFO=1 This enables PACKAGE to provide additional information to Expedition regarding heterogeneous components. See “Invoking Library Manager. We strongly recommend that you use DMS when processing designs from Design Architect through Expedition tools. such as Expedition PCB and Library Manager). 3. Enter a new project file (for example. Click OK to the central library message. Click No to the schematic message. Invoke Library Manager software. For more information on creating a new central library see “Invoking Library Manager. the symbol names used in Part Editor must use the DA “comp” property value. 2.prj). 4. 3. EXP2005 SPac1 . 3. 1. Select Check Build and ensure that no errors display. Cells (via the Cell Editor) . Save your work in Library Manager and exit the software. and Padstacks” on page 2-55 for more information).part name pin mapping (see “Creating Parts (Using Part Editor)” on page 2-74 for more information) Note When processing DA symbols using the Part Editor in Library Manager.Using Design Architect with Expedition Tools Translating a DA Schematic to Expedition PCB 2. Select Build and ensure no errors display. 3. B-2 Library Manager Process Guide. Create a new PCB job. Holes. Select the Expedition-only flow type from the dialog box. 4. demo. For example: comp_<part number> where: comp = the value of the comp property on the DA symbol part number = part number you are creating. The Library Manager interface displays.physical pads for footprints (see “Creating Pads. 2. Select Save (within Package) and exit Package software. and Selecting a Flow Type” on page 2-2. Browse for and select the central library. Create a new central library. Using the Expedition PCB Job Management Wizard 1. 5. Create entries for all the parts in the design: • • • Padstacks (via the Padstack Editor) . 4. Using Library Manager Note See “Using Library Manager” on page 2-1 for information on using Library Manager to create a new central library and to create entries for all the parts in your design. Creating a New Central Library.physical footprints (see “Creating Cells” on page 2-65 for more information) Parts via the Part Editor . select “Design Architect". Place all unplaced parts within the board outline. Save the PCB design. 7.pcb file. you must perform these steps.Using Design Architect with Expedition Tools Translating a DA Schematic to Expedition PCB 6. 7. 4. If necessary. 2. 10. Using DVE Use the following steps in DVE if DA and Expedition PCB are not loaded on the same machine. Select Place > Place Parts and Cells. 9. 4. Browse for and select the Design Architect Component directory. 8. Select Setup > Project Integration. 5.txt 3. Save the schematic and exit DVE. Select a PCB Layout Template. If the process is unsuccessful. Verify that changes from Expedition PCB are present in the schematic. Otherwise. 2. Set the PCB Design viewpoint. Run Back Annotate and verify that the process was successful. For Netlist. EXP2005 SPac1 B-3 . If necessary. Select Setup > Project Integration. select ECO > Renumber Ref Des. 1. 9. Using Expedition PCB 1. 3. For example. Library Manager Process Guide. Run Forward Annotate and verify that the process was successful. if you use Design Architect on a UNIX machine and Expedition PCB on a Windows machine. select Route > Swap > Gates. Run Import ASCII BA (Board Architect) and browse for the following: /<job_name>/expbackanno. 8. error messages display and provide information needed to run a successful back annotation. Complete the job creation. Open the new <project name>. 6. go to the next procedure. 3. Select Forward Annotate and verify that the process completed successfully. Select Check Build and verify there are no errors. 2. Using Expedition PCB 1. EXP2005 SPac1 . B-4 Library Manager Process Guide. Select Setup > Project Integration to display the dialog box. 2. perform the following steps in Packager and Expedition PCB: 1. 3. Save the design and exit Packager. Save the PCB design and exit Expedition PCB. Select Build and verify there were no errors.Using Design Architect with Expedition Tools Translating a DA Schematic to Expedition PCB Using Packager To complete the synchronization between Design Architect and Expedition PCB (ensuring that the data is synchronized). or Windows. The lmcwin2unix script traverses the directories of a specified central library and adjusts directory names to eliminate case-sensitivity problems that might occur on Linux and UNIX. See “Subdirectories and Files Created by Library Manager” on page 2-6 for information on the “sym” subdirectory. the central library can be opened in either Linux and UNIX operating systems. The lmcwin2unix script is located in the following directory and must be invoked from a command prompt: ${SDD_HOME}/common/linux/bin/lmcwin2unix Determine what Windows-based central libraries you want to access on Linux or UNIX before invoking the script. Tip: If you do not run the lmcwin2unix script prior to opening a central library originally created on Windows. For example. Be sure to note the directory where each central library resides. the lmcwin2unix script changes a directory named either “Sym” or “SYM” to “sym” (all lower-case text) to ensure operability on Linux and UNIX operating systems.Appendix C Upgrading Central Libraries for Linux and UNIX Use Introduction Note Information in this appendix applies only to Linux and UNIX operating system users who want to access and use central libraries created on Windows operating systems prior to SDD2004 SPac1. the selected central library can be accessed on either Linux. This appendix provides information on using the lmcwin2unix script. Therefore. After running this script. After running this script. which adjusts central libraries that were created on the Windows operating system prior to SDD2004 SPac1 for use on the Linux and UNIX operating systems. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 C-1 . the software may generate errors on Linux or UNIX. this information applies to DxDesigner-Expedition flow users only in this release. UNIX. 1. Note You can only specify one central library directory at a time. The software displays messages when a directory was renamed and how it was renamed. Open a terminal window on Linux or UNIX. The script adjusts the central library directories to resolve case-sensitivity issues. Example: $ lmcwin2unix /data/job1/centlibs/t1 3. 2.lmc) filename in the command line argument. Do not specify a central library (*. C-2 Library Manager Process Guide.lmc) file resides. The software accepts either full or relative directory paths. Example: Renaming /data/job1/centlibs/t1/SymbolLibs/Logic/Sym to /data/job1/centlibs/t1/SymbolLibs/Logic/sym Note Messages display only if the script resolved case-sensitivity issues within the selected central library directory. Key in the following at the prompt: lmcwin2unix <Central Library Directory> where lmcwin2unix is the script executable name and <Central Library Directory> is the directory where the selected central library (*. The central library is now ready for use on Linux. Press Enter. EXP2005 SPac1 . and Windows. UNIX.Upgrading Central Libraries for Linux and UNIX Use Using the Script Using the Script Use the following steps to invoke the lmcwin2unix script to eliminate case-sensitivity problems in a central library that might occur on Linux and UNIX: Note There is no dialog box or wizard associated with this script. dbc) File? The DxDatabook library structure is contained in the user configuration file (. This functionality is similar to Library Studio software. the software creates and uses the Company_Library. See “Adding a Table to a Library Configuration” on page D-15. See DxDesigner online help and documentation for additional details on DxDatabook addin. For example. EXP2005 SPac1 D-1 . Apart from the functionality of creating and editing the DxDatabook configuration file. set the . Note DxDatabook software is delivered with DxDesigner. if Company_Library. Library Manager Process Guide. To easily manage a . Use DxDatabook to instantiate symbols on the schematic.lmc is the central library.dbc file.dbc) File” on page D-8 for more detailed information on the DxDatabook user configuration file. The DxDatabook user configuration file name is same as the central library name and is stored in the same directory. The DxDatabook requires a configuration file which is created using library management tools (see What is a DxDatabook User Configuration (*.dbc) File?). See “Using a Configuration (*. place this file on a network file server and share it. library management software provides functionality to edit the underlying database containing the parametric data. Tip: To safeguard the configuration on a network file server. you can perform simple edits and changes to the parametric data database instead of invoking Library Studio software to complete the changes.dbc file). Use library management tools to create and edit a DxDatabook configuration file and perform simple edits to the underlying parametric data database using commands available from the workspace tree. however.Appendix D Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Library Management tools for the DxD-Expedition flow provides the capability to view and (on Windows) edit parametric data in a database.dbc file for multiple users.dbc file access permissions to read-only for all users. What is a DxDatabook User Configuration (*. However. the software automatically sets the appropriate Oracle environment variables. 9 & Linux REL3. Other versions of Oracle may work. you must copy the tnsnames. the software uses your Oracle Client software. Using the tnsnames.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Setting Environment Variables Setting Environment Variables When using DxDatabook Data Editor software with a central library.x World Wide Web server (WWW) ODBC Windows XP & 2000 Yes Yes* Yes HP11. you may have to set Oracle databaserelated environment variables.0 Yes Yes* No Yes Yes* No * Supported as Read Only.ora File (Oracle Client) If Oracle Client is not installed to your machine.ora file to the following directory: ${SDD_HOME}/common/${SDD_PLATFORM}/ORA_NLS If Oracle Client is installed to your machine (and the ORACLE_HOME environment variable is set correctly). Table D-1.i Yes Yes* No Solaris 8. however. Database Types Configurable via the Library Wizard Supported Database Types Oracle V9. EXP2005 SPac1 . D-2 Library Manager Process Guide.0 & 10 4. Using Parametric Databases on Supported Platforms DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager is certified using the database types and versions defined in Table D-1. For example. you may have to add or specify certain environment variables depending upon the operating system and/or the type of ODBC or Oracle database you are using. this version of software is certified based on the information in Table D-1.00 & 11. You can also import component information from a central library into a data source. While a database contains the actual component data. ** Supported as Read Only but requires DxWebPack.mdb file to a location that is accessible to all users. Oracle. Note If the database file is located on the network. Other data sources may work. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.i Yes** Yes** Yes** Yes** Solaris 8. Table D-2. ODBC Data Sources and Operating Systems Supported by DxDatabook Data Editor Supported Database Types MS SQL Server Excel MS Access Windows XP & 2000 Yes Yes* Yes HP11. copy the . 1. CSV delimited Yes* & Tab delimited * Supported as Read Only. utilities in the Control Panel window appear. you will create a Microsoft Access database on a Windows machine. however.0 & 11. if you are using a Microsoft Access database.0 Yes** Yes** Yes** Yes** Yes** Yes** Yes** Yes** Text. including Microsoft Access. Connecting to Parametric Databases You can integrate DxDatabook to a variety of databases formats.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Connecting to Parametric Databases Table D-2 lists certified ODBC data sources and operating systems supported by DxDatabook Data Editor. this version of software is certified on the data sources and operating systems listed in Table D-2. make sure that all users can access it. For example. 9 & Linux REL3. DxDatabook uses Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) and Oracle to connect to databases.0 & 10 4. and so on (see “Using Parametric Databases on Supported Platforms” on page D-2 for more information). Note In this exercise. EXP2005 SPac1 D-3 . a data source contains information needed by DxDatabook to locate and access the database. MS SQL Server. Creating an ODBC Data Source on Windows Use the following steps to create an ODBC Data Source connection to a parametric database. Library Manager Process Guide. Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating an ODBC Data Source on Windows 2. either remove the User DSN or change the name of the DSN you are adding. Click the System DSN tab and click Add. D-4 Library Manager Process Guide. ODBC Data Source Administrator Dialog Box 4. 5. the Create New Data Source dialog box appears (Figure D-2). View the User DSN tab and verify that your Data Source Name (DSN) is not already used for a User DSN. EXP2005 SPac1 . 3. Double-click Administrative Tools. Double-click Data Sources (ODBC) Administrator dialog box appears. Tip: If the DSN is already in use. and the ODBC Data Source Figure D-1. EXP2005 SPac1 D-5 .mdb) and click Finish. click Microsoft Access Driver (*. In this case. Library Manager Process Guide. Create New Source Dialog Box 6.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating an ODBC Data Source on Windows Figure D-2. The ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box appears (Figure D-3). Select the type of database connection you want to create (see Table D-2 on page D-3). Figure D-4.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating an ODBC Data Source on Windows Figure D-3. Key in the Data Source Name and the database description as shown in Figure D-4. ODBC Microsoft Access Setup Dialog Box 7. ODBC Microsoft Access Setup Dialog Box with Name and Description D-6 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . click Select in the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box (Figure D-4) and specify the .mdb file. For example: \\server1\D\data\dxdb\DxDBook.mdb 9. For example. which may be different with each user. Click OK.mdb file. Figure D-5. the \company_library directory is specified in the dialog box. the software creates the DxDBook. Create New Database Dialog Box If the database is to be accessed over a network.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating an ODBC Data Source on Windows 8. the software associates the selected database with the central library.mdb file in the Database Name field.mdb in the New Database dialog box. Type the UNC path to avoid potential problems for users who use different drive letters. You can create this in a user-defined folder within an existing central library or another location on your machine. click Create and key in DxDBook. in Figure D-5. To create a new . To select an existing database file.mdb file).mdb file to use. type the Universal Naming Convention (UNC) path to the .mdb file in the directory you specify. If you selected an existing database (. The ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box appears (see Figure D-6). Library Manager Process Guide. Browse yields a path containing a network drive letter. EXP2005 SPac1 D-7 . Tip: Avoid using Browse when defining the UNC path to the . For more information.dbc) File?” on page D-1.dbc) File Figure D-6. When using a .dbb file on a file server or an FTP site. see “What is a DxDatabook User Configuration (*.dbb file. which acts as an overlay of the . Tip: In this setup.dbc file. EXP2005 SPac1 . or do any personal customization to the DxDatabook configuration.dbc) File The user configuration file maps DxDatabook libraries to the component libraries.dbc) File for Multiple Users A read-only .Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Using a Configuration (*.dbc file centrally-located operates correctly if others do not need to add their own libraries. each user has a personal . use the DxDatabook Base Configuration file (.dbb file. D-8 Library Manager Process Guide.dbb file).dbb file. Each personal . Setting Up a Configuration (*. ODBC Data Source Administrator Dialog Box Using a Configuration (*. The libraries store data about components that you use in your design. If others need to use a centrally-defined DxDatabook configuration with the ability to add their own libraries.dbc file contains a link to the centrally-located . you can store the . See “Creating a New.lmc) file in the Library Navigator Tree. • Figure D-7. click the right mouse button. you are ready to edit parametric data using the new functionality available in DxDatabook. Use the following steps to create a new. The libraries store data about components that you use in your design. Creating a DxDatabook (*. EXP2005 SPac1 D-9 . Accessing Edit Databook Configuration Command in Library Manager Creating a New.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Use the Edit Databook Configuration command from the Navigator Tree popup menu in Library Manager to create a DxDatabook configuration (*. Highlight the active central library (*. Empty DxDatabook Configuration The user configuration file maps DxDatabook libraries to the component libraries. The New DxDatabook Configuration dialog box appears (Figure D-8). and select the Edit Databook Configuration command. DxWebPack is a way of centralizing the database functionality. Think of the .dbc). When you create a new database or select an existing database and configure an ODBC data source on Windows. Company_Library. Copy an existing configuration file and applies it to the active central library. Use the Edit Databook Configuration command to perform the following: • Create a user configuration file with the same name as the central library (for example. Library Manager Process Guide. Note If the configuration file already exists in the central library. Empty DxDatabook Configuration” on page D-9 for more information. empty DxDatabook configuration: 1.dbb file as a way of centralizing the administration of the DxDatabook Configuration.dbb file independently of the DxWebPack.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Implement the configuration scheme using a . the Configure dialog box displays (see Figure D-10 on page D-11).Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. See “Creating a New DxDatabook Configuration from an Existing Configuration” on page D-11 for more information.dbc) file (Figure D-7). Ensure the Create an Empty Configuration option is selected and click OK. 4. Figure D-9. Central Library Properties Dialog Box 3.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. EXP2005 SPac1 .dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Figure D-8. The software uses this information in the DxDatabook Configuration to determine what column in the DxDatabook table is equivalent to the Expedition part number. the Properties dialog box displays (see Figure D-9). the Configure dialog box displays (see Figure D-10). Click OK. New DxDatabook Configuration Dialog Box (Create an Empty Configuration) 2. D-10 Library Manager Process Guide. Enter a value in the Symbol Attribute for PDB Part Number field to define which DxDesigner attribute is equivalent to an Expedition part number. EXP2005 SPac1 D-11 . click the right mouse button. 5.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Figure D-10. click OK. The right pane shows detailed information about the selected library. Library Manager Process Guide. 1. The software writes the new configuration file to the same location as the active central library and retains the same file name as the active central library. The software automatically renames the DxDatabook configuration file to match the central library file name. Creating a New DxDatabook Configuration from an Existing Configuration Use the Copy an Existing Configuration option to copy an existing DxDatabook configuration (*. Once you add component libraries using the Configure dialog box.dbc) file to the central library directory.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*.lmc) file in the Library Navigator Tree. and shows the tables contained in each library. Configure DxDatabook Database Dialog Box The left pane displays the component libraries in a tree structure. The New DxDatabook Configuration dialog box appears (Figure D-11). Highlight the active central library (*. and select the Edit Databook Configuration command. dbc) file and click Open.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. 3. The software writes the new configuration file to the same location as the central library and retains the same name as the central library. click OK. Adding Component Libraries to the Configuration (*. the Open dialog box appears and prompts you to browse for a Databook configuration (*. Enter a value in the Symbol Attribute for PDB Part Number field to define which DxDesigner attribute is equivalent to an Expedition part number. New DxDatabook Configuration Dialog Box (Copy an Existing Configuration) 2. 6.dbc) file. Select the applicable configuration (*. Use the Add Library dialog box to: • • Add a component library to the current configuration (*.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Figure D-11. EXP2005 SPac1 . Click OK. Ensure the Copy and Existing Configuration option is selected and click OK. 5. The Configure DxDatabook Database Dialog Box appears (see Figure D-10 on page D-11).dbc) file Edit properties for a selected library D-12 Library Manager Process Guide. The Central Library Properties dialog box appears (see Figure D-9 on page D-10). 4.dbc) File Note Using the Add Library command is NOT a required step if the Configure dialog box (Figure D-10) already added the Libraries based on the Library Manager Part partition names. Once you add component libraries using the Configure dialog box. The software uses this information in the DxDatabook Configuration to determine what column in the DxDatabook table is equivalent to the Expedition part number. EXP2005 SPac1 D-13 . Add Library Dialog Box 2. the library you specify must be the same as the Part partition in the central library. if your database does not have a field that contains the symbol name. Figure D-12. 1. The library name is case-insensitive. The tables within a component library may be from the same or different relational databases. all capacitors could share a component library. type Capacitors in the Library Name field (Figure D-12). As an example. In the Symbol Expression text input field. Library Manager Process Guide.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Component Libraries group together multiple tables containing the same types of parts. Click Add Library to display the Add Library box. Since the software associates the component library with the part partition. For example.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. type a symbol expression to specify the legal symbols for the entire library. Vertically linked tables provide a single search interface for similar components stored in multiple tables. and there is no symbol field in the database that shares the same generic symbol. consult online help.1. 3. Library Added to Component Libraries List Note Settings in the Symbol and Preferences tabs affect how components are placed on the schematic using the configuration file.This option links tables vertically and accesses components that span multiple tables.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) For example. capv*. but use the attributes in one table. For more information.This option links tables horizontally and accesses one component with attributes that span multiple tables. Horizontally linked tables join disparate information about the same set of components so you have access to all the information you need. cap*. and it is specified as “Symbol” in the configuration file. if you have a capacitor library. EXP2005 SPac1 . 6. 5. Click Choose Link Table to select the table to which you want to link. Tables Joined Horizontally . Tip: Steps 4 and 5 are used primarily for databases that do not have join capabilities. • When you select the Tables Joined Horizontally option. the Choose Link Table button and the Join Type options are enabled. caph*. The database name is displayed and the table name to which you have linked underneath Choose Link Table. the Capacitors library is added to the list of Component Libraries (Figure D-13). D-14 Library Manager Process Guide. Select one of the two options: • Tables Joined Vertically . Click OK. 4. (Optional) Click Advanced to specify how you want to link tables in the library. If there is a symbol field in your database. see “Adding a Table to a Library Configuration” on page D-15. For more information. The settings in these tabs are stored in the configuration file. you may set this field to any of the following values: cap. leave this field empty. Figure D-13. Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Adding a Table to a Library Configuration Use the Add Table command (available from the dialog box or right-click a table entry in the dialog box and click Insert Table from the popup menu) to add parametric tables to the selected library. If no entries appear in the Data Source (DSN) dropdown box. Similarly. EXP2005 SPac1 D-15 . Use a DxDatabook or an Access query to link these tables together. in Microsoft Access. the dialog box appears (Figure D-14). Click Add Table (or Insert Table from the popup menu). 2. Library Manager Process Guide. Use database joins to link together tables of disparate information. This allows you to select data sources from the list to populate the Data Source (DSN) dropdown box in the Add Table dialog box (Figure D-15). From the Libraries tab (under Component Libraries). 1. A table refers to an actual database table that stores parametric data. a library can contain several tables. Figure D-14. For example. click New to invoke the Data Source Manager dialog box. highlight the library (for example. data is organized in different tables. Add Table Dialog Box 3. Capacitors) to which you want to add data. allows connection to various database types using Windows ODBC. Select an existing Data Source name. Data Source Manager Dialog Box (Spawned from Add Table) 4.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. or select a data source type to create a new Data Source. ODBC (see page D-20) . EXP2005 SPac1 .allows connection to data sources via DxWebPack.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Figure D-15. Oracle (see page D-19) . The Data Source Manager provides tools to specify data source names using the following database types (see Table D-2 and Figure D-1 on page D-2): • • • WWW (World Wide Web) . D-16 Library Manager Process Guide.allows a direct connection to an Oracle database. Note that there are constraints based on the data source type you select (see Table D-1 on page D-2). and access (login and password). the dialog box provides fields to specify the database connection name (that will appear in the Data Source Names list).dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Note For UNIX and Linux operating systems. Specifying a Web-based Data Source Select the WWW (World Wide Web) radio button to configure the Data Source Manager dialog box to define web-based data sources to include in the list of data sources in the Add Table dialog box (Figure D-15 on page D-16). EXP2005 SPac1 D-17 .Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. the dialog box lists current database drivers that are loaded to your Windows machine. Data Source Manager Dialog Box (WWW Option Enabled) Library Manager Process Guide. server connection identification. location. If you select WWW or Oracle. Use the following steps to specify a web-based data source in the dialog box (see Figure D-16): Figure D-16. the ODBC radio button on the Data Source Manager dialog box is not available. If you select ODBC. 7. 2. 9. Click Add to create another web-based data source connection and repeat steps 1 . To remove a Data Source Name from the Data Source Manager dialog box. highlight the entry in the dialog box and click Remove. D-18 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . Ensure the WWW radio button is selected. Data Source Manager Dialog Box (WWW Data Source Enabled) 6. The software saves the list of entries in the Data Source Names list box and returns you to the Add Table dialog box. Enter the URL path in the URL String text entry field. you can select any of the data source type radio buttons (Oracle and ODBC) to create data source types and corresponding names. 4. Figure D-17. 3. Enter the connection name (identification) in the text entry field. This identifies the location of the data source located on the web. Click Apply. The name you enter in this field eventually appears in the Data Source (DSN) dropdown box within the New Table dialog box (Figure D-14). The text in the Connection Name field now appears in the Data Source Names field of the dialog box (Figure D-17). Click OK to save changes and dismiss the dialog box. 8. 5. Enter the Database name in the field. Click Apply to save changes at any time in the dialog box.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. Note When you click Add.6.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) 1. Figure D-18. Ensure the Oracle radio button is selected. The name you enter in this field eventually appears in the Data Source (DSN) dropdown box within the New Table dialog box. EXP2005 SPac1 D-19 . Enter the connection name (user-assigned identification) in the text entry field. Data Source Manager Dialog Box (Oracle Data Source Enabled) 1.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Note If you use the WWW option in the Data Source Manager dialog box to add a table that you can access over a Web server. Enter the Oracle service name (database instance name). Specifying an Oracle Data Source Select the Oracle radio button to configure the Data Source Manager dialog box to define an Oracle-based data source to include in the list of data sources in the Add Table dialog box Use the following steps to specify a Oracle data source in the dialog box (Figure D-18). 4. 5. See “Adding Tables to a Library Configuration Using WWW” on page D-25 for more information. Enter your Oracle user name (Oracle database login). 3. Enter your Oracle database password. 2. Library Manager Process Guide. the contents of the parametric data table appear.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) 6. Select the ODBC radio button to configure the Data Source Manager dialog box to define an ODBC-based data source to include in the list of data sources in the Add Table dialog box. highlight the entry in the dialog box and click Remove. 9. D-20 Library Manager Process Guide. The text in the Connection Name field now appears in the Data Source Names field of the dialog box (Figure D-19). It is not available on UNIX and Linux operating systems. 10. EXP2005 SPac1 .6. 8.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. you can select any of the data source type radio buttons (Oracle and ODBC) to create data source types and corresponding names. Figure D-19. To remove a Data Source Name from the Data Source Manager dialog box. The software saves the list of entries in the Data Source Names list box and returns you to the Add Table dialog box. Click Apply to save changes at any time in the dialog box. Use the following steps to specify a ODBC-based data source in the dialog box (see Figure D-20). Specifying an ODBC Data Source Note The ODBC radio button is enabled on Windows operating systems. Click OK to save changes and dismiss the dialog box. Click Apply. Note When you click Add. Click Add to create another Oracle data source connection and repeat steps 1 . Data Source Manager Dialog Box (Oracle Data Source Defined) 7. EXP2005 SPac1 D-21 . Select a ODBC connection from the list of selections in the dialog box. The ODBC connection you highlight eventually appears in the Data Source (DSN) dropdown box within the New Table dialog box. Ensure the ODBC radio button is selected. Note When you click Add. 2. you can select any of the data source type radio buttons (Oracle and ODBC) to create data source types and corresponding names.3. Click Apply.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Figure D-20.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. The text in the Connection Name field now appears in the Data Source Names field of the dialog box. Click Add to select another ODBC data source connection and repeat steps 1 . Data Source Manager Dialog Box (ODBC Data Source Enabled) 1. 4. 3. Library Manager Process Guide. highlight the entry in the dialog box and click Remove. Click Apply to save changes at any time in the dialog box. Click OK to save changes and dismiss the dialog box.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Figure D-21.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. Use Add to create new connections and include them in the Data Source Names list box. 7. The software saves the list of entries in the Data Source Names list box and returns you to the Add Table dialog box. 6. Editing and Saving Data Source Names (Data Source Manager Dialog Box) Controls on the Data Source Manager dialog box (Figure D-22) allow you to manage the list of eligible data source names. EXP2005 SPac1 . Data Source Manager Dialog Box (ODBC Data Source Defined) 5. Use Remove to exclude a data source from the Data Source Names list box. To remove a Data Source Name from the Data Source Manager dialog box. D-22 Library Manager Process Guide. Editing Data Source Names (Data Source Manager Dialog Box) Click OK to save the list of data source names and connections and return to the New Table dialog box (Figure D-23).Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. New Table Dialog Box with Data Source (DSN) Populated Library Manager Process Guide. Figure D-23. EXP2005 SPac1 D-23 . Click Cancel to dismiss the Data Source Manager dialog box without saving changes. The Data Source (DSN) dropdown field is now populated with the data source names specified in the Data Source Manager dialog box (Figure D-22).dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Figure D-22. Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. Configure Dialog Box With Library Data Displayed D-24 Library Manager Process Guide. In the Table Name box.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Selecting a Data Source and Table Name Note This section assumes you have valid data sources in the Add Table dialog box. 1. The software reads the data source and compiles a list of valid parametric table names to populate the Table name dropdown list (see Figure D-23). Select a data source from the Data Source (DSN) dropdown list. select a table from the dropdown list. The Configure dialog box displays the detailed information about the selected library (Figure D-24). Note You can create a DSN by clicking New on this dialog (see “Viewing Table Properties” on page D-30 for more information). EXP2005 SPac1 . and then click OK. 2. Figure D-24. For more information on DxWebPack. highlight the library (for example. 3. When selected. click the Use the Data Source (DSN) dropdown list and select from the list of data sources and the table from the list tables in the Table Name dropdown list.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. Click Add Table. See “Using Other Library Configuration Dialog Box Controls” on page D-26 for more information on additional dialog box controls. From the Libraries tab (under Component Libraries). the software populates the Data Source (DSN) dropdown list with the full list of data sources accessible from the machine where DxWebPack is loaded. if no DXDB_LIBNAME attribute exists on the part. <machine_name> is the Windows machine where you configured the DxWebPack server. Adding Tables to a Library Configuration Using WWW Note To use the following functionality. Parametric data is “read only” when using DxWebPack Server on Windows.dll Once you add a valid URL address to the web server. DEVICE) to which you want to add data. http://<machine_name>/dxscripts/dxdbweb. 2. Select a Data Source from the dropdown list that contains the table you want to add. the software populates the Table Name dropdown list with the associated parametric tables. 4. Enter the full URL address of the web server where you installed DxWebPack. you must install and configure DxWebPack software on Windows. Note Prerequisite: Install and configure DxWebPack Server on Windows and then use DxDatabook to view parametric data in table from a web-based (WWW) data source (see “Specifying a Web-based Data Source” on page D-17). Library Manager retrieves data from the selected data source and displays data in the parametric table in the workspace (read only mode) when you invoke the Edit Parametric Data popup menu command (see “Editing Parametric Data” on page D-37) on the table. 1. Using the Add Table dialog box.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) Tip: The order of libraries affects how libraries appear and how parts are mapped to libraries when loaded from DxDesigner. Select the option on the Add table dialog box. 5. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 D-25 . the Add Table dialog box appears (Figure D-14 on page D-15). consult online help associated with DxWebPack. In the following example. dbc) file.lmc) file.dbc) File (Edit Databook Configuration Command) 6. Using Other Library Configuration Dialog Box Controls Removing Libraries and Tables Use the Remove command to remove table or library from the Libraries list. click Set Order. D-26 Library Manager Process Guide. To reorder libraries: Tip: The order of libraries affects how libraries appear and how parts are mapped to libraries when loaded from DxDesigner. EXP2005 SPac1 . Reordering Libraries Use the Set (Library) Order command to change the order of the libraries or tables within component libraries in the tree hierarchy. The Configure dialog box displays with the associated table and the parametric data associated with the table appears in the viewer in read only mode. In the Table Name box. The Reorder Libraries dialog box displays with a list of all the libraries in the current configuration.dbc file in the same location as the central library (*. At the prompt. 2.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Creating a DxDatabook (*. click Yes. The software creates the . if no DXDB_LIBNAME attribute exists on the part. From the Libraries tab. and then click Remove. 1. Saving DxDatabook User Configuration Click OK in the Configure dialog box to save settings in the user configuration (*. For additional information on DxDatabook user configuration information. The libraries are listed in the order they appear in the tree hierarchy. The highlighted entity is removed and the configuration automatically updates. To change the configuration or open a different configuration file. see “Viewing Central Library Properties” on page D-27. select the library you want to remove. Under Component Libraries. select a table to add (displayed in the drop-down list) and click OK. To delete a library from the current configuration: 1. The configuration file you save opens each time you use DxDatabook. right-click anywhere in the DxDatabook window and select a command from the popup menu. EXP2005 SPac1 D-27 . You can edit the Symbol Attribute for PDB Part Number field to define which DxDesigner attribute is equivalent to an Expedition part number.lmc) file name to display the popup menu (Figure D-25). consult online help. Under Component Libraries. The configuration automatically updates. 2. You can change a library or table name or link tables using advanced features within the Add Library dialog box. Restore the order in which the libraries were originally arranged (before saving). Editing Library or Table Properties Use the Add Library or Add Table dialog boxes to view or edit a library or table. and then click Properties. to view the location. select a library and click one of the commands in Table D-3: Table D-3. select the library or table you want to view or edit. For more information on linking tables. The configuration automatically updates based on the changes you made. 1.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Viewing Central Library Properties 2. and symbol attributes for the active central library. right click the central library (*. Move the selected library down one level in the tree hierarchy. Library Configuration Dialog Box Controls Button Move Up Move Down Alpha Order Purpose Move the selected library up one level in the tree hierarchy. Library Manager Process Guide. Under Libraries. make the appropriate changes. Click OK. 3. supported workflow. and then click OK. The Add Library or Add Table dialog box appears depending upon the entity you highlight. Viewing Central Library Properties Use the Properties command. The software uses this information in the DxDatabook Configuration to determine what column in the DxDatabook table is equivalent to the Expedition part number. 1. In the Library Navigator Tree. available from the popup menu when you right click on a valid central library in the Library Navigator Tree. From the Add Library or Add Table dialog box. Select DxDatabook Properties from the popup menu (Figure D-27). This data is associated with the Part partition in the active central library.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing DxDatabook Properties Figure D-25. Company Library Properties Dialog Box Editing DxDatabook Properties Use the DxDatabook Properties popup command to add or remove parametric tables from the database and edit table properties that exist in the database. the Central Library Properties dialog box appears (Figure D-26). Within the Library Navigator Tree. EXP2005 SPac1 . 1. Tip: You cannot edit the table layout in the database using this dialog box. 2. Figure D-26. right click the Part partition in the central library to display the popup menu commands. D-28 Library Manager Process Guide. Central Library Popup Menu 2. Click Properties. DxDatabook Properties Popup Menu Command The Properties dialog box displays with the Tables tab displayed by default and lists the parametric table names associated with the central library. click Add to associate a table using the proper Data Source Name (DSN) as illustrated in Figure D-28. DxDatabook Properties (Table) Dialog Box Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 D-29 . Figure D-28.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing DxDatabook Properties Figure D-27. If no parametric tables exist. Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing DxDatabook Properties Viewing Table Properties Use the Properties command to view and potentially modify the parametric table properties of the highlighted table. The software provides the means to select an ODBC data source and table name. The ODBC data source includes both machine data source (DSN) or user DSN. The tables correspond to the selected DSN. Use the Tables tab to select and associate tables to a DxDatabook library. 1. Click Properties; the parametric table properties appears in the Table tab (Figure D-29). Figure D-29. Parametric Table Properties Tab 2. Select a Data Source Name from the dropdown menu, which lists all the data source on your machine. Tip: Click New DSN to create a data source connecting DxDatabook to an ODBC database located on the computer or network. Use this option to connect to databases supported by DxDatabook (see “Using Parametric Databases on Supported Platforms” on page D-2). 3. Click OK to save changes, dismiss the dialog box, and return to the Properties dialog box (see Figure D-28 on page D-29). Assigning Properties to New Tables Select New in the Properties dialog box and the New Table Properties dialog box appears. Use the Table tab to view all the ODBC tables on your system by data source name. You can also use the New DSN command to create a new Data Source name. D-30 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing DxDatabook Properties 1. Click Add in the Properties dialog box; the New Table Properties dialog box appears. 2. Select the Data Source Name from the list of available sources (Figure D-30). Figure D-30. New Table Properties Dialog Box Note To create a new data source name (DSN), click New DSN to invoke the Select Data Source dialog box. For more information on the Select Data Source dialog box, click Help on the dialog box. 3. Select the parametric table from the list of available parametric tables in the Table Name dropdown to add to the library. The new table appears in the Table Name dropdown list (Figure D-31). Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 D-31 Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing DxDatabook Properties Figure D-31. New Table Properties Dialog Box with New Table Name 4. Click OK on the New Table Properties dialog box. The Properties dialog box updates with the new database table displayed (Figure D-32). Figure D-32. Properties Dialog Box with New Table Displayed D-32 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing DxDatabook Properties Removing Tables To remove a table so you do not have to include it in a library, select the Tables tab in the dialog box, select a table and click Remove. The highlighted table is removed from the list. Displaying Symbols Use the Symbol Library tab to display symbols based on a filtered setting or the actual data values associated with symbols. From the Properties dialog box, click the Symbol Library tab. The dialog box appears (see Figure D-33 on page D-33): Figure D-33. Symbol Library Tab (Properties Dialog Box) If you have symbol expression in your table (see Figure D-12 on page D-13), select the Valid Data Values in Symbol Field radio button and click OK. Otherwise, select the Symbol Filter radio button, enter a symbol expression to specify the legal symbols for the entire library, and click OK. Configuring Database Table Layouts From the Properties dialog box, use the Database Layout tab to link multiple tables in a library either horizontally (Figure D-34) or vertically (Figure D-35). Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 D-33 Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing DxDatabook Properties Figure D-34. Database Layout Tab - Tables Joined Vertically (Properties Dialog Box) Figure D-35. Database Layout Tab - Tables Joined Horizontally (Properties Dialog Box D-34 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing Database Tables Tables Joined Vertically - Vertically linked tables provide a single search interface for similar components stored in multiple tables. For example, you may want to search on capacitors, but the tables could be segmented into polarized and non-polarized fields for maintenance reasons. See Figure D-34 for an example. Tables Joined Horizontally - Horizontally linked tables join disparate information about the same set of components. See Figure D-35 for an example. Data Source - Displays all file DSNs associated with the selected library. Table Name - Displays all parametric tables associated with the selected library. Join Types are as follows: • Inner Join - Combines records from two tables to a query's results only if the values of the joined fields meet certain specified criteria. The values of the joined fields must be equal. Left Outer Join - Includes records even if there are no related records in the joined tables. • Advantages of Linking Tables Horizontally Linking tables horizontally allows each department full read-write access to each other's databases (or tables within the database). For example, if manufacturing information (cost, leadtime) is in one database table, and engineering (value, tolerance) is in another database, you can horizontally link these databases. Horizontally linked tables also reduce the duplication of data within a table. For example, manufacturer information (name, address, Web page) can be in a separate manufacturer table, and linked together by the manufacturer name. Tip: Use the database's built-in table linking mechanisms for simplicity and efficiency. For example, queries in Microsoft Access or Views in Oracle provide more efficient linking mechanisms. For more information, refer to the documentation for the appropriate database. Editing Database Tables Use the Edit Database Tables popup command to edit parametric table properties and values within the DxDatabook database associated with the active central library. For example, use commands in the DxDatabook viewer to add, remove, or modify parametric table properties and values stored in the database. Invoke the command from the workspace tree as shown in Figure D-36: Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 D-35 Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing Database Tables Figure D-36. Accessing Edit Database Tables Command from the Popup Menu The tables that appear in the Library Manager workspace depend on the number of tables you specified in the Properties dialog box (Figure D-37). Figure D-37. Viewing Parametric Table Entries in DxDatabook D-36 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing Parametric Data Use commands available in the DxDatabook environment to add parametric table entries (or rows), modify existing table entries (or rows), or delete rows from the table. When editing database tables, remember that you are modifying the schema of your database by changing parametric table properties. For more information, consult DxDatabook online help (Working With Database Properties section). Editing Parametric Data Use the Edit Parametric Data popup command to edit the parametric data present in the database. This command allows you to add, delete, and/or modify the contents of the parametric database table. For more information on editing parametric data, see the DxDatabook User’s Guide. Caution If you delete data from the parametric table, the software does not prompt you to either complete the deletion operation or cancel. The Undo command does not recover the deleted data. 1. Select Edit Parametric Data from the Library Navigator Tree (Figure D-38). Tip: You can access this command from the Part partition associated with the active central library or from an individual part within the Part partition (as shown in Figure D-38). Figure D-38. Accessing Edit Parametric Data Command from the Popup Menu The parametric data associated with the selected part displays in the viewer (Figure D-39). Note the toolbar which provides functionality to search, query, and edit parametric data in the table. You can also highlight parametric data and manually edit Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 D-37 Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing Parametric Data the data via the mouse and keyboard. If you make an errant edit, use the Undo icon to quickly correct the last edit you made to data in the table. Figure D-39. Parametric Data Associated With a Part 2. To edit the data within the table, highlight the appropriate entity within the table and edit it as required. Use the tools in the toolbar as necessary to perform these edits. When you change the data within a row, use the Edit icon (Figure D-40) to quickly isolate the row where the edit occurred. Note If a parametric table is “read only” in the database, the table window banner indicates that the table is not editable. If you attempt to create a new Databook entry corresponding to a new part and receive a warning message (“Part <xxx> not found; Unable to create new record - database is read-only”), the database you are attempting to update is “read only”. Figure D-40. Editing Parametric Data in a Table D-38 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 To save edits to the parametric data. key in the alphanumeric text string in the Find dialog box. In the example in Figure D-41. to find a specific value in the PKG_TYPE. This enables you to query by specific conditions and make global changes and query using more than one criteria. click the Toggle Query Window icon to display the query toolbar and operator fields (Figure D-41). click the Search icon. exit the table in the workspace. 2. The software saves all edits. Select the field you want the software to query. The software highlights the matching alphanumeric text in the table. click the Toggle Query Window icon. Example: 1. select tolerance in the Field pulldown. Tip: To hide the query commands and fields. EXP2005 SPac1 D-39 . Library Manager Process Guide. and click OK. For example. Click the Toggle Query Window icon to display the toolbar and operator fields. Using the Query Window for More Exacting Searches For more exacting data query. Click Find Next to find the next duplicate entry. Performing Simple Searches (Search Command) Use the Search icon in the toolbar to perform simple queries for entries in the table.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing Parametric Data 3. The software informs you if no matching string is found. Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing Parametric Data Figure D-41. Operators can be used with the data types in Table D-4. EXP2005 SPac1 . Using the Toggle Query Window 3. In the Value dropdown list. Table D-4. Operators and Corresponding Data Types Operator = > >= < <= != like Corresponding Data Type Numerical or String Numerical only Numerical only Numerical only Numerical only Numerical or String String only Note See Using Numeric Comparison Operators for more information. use one of the following methods to specify a value: • Choose an existing value from the dropdown list. D-40 Library Manager Process Guide. 4. Select the Operator (Op). of the specified attribute less than 1. Example “=20” returns a list of the components for which numeric value of the specified attribute equals 20. != Searching for a range from a smaller to larger value requires creating two search queries -. “!=34” matches all numeric values of the specified attribute except those that equal 34. Typing a value allows you to use wildcards when attempting to return a list of matches. entering R12* updates the results list with components that start with R12 and end with any alphanumeric characters. and a second query for the same attribute value less than a large number. 5. consult the DxDatabook User’s Guide and online help. Click Add to place the query in the list. Numeric Comparison Operators Operator = Function Represents a value equal to the specified numeric value.25. “>=32” matches all numeric values of the specified attribute greater than or equal to 32. copy selections from the table to a buffer (for example. 6.05” matches ll numeric values or equal to the specified numeric of the specified attribute less than or value. Table D-5. For more information on using the Query Window. For example. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for any additional query criteria. Click Run to execute the Query. a clipboard or to an ASCII data editor). Represents values that are greater than or equal to the specified numeric value. Represents values that are grater than the specified numeric value. >= <= Represents values that are less than “<=0. EXP2005 SPac1 D-41 . Represents values not equal to the specified value.25” matches all numeric values the specified numeric value. The Toggle Query Window also contains commands to navigate through a parametric table. “>20” matches all numeric values of the specified attribute greater than 20. > < Represents values that are less than “<1. view its contents.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing Parametric Data • Type a value to match.05. select a Field value from the list of available dropdown choices and then select one of the operators in Table D-5. equal to 0. Using Numeric Comparison Operators To use the numeric comparison characters in a search condition. For example. and refresh the table display. 7. The Results table updates to display items in the table that match your search criteria.one search query for an attribute value greater than a certain number. the following query matches all Library Manager Process Guide. For more information.matches any value beginning with “string”. Wildcard matching is not available for numerical data. consult the DxDatabook User’s Guide. Likewise. which represents any one character. • Individual Wildcard Character . which should be searched using mathematical comparisons of numeric values. _string . Note To search for a component using wildcards.matches “string” followed by one character. the following query matches the values less than 3m OR greater than 16m: <3mOR>16m Using String Wildcards DxDatabook uses the standard SQL percent (%) wildcard to match multiple string characters and the underscore (_) to match an individual character. you must use the like operator.An underscore (_).Matches any character followed by “string. DxDatabook converts it into the multiple wildcard character(%). DxDatabook also supports the asterisk (*) wildcard for matching multiple characters. Second. two conditions must be satisfied.A percent sign (%). For example: string_ . D-42 Library Manager Process Guide.matches any value ending with “string”. First. and the question mark (?) wildcard for matching a single character. EXP2005 SPac1 . When you use the asterisk in a search query. which represents any of zero or more characters. When you select the like operator. For example: string% . the data in the database must be of type string. when you use a question mark (?). For example.Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager Editing Parametric Data values from 10 to 20 inclusive by creating a search condition for values greater than 10 and less than 20: >10AND<20 Searching with a local NOT function for numeric ranges also requires two search queries. %string . DxDatabook converts it into the individual wildcard character (_). use any of the following wildcard characters: • Multiple Wildcard Characters . The HETERO attribute indicates which DxDesigner symbols are part of a heterogeneous device. Most limitations are related to the integration and interaction of DxDesigner's packaging/netlisting utility and the Part Editor's pin mapping definition and are specific to heterogeneous symbol support. The value of the HETERO attribute binds the different symbols together. Library Manager includes the DxDesigner to Expedition PCB design flow. There are four types of heterogeneous devices: • • • • HETERO Type 1 — Different components with the same device HETERO Type 2 — Different gates within the same device (No HETERO attribute needed) HETERO Type 3 — Split ICs HETERO Type 4 — Different representations of the same device E-1 Library Manager Process Guide. and number of slots. attributes. The combination of identical DEVICE attribute values and HETERO attribute values on each of the non-equivalent symbols is used to implement heterogeneous device support for the PCB interfaces. Read this section and study Table E-1 on page E-2 which describes the Hetero symbol types supported in this release. EXP2005 SPac1 . Heterogeneous Symbol Support A heterogeneous device is defined as a physical package which is represented by at least two non-equivalent symbols on a DxDesigner schematic.Appendix E Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Overview Before using Library Manager in the DxD-Expedition flow. The different symbols collectively correspond to a single physical device type for layout. and sometimes correspond to a single model for simulation. pin count. refer to the Release Notes documentation for information on specific problems and workarounds. These symbols may differ in logic function. pin labels. Also. There are some limitations and working methodologies regarding the DxD-Expedition flow within Library Manager which are discussed in this section. read and understand the software limitations documented in this appendix. Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Heterogeneous Symbol Support Consult DxDesigner Schematic Design online help for more information. The symbol value of the HETERO attribute can be overridden at the component level. All non-generic E-2 Library Manager Process Guide. In the DxDesigner-Expedition flow. schematic packaging (PCB Netlisting) in DxDesigner is driven by the symbol/component HETERO attribute value and overrides a possibly different hetero attribute that can be created from the part. EXP2005 SPac1 . Supported Hetero Type Symbols Part-driven Hetero Symbol Type Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Generic Symbols Yes No Yes * (see “Part-driven Heteros” on page E-3) No Non-generic Symbols Yes No Yes * (see “Partdriven Heteros” on page E-3) No DxDesigner-driven Generic Symbols No No No Non-generic Symbols Yes Yes Yes ** (see “Supporting DxD-Driven Nongeneric Hetero Type 3 Symbols” on page E-3) Yes (see “Supporting DxD-Driven Nongeneric Hetero Type 4 Symbols” on page E-25) Type 4 No DxDesigner-driven Heteros DxDesigner-driven (DxD-driven) Heteros are devices where the Hetero definition resides on the DxDesigner symbol/component. For these devices/symbols. generic symbols are symbols without built-in pin numbers and other device-related attributes while non-generic symbols are those containing built-in pin numbers and other attributes. Table E-1 illustrates the heterogeneous symbol types supported in this release: Table E-1. The DxD-Expedition flow supports specific part-driven and DxDesigner-driven generic and non-generic Hetero type symbols/devices in DxDesigner. A Hetero device is part-driven if the Hetero attribute definition is not present on the symbol/component. DxDesigner-driven and Part-driven Generic and Nongeneric Hetero Devices Supported in the DxD-Expedition Flow A Hetero device is DxDesigner-driven when the Hetero attribute definition exists (specified by the user) on the symbol/component. Packager will instead use the pin mapping definition to compose a value for the HETERO attribute. The HETERO attribute is not needed on the DxDesigner symbol since Packager will create and add a custom HETERO attribute value to the DxDesigner schematic component (based on the part definition of the device). Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols Note This modification is only required for DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 symbols. * For Hetero Type 3 (Generic and Non-generic). the HETERO attribute created by Packager software does not contain parentheses and does not function for simulation flows where the netlisters depend on the HETERO attribute to determine the Hetero type. To support Hetero Type 3 symbols (Split ICs) in the DxD-Expedition flow for this release. To illustrate the process. Part-Driven Generic and Non-generic symbols do not require this modification. Part-driven Hetero Types 2 and 4 are not supported in this release. you must manually modify the part entry to create a master/layout symbol definition. refer to the "HETERO_3" device with three fracture symbols (with pin numbers visible for use in this process guide): • • • IC_OK_1 (illustrated in Figure E-1 on page E-4) IC_OK_2 (illustrated in Figure E-2 on page E-4) IC_OK_3 (illustrated in Figure E-3 on page E-5) Library Manager Process Guide. See “Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 4 Symbols” on page E-25 on creating part definitions for DxDesigner driven hetero Type 4 devices. for Hetero Type 3. The Hetero device is driven from the part definition. Therefore. the HETERO attribute value created by Packager must be manually edited to add these parentheses. ** See “Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols” on page E-3 on creating a Part definition for DxDesigner driven Hetero Type 3 devices. Part-driven Heteros Part-driven heteros are devices where the HETERO attribute definition is not present on the DxDesigner symbol/component. Hetero Type 1 is supported. Using this methodology. EXP2005 SPac1 E-3 . Use an ASCII editor of your choice to complete this task.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols (symbols must have built in PIN numbers) Hetero types are supported when driven from DxDesigner (user-specified HETERO definition on the symbol). IC_OK_1 Symbol Figure E-2. Figure E-1. Note that you do not have to create the master/layout symbol.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols All three fracture symbols are located in symbol partition "Hetero". EXP2005 SPac1 . IC_OK_2 Symbol E-4 Library Manager Process Guide. Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols Figure E-3. “Importing the Modified Part Entry” on page E-23 Export the Part Entry (or Entries) to ASCII Export the existing Part entry for the HETERO_3 device using the following steps: 1. this is basically a cut-and-paste procedure using the following steps: 1. “Export the Part Entry (or Entries) to ASCII” on page E-5 2. you will find an ASCII representation of the part entry before the master symbol is added and an updated ASCII representation that includes the master symbol in the pin mapping. Note that the new master symbol entry will use the existing gate definitions from the fracture symbols. Invoke the Part Editor from the Library Manager interface. EXP2005 SPac1 E-5 . Select the HETERO_3 device and select File > Export ASCII from the Part Editor interface: Library Manager Process Guide. Therefore. 2. IC_OK_3 Symbol In “Modify the Part Entry in an ASCII Editor” on page E-6. “Modify the Part Entry in an ASCII Editor” on page E-6 3. the Selected Parts Only is selected since only one entry is being exported/ Figure E-5.txt or . You must be familiar with the format because you must edit it. Export ASCII Dialog Box Modify the Part Entry in an ASCII Editor Open the output file in an ASCII editor and observe the structure of the Part entry before editing. Enter an output ASCII file name with a . EXP2005 SPac1 . 3. In this example. Selecting Export ASCII Command in Part Editor The Export ASCII dialog box displays.hkp extension and select the Selected Parts Only or All Parts in Partition option depending upon on the number and organization of your hetero-3 devices. E-6 Library Manager Process Guide.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols Figure E-4. Notation Si Library Manager Process Guide. or Regional). the Symbol Pin Name is mapped to the Component/Device Pin Number via the SwapID contained in the SwapGroup section.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols The following example describes the following major sections. mm or um) and Notation (either Engineering.Version "02. • • • • Blue boxes represent symbol ic_ok_1 Red/maroon boxes represent symbol ic_ok_2 Green boxes represent symbol ic_ok_3 Purple (magenta) boxes illustrate the implicit Supply and No-Connect data that is stored in and processed from the part. HETER0_3 . in. portions within each section are enclosed in colorcoded rectangles to show the data that applies to each symbol of this Split IC device. “Symbol Mapping Section” on page E-13. Specifically. and “Slot Definition Section” on page E-14 for examples.Units th . Spice.Part ASCII Representation (BEFORE EDITING) File Header Information File header information showing the File type. EXP2005 SPac1 E-7 . See “Swap group for “gate”” on page E-9. Si. See the example gold-highlighted SwapID "P0" and the corresponding entries in the Symbol and Slot sections (in this case. File version. Units (either th. European. Filetype ASCII_PDB . SwapID "P0" maps input pin "I0" to Pin Number 41).00" . Scientific. This mapping is performed positionally within each section. To better illustrate how the data relates. • • • • Header section SwapGroup section Symbol section Slots section Information in these sections correlate with each other. None. Label.RefPrefix "U" .Desc "" . gate_1 (page E-10). SwapGroup definitions for the Supply and NC pins follow on page E-12.Modified1078852829 ! 3/9/04 11:20 AM .Default . Number refers to Part Number = HETERO_3. ic_ok_2 and ic_ok_3 respectively.. and PKG_TYPE) Definition section containing Part Number.. "".Default .BottomCell "" . Label refers to Part Label = FPGA..Prop "Type"... Note that there can be multiple SwapGroup definitions. "Text" The following lists SwapGroup Name and Definition containing the SwapIDs and properties.. EXP2005 SPac1 .. The Definition section contains the Reference Designator Prefix and the TopCell (PKG_TYPE). Name refers to Part Name = HETERO_3.TopCell "52PLCC" ..Label "FPGA" ... corresponding to fracture symbols ic_ok_1. RefDes Prefix.. Name and Label information. Name.Name "HETERO_3" .Number "HETERO_3" . E-8 Library Manager Process Guide. and gate_2 (page E-11)..Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols Definition Section (Part Number. This example entry has three SwapGroups: gate (page E-9). These are used to represent the logic pins on the symbols as well as the Supply (SIGNAL) and No-Connect (NC) pins. . .......SwapID "P6" .. . .SwapIDProperties "P6" .SwapGroup "gate" . "Input"..Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols Swap group for “gate” . "Bidir".SwapID "P8" . "Input"..SwapID "P2" ..SwapID "P0" ...Prop "Pin Type".Prop "Pin Type".. ...SwapID "P0" . "Input".SwapID "P0" . "Bidir".......SwapID "P7" ...Prop "Pin Type"........Prop "Pin Type". "Input"..SwapIDProperties "P7" ... .SwapID "P0" .....Prop "Pin Type"......SwapID "P1" .....SwapID "P5" ...SwapIDProperties "P4" ......SwapID "P9" . "Input"..SwapID "P0" .. ...SwapIDProperties "P10" .Prop "Pin Type".... "Bidir".SwapID "P10" ...SwapID "P11" .SwapID "P0" ... "Output"..SwapID "P4" . .Prop "Pin Type". Library Manager Process Guide. "Bidir".Prop "Pin Type"......SwapIDProperties "P0" .SwapIDProperties "P9" ... EXP2005 SPac1 E-9 ......SwapIDProperties "P3" ...Prop "Pin Type"...Prop "Pin Type"...SwapIDProperties "P11" ..Prop "Pin Type".... "Input".SwapID "P3" . . "Text" "Text" "Text" "Text" "Text" "Text" "Text" "Text" "Text" "Text" “Text" "Text" Note: The blue box represents symbol ic_ok_1.SwapIDProperties "P2" .SwapIDProperties "P1" . . .SwapIDProperties "P8" . .Prop "Pin Type".SwapIDProperties "P5" .. "Input".. ...... E-10 Library Manager Process Guide.. "Input"......."Output"..SwapID "P5" .SwapIDProperties "P7" .Prop "Pin Type". "Text" .SwapID "P6" .. "Input".. "Text" ..SwapID "P6" .Prop "Pin Type".SwapID "P6" ...SwapID "P1" ...SwapIDProperties "P6" ..SwapID " P6" .......SwapIDProperties "P3" .. "Text" ... "Text" .."Output".."Input"..Prop "Pin Type".SwapIDProperties "P2" ...SwapID "P6" ..Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols Swap group for “gate_1” .SwapIDProperties "P1" .Prop "Pin Type".SwapGroup" gate_1" .........Prop "Pin Type".SwapIDProperties "P5" .... "Text" ..Prop "Pin Type". "Text" The red/maroon box represents symbol ic_ok_2...Prop "Pin Type"..SwapIDProperties "P8" .SwapIDProperties "P0" .SwapID" P3" ."Input".. "Input"..."Output".........."Input"....SwapIDProperties "P4" ... EXP2005 SPac1 ..SwapID "P2" . "Text" ... "Text" .......Prop "Pin Type".SwapID "P7" . "Text" ..SwapID "P0" .Prop "Pin Type".SwapID "P8" .SwapID "P6" ..SwapID "P4" . ..SwapIDProperties "P4" ...SwapIDProperties "P5" . "Input".SwapID "P10" ... "Output"......SwapID "P10" .SwapIDProperties "P10" .. "Text" .SwapID "P8" .. "Text" ..SwapIDProperties "P0" .Prop "Pin Type"......Prop "Pin Type"..Prop "Pin Type"...SwapID "P9" ..SwapIDProperties "P3" ..Prop "Pin Type"..SwapID "P4" . "Text" The green box represents symbol ic_ok_3.SwapID "P10" . "Text" ......SwapIDProperties "P8" . "Text" .. "Text" ...SwapID "P0" .SwapID "P10" ....Prop "Pin Type"...SwapIDProperties "P9" . "Text" ....Prop "Pin Type"..Prop "Pin Type".....SwapID "P3" ... "Input"..Prop "Pin Type". Library Manager Process Guide... "Text" ......Prop "Pin Type".Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols SwapGroup for “gate_2” . "Text" ..SwapIDProperties "P6" ..Prop "Pin Type". "Text" .... "Bidir".. "Input".... EXP2005 SPac1 E-11 ..SwapID "P10" .SwapGroup "gate_2" ...SwapIDProperties "P2" ...SwapIDProperties "P1" ... "Input".SwapID "P5" . "Bidir".SwapID "P6" . "Input". "Bidir"..SwapID "P10" . "Input".SwapIDProperties "P7" .Prop "Pin Type".. "Bidir"..SwapID "P1" .... "Text" ......SwapID "P7" ....SwapID "P2" ... ..SwapID "P1" ..SwapIDProperties "P1" .. "GND".. "VDD". "Text" The purple (magenta) box illustrates the implicit Supply and No-Connect data that is stored in and processed from the Part. "Text" ..SwapID "P1" ...Prop "Supply".SwapID "P1" . "Text" ..Prop "Pin Type".SwapIDProperties "P1" .SwapIDProperties "P1" ..SwapID "P1" .. "Text" ..Prop "Supply".......Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols SwapGroup Definitions for Supply and NC Pins ... E-12 Library Manager Process Guide....... "Text" ..Prop "Supply". EXP2005 SPac1 .SwapGroup "VDD_1" ..SwapGroup "VDD" .Prop "Supply"..SwapGroup "GND" .. "GND"....SwapIDProperties "P1" . "No Connect"....SwapIDProperties "P1" . "VDD".SwapGroup "No Connect" ...SwapID "P1" ...SwapGroup "GND_1" . .PinName "IN22" ....PinName "IN1" ..Symbol_SwapGroup "gate" ...PinName "X7" Library Manager Process Guide.PinName "IN21" ..........PinName "X5" ...PinName "IN8" ...PinName "~B2" ................PinName "IN7" ..PinName "IN9" ..PinName "~O7" ..PinName "X6" .Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols Symbol Mapping Section The Symbol Mapping section contains Symbol_SwapGroup definitions that positionally map Pin Names (LABELS) on the symbols to the SwapGroup SwapIDs and the Slot (Pin Number) information.....PinName "IN10" ..PinName "IN15" ........PinName "X4" ...PinName "IN2" .....PinName "~B3" ..PinName "X1" ....PinName "IN23" .PinName "X0" ..... EXP2005 SPac1 E-13 .Symbol_SwapGroup "gate_1" .........Symbol "Hetero:ok_ic_2" ..PinName "~B0" .PinName "IN5" ....... Note There is no mapping of the Supply/NC pins in this section because they do not appear explicitly on the symbols...PinName "IN4" ...PinName "IN6" ..PinName "X2" ....Symbol "Hetero:ok_ic_1" .PinName "X3" ......PinName "IN17" ..PinName "IN11" ... ..PinName "IN16" .PinName "~B1" .PinName "IN3" ..PinName "IN0" ... PinName "O2" .....PinNumber "38" .PinNumber "43" .....PinNumber "47" ..Slot_SwapGroup "gate" ....Slots ..PinName "IN19" ..PinNumber "40" ....PinName "IN12" .PinNumber "50" ..PinNumber "48" ......PinName "B7" .PinNumber "39" ........PinNumber "41" .....PinName "IN13" ....PinName "O4" .......PinNumber "44" ...PinName "IN14" ..Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols .....PinNumber "45" .PinNumber "51" .PinNumber "37" ..PinNumber "42" .PinName "B6" .PinName "O5" Slot Definition Section The Slot Definition Section contains Slot_SwapGroup definitions which positionally map component Pin Numbers to both the Symbol_SwapGroup Pin Names and SwapGroup SwapIDs (shown previously)........PinName "B4" ....Symbol_SwapGroup "gate_2" .. ......PinName "O0" ..PinNumber "52" ...PinName "B5" ..PinName "IN20" ...Symbol "Hetero:ok_ic_3" .PinNumber "27" E-14 Library Manager Process Guide..................PinName "IN18" ......PinNumber "1" .PinNumber "49" . EXP2005 SPac1 ......PinName "O1" ..PinName "O3" ..... PinNumber "46" ..PinNumber "11" .....Slot_SwapGroup "gate_1" ...PinNumber "34" ...PinNumber "21" ..PinNumber "14" ..........PinNumber "28" ....PinNumber "13" ...PinNumber "4" ....PinNumber "8" ............PinNumber "22" ....Slot_SwapGroup "VDD" .PinNumber "33" . the new entry should appear as “....PinNumber "29" .PinNumber "7" .Slot_SwapGroup "GND" ......PinNumber "17" .PinNumber "16" .... Library Manager Process Guide.. EXP2005 SPac1 E-15 .. "Hetero_3")..Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols .Slot_SwapGroup "GND_1" .PinNumber "26" Specify the new symbol name entry in the Symbol section of the Part entry.PinNumber "31" ...Slot_SwapGroup "gate_2" ..PinNumber "19" ......Slot_SwapGroup "No Connect" ...PinNumber "23" ....PinNumber "6" .PinNumber "24" .PinNumber "20" ..PinNumber "35" ...PinNumber "5" ....PinNumber" 25" Slot SwapGroup Definitions for Supply and NC Pins Slot_SwapGroup definitions for the Supply and NC pins are as follows: ........PinNumber "32" ....PinNumber "9" .........Slot_SwapGroup "VDD_1" ........PinNumber "36" .... Therefore.....PinNumber "12" ..PinNumber "10" ..PinNumber "18" .....PinNumber "2" ..PinNumber "15" .. Note that the symbol name must match the Part Number (for example..PinNumber "3" .Symbol "Hetero_3"..PinNumber "30" ..... .Label "FPGA" .SwapID "P9" .BottomCell "" ...SwapID "P11" .Number "HETERO_3" . copy and paste the existing “Symbol_SwapGroup” definitions of each of the fracture symbols (three in this example).SwapID "P8" .SwapID "P0" ....SwapID "P7" ..SwapID "P4" ..... "Text" E-16 Library Manager Process Guide....SwapIDProperties "P2" ..SwapGroup "gate" .Units th ..... "Input".SwapID "P3" .. The modified symbol definition is indicated in “Modified Symbol Definitions (HETERO_3)” on page E-20... "".. HETER0_3 ...SwapID "P1" ..SwapIDProperties "P0" ..Prop "Type"...Prop "Pin Type".Default .. "Input".Name "HETERO_3" ..TopCell "52PLCC" .Prop "Pin Type".Prop "Pin Type"..Filetype ASCII_PDB .SwapID "P0" ...SwapID "P10" . See the text enclosed in a box in the ASCII dump of the Part after making the required modifications (next section in this chapter). Once you enter that line....SwapID "P0" . "Input".Version "02..SwapIDProperties "P1" .Notation Si . "Text" .SwapID "P2" .Modified 1078852829 ! 3/9/04 11:20 AM .... EXP2005 SPac1 . . Make sure to accurately copy and paste the Symbol_SwapGroup definitions so that the SwapGroup definition for the master symbol is complete....00" .Part ASCII Representation (AFTER EDITING) The ASCII version of the same HETERO_3 entry is now modified to show the addition of the master/layout Symbol definition...SwapID "P0" .Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols You can insert this new entry after the last fracture’s symbol definition....SwapID "P5" .. Remember that the name of the master/layout symbol must match the Part Number (DEVICE) attribute... "Text" .Default . "Text" .Desc "" .SwapID "P0" .SwapID "P6" .RefPrefix "U" .........SwapID "P0" ... Prop "Pin Type".....SwapID "P4" .SwapIDProperties "P8" ...SwapID "P2" ...... "Input"...SwapIDProperties "P7" ....SwapIDProperties "P2" .... "Input".. "Text" . "Text" .Prop "Pin Type"....... "Text" . "Output". "Text" .......SwapID "P6" ...SwapID "P1" .Prop "Pin Type".....SwapID "P6" ...SwapIDProperties "P1" .Prop "Pin Type"...SwapID "P1" ..SwapID "P6" .. "Text" . "Output"..SwapIDProperties "P5" .. EXP2005 SPac1 E-17 ... "Input".. "Input".Prop "Pin Type".Prop "Pin Type". "Bidir"..SwapGroup "gate_2" .Prop "Pin Type"...Prop "Pin Type". "Bidir". "Input". "Text" .....SwapID "P4" . "Text" .SwapID "P8" ....SwapIDProperties "P7" ....... "Input".. "Text" ..Prop "Pin Type"..Prop "Pin Type".. "Bidir"..SwapID "P3" ..SwapID "P6" .SwapID "P2" . "Text" ...Prop "Pin Type". "Text" .Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols ......SwapIDProperties "P5" ...SwapIDProperties "P3" .Prop "Pin Type"..SwapIDProperties "P11" ..SwapID "P5" ..SwapIDProperties "P0" ..SwapID "P7" . "Text" . "Text" .. "Text" .. "Text" .Prop "Pin Type".. "Output". "Text" . "Text" .SwapIDProperties "P4" ..SwapID "P5" Library Manager Process Guide......Prop "Pin Type"..SwapID "P6" ..SwapID "P0" ...SwapID "P3" . "Input".....SwapIDProperties "P8" .Prop "Pin Type"...SwapIDProperties "P4" .. "Bidir". "Text" ........SwapID "P6" .SwapIDProperties "P10" .Prop "Pin Type". "Output". "Text" ..SwapIDProperties "P3" ....SwapIDProperties "P6" ...SwapID "P0" .SwapIDProperties "P6" .Prop "Pin Type".SwapGroup "gate_1" .Prop "Pin Type".......... "Input".... "Input".. "Input"...SwapIDProperties "P9" . .....SwapID . "Text" Note: This ok_ic_1 symbol_swapgroup definition (not including the ...Prop "Pin Type".... "Output". "GND".SwapGroup "GND" ... "Text" .SwapIDProperties "P0" ........SwapIDProperties "P1" ..Prop "Supply"..Prop "Pin Type".SwapID .SwapIDProperties "P1" .....SwapID ....Prop "Pin Type"..SwapGroup "VDD_1" .SwapGroup "VDD" . "Text" .SwapIDProperties "P10" ...SwapID "P1" ... "Input". "Input".....Prop "Supply".. "Text" . EXP2005 SPac1 .SwapIDProperties "P2" .. "Text" .SwapID ..Prop "Supply"..SwapIDProperties "P3" ..Prop "Pin Type"... "Bidir".. "Text" .. "Input". "Bidir".SwapIDProperties "P6" ......SwapIDProperties "P5" ...........SwapID ....SwapIDProperties "P1" .Prop "Pin Type". "Text" ....SwapIDProperties "P9" ..Symbol Hetero:ok_ic_1 line) should be copied into the new master/layout symbol entry in “Modified Symbol Definitions (HETERO_3)” on page E-20...Prop "Pin Type".SwapID "P1" .... "Text" ......Prop "Supply".. "Text" ... "Text" .SwapID . E-18 Library Manager Process Guide.SwapID .......SwapGroup "GND_1" .SwapIDProperties "P1" . "Input"... "GND".SwapID . "Text" .. "VDD".. "Input".SwapIDProperties "P7" .. "VDD".Prop "Pin Type". "Text" ..SwapID .. "Text" .Prop "Pin Type"... "Input".Prop "Pin Type"..SwapID "P1" ..SwapID "P6" "P7" "P8" "P9" "P10" "P10" "P10" "P10" "P10" "P10" .Prop "Pin Type"..SwapID "P1" . "No Connect".. "Text" ..SwapIDProperties "P1" ... "Bidir"....SwapIDProperties "P4" ...SwapIDProperties "P8" ..SwapGroup "No Connect" ..SwapIDProperties "P1" .Prop "Pin Type"... "Text" ...Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols .. "Bidir".Prop "Pin Type".. "Text" .SwapID "P1" . PinName "IN5" ..PinName "X6" .Symbol Hetero:ok_ic_2 line) should be copied into the new master/layout symbol entry on “Modified Symbol Definitions (HETERO_3)” on page E-20. .....PinName "~O7" Note: This ok_ic_2 symbol_swapgroup definition (not including the .PinName "X3" .PinName "IN16" .PinName "IN4" ......PinName "~B2" .PinName "IN0" ...............PinName "IN2" .....PinName "IN7" ...Symbol "Hetero:ok_ic_1" ....PinName "IN22" .........PinName "IN10" ..PinName "X4" ..PinName "~B3" ....PinName "X0" ...Symbol "Hetero:ok_ic_2" ......Symbol_SwapGroup "gate_1" ..Symbol_SwapGroup "gate" ..PinName "IN17" .....PinName "X7" Library Manager Process Guide.PinName "IN21" .PinName "IN9" ...PinName "IN15" .PinName "IN23" .....PinName "X1" .......PinName "IN11" ....PinName "IN3" .PinName "~B0" ....PinName "IN8" ..PinName "~B1" .PinName "IN1" ......PinName "X5" ..............Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols ...PinName "IN6" .PinName "X2" ... EXP2005 SPac1 E-19 . It is named "HETERO_3" to match the Part Number/Device attribute..PinName "B6" ..PinName "O4" .PinName "O3" ... .Symbol Hetero:ok_ic_3 line) should be copied into the new master/layout symbol entry (see Modified Symbol Definitions (HETERO_3).PinName "O1" ...... Notice that the definition consists of the Symbol_SwapGroup definitions used for the three fracture symbols (shown on the next page): • • • Hetero: ic_ok_1 Hetero: ic_ok_2 Hetero: ic_ok_3 E-20 Library Manager Process Guide...PinName "IN14" ...........PinName "O0" .PinName "IN12" .PinName "O5" Modified Symbol Definitions (HETERO_3) The following page shows the Symbol entry for the master/layout symbol....PinName "O2" ........... EXP2005 SPac1 ...PinName "B5" .....PinName "IN19" ...PinName "B7" .Symbol "Hetero:ok_ic_3" ...PinName "B4" .PinName "IN20" .Symbol_SwapGroup "gate_2" ....PinName "IN18" ..Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols Note: This ok_ic_3 symbol_swapgroup definition (not including the ...PinName "IN13" ... .PinName "IN16" ............PinName "IN2" ....PinName "O5" Library Manager Process Guide...PinName "O4" .....PinName "X6" ... EXP2005 SPac1 E-21 .......PinName "B6" ..PinName "IN21" .PinName "X7" .Symbol_SwapGroup "gate" .....PinName "B7" ....PinName "IN15" ...PinName "X2" ..PinName "~B3" .PinName "O2" ..PinName "IN11" .PinName "IN5" .....PinName "O1" ...PinName "X3" ....................PinName "B4" ..PinName "O3" ........PinName "IN6" ..PinName "IN23" ...Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols ....PinName "IN14" ..Symbol "Hetero_3" .....PinName "IN4" ..PinName "IN7" .........PinName "IN22" .PinName "IN10" .PinName "X4" ..PinName "X5" .PinName "IN1" .PinName "IN8" ..PinName "IN13" .....PinName "~B1" .....PinName "IN20" ...PinName "~B0" .....PinName "X0" ....PinName "IN3" ........PinName "IN9" ..PinName "IN19" ...PinName "~B2" .....PinName "B5" ..Symbol_SwapGroup "gate_1" ....PinName "~O7" .PinName "IN12" .......PinName "X1" .Symbol_SwapGroup "gate_2" ..........PinName "IN0" ...PinName "O0" .PinName "IN18" .PinName "IN17" . .PinNumber "28" ..PinNumber "12" .......PinNumber "36" .....PinNumber "40" ..PinNumber "42" ..........PinNumber "51" ......PinNumber "5" ...PinNumber "14" ..PinNumber "30" ...PinNumber "4" .....PinNumber "41" .PinNumber "31" .....................PinNumber "43" ...PinNumber "15" ..PinNumber "21" .PinNumber "7" .PinNumber "44" .PinNumber "6" ...Slot_SwapGroup "gate_2" ....Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols ..PinNumber "33" .....PinNumber "10" ...PinNumber "1" .....Slot_SwapGroup "gate" ...............PinNumber "52" .....PinNumber "9" .PinNumber "45" .......PinNumber "48" ..PinNumber "3" ...PinNumber "32" .Slots ..PinNumber "18" .PinNumber "39" ....PinNumber "50" .Slot_SwapGroup "gate_1" ....PinNumber "25" E-22 Library Manager Process Guide.PinNumber "49" ..PinNumber "38" ..PinNumber "19" ......PinNumber "16" ....PinNumber "29" ..PinNumber "47" ......PinNumber "35" .PinNumber "11" ...PinNumber "17" ...PinNumber "37" .PinNumber "13" ..PinNumber "22" ....PinNumber "2" ....PinNumber "24" .PinNumber "23" .....PinNumber "27" ......... EXP2005 SPac1 . .. Before importing the modified entry.... the part was copied using the Copy command and the part was renamed to "HETERO_3_save" (Figure E-6)...Slot_SwapGroup "VDD" .. Save it as a different file name (if desired) so as not to overwrite the original exported version.PinNumber "8" ...PinNumber "34" ..Slot_SwapGroup "GND_1" ... Importing the Modified Part Entry To finish the process...PinNumber "46" . Part Editor Copy Command 2. In this example..txt.PinNumber "26" When you complete the definition for the master Symbol. the modified ASCII filename is Hetero_modified. Library Manager Process Guide. 3... the Import ASCII dialog box displays. go to the Part Editor and rename the original HETERO_3 Part Number so that it is not overwritten when you import the modified file. Browse to the modified ASCII text file and choose the Import options as desired (Figure E-7). In the following figure.Slot_SwapGroup "VDD_1" . 1.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols . save the updated ASCII file.Slot_SwapGroup "GND" ....PinNumber "20" ... use the Part Editor (File > Import ASCII command) to import the modified ASCII Part entry back into the part data. Figure E-6. Click File > Import ASCII. EXP2005 SPac1 E-23 ..Slot_SwapGroup "No Connect" .. and reimport. troubleshoot the problem. open the file in an ASCII editor. The Part entry for the Hetero_3 device is now updated and is ready for the Create PCB Netlist operation. EXP2005 SPac1 . click Pin Mapping. select the Hetero_3 entry. If errors occur. 5. then save and exit the Part Editor. save your changes. and view the Symbol section to ensure the new master/layout Symbol appears (Figure E-8). Click OK. Review the pin mapping for the Hetero_3 symbol to make sure it is complete and accurate. the software displays a message box informing you that the process was successful. E-24 Library Manager Process Guide. In the Part Editor dialog box. Hetero_3 Entry in Part Editor (After ASCII Import) 6.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 3 Symbols Figure E-7. Import ASCII Dialog Box (Part Editor) 4. Figure E-8. This section describes a process for defining a resistor package that supports: • • • • • Place either 2 pin or 8 pin schematic symbols in any combination Swap pins from one side of the resistor to the other Swap resistors within package Swap resistors across packages Enable recognition as series device in CES Using DxD Symbols (Non-generic Hetero Type 4) Heterogeneous symbols provide the ability to assign different symbols to the same package. In the following examples. EXP2005 SPac1 E-25 . DxDesigner Symbol for Full Resistor Package Library Manager Process Guide. The methods used to define resistor packages has an impact on the functionality available in many downstream tools (such as Constraint Editing System software). See “Supported Hetero Type Symbols” on page E-2 for more information.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 4 Symbols Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 4 Symbols This section discusses the support of DxD-driven non-generic hetero Type 4 symbols in this release of Library Manager. which enables gate swapping (see Figure E-9 and Figure E-10). a hetero Type 4 (different representations of the same device) is used to indicate that the two-pin gate information is available in layout. Figure E-9. EXP2005 SPac1 . Select Tools > Part Editor to invoke the Part Editor from the DxDesigner . The Part Editor displays (Figure E-11 on page E-27). E-26 Library Manager Process Guide.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 4 Symbols Figure E-10.Expedition Library Manager interface. DxDesigner Symbol for Gated Resistor Package Central Library Parts Database Pin and symbol group swapping is defined in the Central Library Parts Database. the Pin Mapping dialog box displays (see Figure E-12 and Figure E-13): Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 E-27 .Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 4 Symbols Figure E-11. Parts Database Editor Interface When you select a part from the list and click Pin Mapping. EXP2005 SPac1 . Pin Mapping Dialog Box With Swap Definitions for 8 Pin Symbol E-28 Library Manager Process Guide.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 4 Symbols Figure E-12. Pin Mapping Dialog Box With Swap Definitions for 2 Pin Symbol Figure E-13. Electrical Nets in CES Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 E-29 . use the series device heuristics in the Constraint Editor System (CES) to identify the physical nets on either side of the resistor as part of the same electrical net (see Figure E-15). The 2 pin symbols will be packaged together into the same physical package.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 4 Symbols DxDesigner Schematic Either the 2 pin or 8 pin symbol can be used on the schematic. DxDesigner Schematic Instances Constraint Editor System Once the resistor gate information is defined. as indicated by the identical reference designator (see Figure E-14.) Figure E-14. Figure E-15. Note CES must be closed for Swap commands to be enabled. Expedition PCB Pin Swapping Once the design is forward annotated into Expedition PCB. then click the pins to swap. the next invocation of CES will load the swaps and update pin pair references accordingly in the design.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 4 Symbols Constraints can be defined for the entire electrical net. click the Pin Swap icon click the pins to swap. several swap functions are now possible. E-30 Library Manager Process Guide. See Figure E-16 for an example: Figure E-16. Pin Swapping in Expedition and then Gate Swapping To swap a resistor within a package. click the Gate Swap icon See Figure E-17 for an example. Pin Swapping To swap pins from one side of the resistor to the other. EXP2005 SPac1 . and constraint templates can be applied to define delay formulas across physical nets. After the Swap commands are completed. Gate Swapping in Expedition Symbol Group Swapping To swap a resistor from one package to another package. Figure E-18. EXP2005 SPac1 E-31 . you must first display the Gate Swap dialog box by pressing the F2 function key after clicking the Gate Swap icon . including those in other packages of the same device (see Figure E-18). Symbol Group Swapping in Expedition Library Manager Process Guide.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Supporting DxD-Driven Non-generic Hetero Type 4 Symbols Figure E-17. Selecting the "Symbol Gate Group" for the swap mode will highlight all swappable pins. Select the type of swap and click Apply (see Figure E-19). mismatches can exist between pin definitions on DxD symbols and the part which generate errors during Packaging. This provides Packager enough information to know the context of the swappable subgates. the Automatic Swap dialog box displays. E-32 Library Manager Process Guide. Figure E-19. Make sure the pin definitions in DxD symbols are represented in the Part data. EXP2005 SPac1 . Select Place > Automatic > Swap by Part Number. automatic swapping functionality is available. Automatic Group/Gate/Pin Swapping in Expedition Swappable Sub-Gates / PinSets In the DxD-Expedition flow.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Swappable Sub-Gates / PinSets Automatic Swapping In addition to the interactive swapping commands. These sub-gates are implicitly swappable and so the PINs assigned to these slots are defined as swappable sets in DxDesigner.Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Pin Swap Verification Swappable pin sets (in a part/symbol) are defined in Parts data by defining swappable sub-gates. This is limited to non-gate. The software must validate of pin names and numbers for all slots. In a symbol with multiple sub-gates. the Parts data slot processor requires modification to process all the symbol swap groups defined for a part in a Part data. single-representation parts. Unsupported DxD-Expedition Library Manager Flow Scenarios The following are unsupported scenarios in the DxD-Expedition flow within Library Manager: • • Generic symbols and multiple swap groups (and/or symbol swap groups) Generic symbols with multiple representations Library Manager Process Guide. Also. The software must read all symbol swap group definitions. EXP2005 SPac1 E-33 . the pin names must be matched with a DxD symbol and the pin numbers must be assigned accordingly. Part Writer (Hetero Type 2 and/or 4) The DxD-Expedition flow creates a local part for non-matching parts (to a Central Library) on a design. In this release. pin swap verification is limited to non-gated. single-representation parts in this release. Pin Swap Verification Pin swap verification allows the software to validate the pin swap attribute against the actual pin and pin set swap definitions of the Part data. the software matches DxD symbol PINs against all pins in all sub-gates. EXP2005 SPac1 .Library Manager (DxD-Expedition Flow) Limitations Unsupported DxD-Expedition Library Manager Flow Scenarios E-34 Library Manager Process Guide. Appendix F Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Overview Note This appendix applies only if you are using Library Manager in the DxD-Expedition flow. You can use DxDesigner to create symbols and import them into the appropriate Symbols partition in a central library. If you have DxDesigner software loaded on your machine, create the symbol in DxDesigner and then use Library Manager to import the symbol into the appropriate Symbol partition. Note that the Dx Symbol Editor, delivered with Library Manager and available from the user interface, can also be used to create a symbol in a specific partition in the central library supporting the DxD-Expedition flow. For more information, see “Creating a DxDesigner Symbol Using Symbol Editor (DxD-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-36. Tip: If you are using the Design Capture/DesignView-Expedition flow, use the Design Capture (DC) Symbol Editor software (see “Creating a Symbol Using DC Symbol Editor (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 2-29. Symbols are stored in a partition within the SymbolLibs\<partition_name>\sym directory. Use Symbol Editor to create and edit a symbol. For supplemental information on creating symbols in DxDesigner, consult the online help and the DxDesigner documentation. Using the DxDesigner Symbol Wizard DxDesigner features a Symbol Creation Wizard which provides a step-by-step, interactive GUIbased methodology for symbol creation. For detailed information on using the Symbol Wizard, consult online help associated with the wizard. Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 F-1 Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Guidelines for Creating Symbols with DxDesigner (DxD-Expedition Flow) Guidelines for Creating Symbols with DxDesigner (DxD-Expedition Flow) Before creating a DxD-Expedition flow symbol, you need to know the PCB-related attributes required for generic and non-generic symbols. Table F-1 shows the attributes required for processing generic and non-generic symbols. Table F-1. Attributes Required for Processing Generic and Non-generic DxD Symbols Non-generic (built-in attributes) DEVICE # (Pin Numbers) SIGNAL NC PKG_TYPE HETERO (if required) Generic Symbols DEVICE (placed at the component level) Note: Other attributes will be processed and annotated using data from the parts database. Whether an attribute's value is annotated depends on settings in the expedition.cfg file. The REFDES attribute is not required to be built-in with a prefix value (for example, “C?”), but, if not specified in the symbol or on the component, will default to a prefix of "U". Also note that the Reference Designator prefix specified in the parts database will not be used. When using the Symbol Creation Wizard in DxDesigner to create a new symbol, the wizard defaults to a valid central library path but does not specify the symbol partition in the central library (Figure F-1). Figure F-1. DxDesigner Symbol Creation Wizard Select a valid symbol library partition from the Library path or alias dropdown list. For example, a valid alias to specify in the dialog box is as follows: <drive>:\<central_library_name>\SymbolLibs\<partition_name> You can also use the File > New command to create a new symbol. This methodology is documented in the following procedure. F-2 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Use the following processes to create a 74f244_half symbol in DxDesigner: 1. On Windows, click Start > Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD > DxDesignerExpedition Flow > Design Entry > DxDesigner to invoke DxDesigner. On UNIX or Linux, key in DxDesigner from your SDD_HOME directory. 2. Click File > New and click the Symbol type icon. 3. Key in the following partition name and symbol name in the Name field. You must type a colon between the partition name and symbol name. Logic_Gates:74f244_half Note When entering the new symbol name, you must precede the symbol name with a valid symbol partition name/alias that already exists in the central library. The partition alias and the symbol name must be separated with a colon (:). If the symbol name is not preceded with a valid partition name and a colon, the created symbol will not be saved to the proper location in the central library folder structure and will not be added to the central library. 4. Click OK; the work area displays. Note that the Symbol type is set by default. 5. Right click the mouse and select Properties from the popup menu. The Use Properties dialog box displays. 6. Adjust the bounding box width to 100 and the height to 100. 7. Set the Symbol Type to Module and click OK. Tip: Click View > Full to readjust the work area to include the new proportions of the bounding box. 8. Click Add > Box and draw the symbol body/rectangle to the dimension shown in Figure F-2 on page F-4. To escape the Add Box command, press Escape or click the select icon. 9. Click Add > Pin and insert pins as shown in Figure F-2. Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 F-3 Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Figure F-2. Symbol 74f244_Half Displayed in DxDesigner Naming Pins and Assigning Pin Attributes Use the following steps to name pins and assign pin attributes to the newly placed pins: 1. Double click the first pin (upper left in the design); the Pin Properties dialog box displays. 2. Type ~G in the Label field and ensure the Visible property is enabled (illustrated in Figure F-3). This is the name of the pin. F-4 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Figure F-3. Pin Properties Dialog Box (DxDesigner) 3. Click the Attributes tab and enter the following attribute name and value in the specified fields. Ensure the Visibility mode is set to Invisible (see Figure F-4): Figure F-4. Assigning Pin Attributes Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 F-5 Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Note If the software prompts you to display expanded attributes, click No. 4. Click Set to add the new attribute name and value to the Attributes list. 5. Add the PINTYPE attribute by entering the following in the specified fields (see Figure F-5): Figure F-5. Assigning a Second Pin Attribute 6. Click Set and click OK and the symbol appears as follows with the first pin defined. If the software prompts you to display expanded attributes, click No. F-6 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Figure F-6. Symbol 74f244_Half in DxDesigner with First Pin Defined 7. Double click the next pin (below the first pin you named); the Pin Properties dialog box displays. Ensure the Name tab displays. 8. Enter A1 in the Label field and click the Attributes tab. 9. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to name the remaining pins in the symbol as shown in Figure F-7 on page F-9. Use the pin names and attributes in Table F-2 and Table F-3 (be sure to increment the pin values on the left side pins and use Y and incremental numbers for the right side pins): Table F-2. Left Side Pin Attributes Pin Name A1 Pin Attributes Label = A1 Name = # Value = 2,11 Name = PINTYPE Value = IN Label = A2 Name = # Value = 4,13 Name = PINTYPE Value = IN Label = A3 Name = # Value = 6,15 Name = PINTYPE Value = IN Visibility Mode Visible Invisible Invisible Visible Invisible Invisible Visible Invisible Invisible A2 A3 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 F-7 Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Table F-2. Left Side Pin Attributes Pin Name A4 Pin Attributes Label = A4 Name = # Value = 8,17 Name = PINTYPE Value = IN Visibility Mode Visible Invisible Invisible Note: If the software prompts you to display expanded attributes, click No. Table F-3. Right Side Pin Attributes Pin Name Y1 Pin Attributes Label = Y1 Name = # Value = 18,9 Name = PINTYPE Value = OUT Label = Y2 Name = # Value = 16,7 Name = PINTYPE Value = OUT Label = Y3 Name = # Value = 14,5 Name = PINTYPE Value = OUT Label = Y4 Name = # Value = 12,3 Name = PINTYPE Value = OUT Visibility Mode Visible Invisible Invisible Visible Invisible Invisible Visible Invisible Invisible Visible Invisible Invisible Y2 Y3 Y4 Ensure the pin names appear as shown in Figure F-7. F-8 Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Figure F-7. 74f244_Half Device in DxDesigner Adding Device, Package Type and Other Attributes Use the following steps to add device, package type, and other required information to the symbol: 1. Press Escape or click the select icon to return to select mode. 2. Click in the design, right-click the mouse button, and select Properties from popup menu; the Symbol Properties dialog box displays (Figure F-8). Library Manager Process Guide, EXP2005 SPac1 F-9 and click Set. key in 100-100000-001 in the Value field. Type DEVICE in the Name field. Symbol Properties Dialog Box (DxDesigner) 3. F-10 Library Manager Process Guide. select Invisible from the Visibility pulldown.Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Figure F-8. DEVICE now appears in the Attribute list (see Figure F-9). EXP2005 SPac1 . Symbol Properties Dialog Box (DxDesigner) . key in 20_PIN_SOIC in the Value field. and click Set. select Invisible from the Visibility pulldown.Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Figure F-9. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 F-11 . Add PKG_TYPE to the Attribute list using the process in Step 3. PKG_TYPE now appears in the Attribute list (Figure F-10). Key in PKG_TYPE in the Name field.One Attribute Assigned 4. 10 VCC.20 Visibility Setting Invisible Invisible Invisible Invisible The Symbol Properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure F-11: F-12 Library Manager Process Guide. Assigning Properties to 74f244_half Symbol Attribute Name HETERO PARTS SIGNAL SIGNAL Attribute Value LOGIC:G244A. EXP2005 SPac1 . (LOGIC:74F244_FULL). The software adds these attributes to the list in alphabetical order: Table F-4. (LOGIC:74F244_HALF) 2 GND.Two Attributes Assigned 5.Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Figure F-10. Enter the attributes in Table F-4 in the dialog box. Symbol Properties Dialog Box (DxDesigner) . Symbol Properties Dialog Box (DxDesigner) . Figure F-12. Move the text and pin properties to resemble the illustration in Figure F-12.Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Creating 74f244_half Symbol Using DxDesigner Figure F-11. Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 F-13 .All Attributes Assigned 6. Click OK in the Symbol Properties dialog box to place properties in the design. Symbol 74f244_Half with Pins Defined Tip: Click Refresh to clear bounding box display problems. Do not to move the pin. only the pin property. 7. Click File > Save to save the 74f244_half symbol. enable the Create Netlist for Layout / Assign Reference Designators and Run the command line after processing options to display the command line sequence in the dialog box. If errors display in the message field. 9. Packaging a DxD Schematic Using the Netlistbased Flow Run the Create PCB Netlist (common) command on the schematic. Click File > Save + Check to save the schematic and check the connectivity of the nets and components within the schematic. EXP2005 SPac1 . Perform the following steps to prepare the schematic design for export to a PCB layout system and package the schematic: 1. Run Save + Check until all errors are resolved.Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Packaging a DxD Schematic Using the Netlist-based Flow 8. Also. fix the problem based on information provided by the error message. Ensure that the Netlist Format / Vendor setting is set to Expedition. Adjust settings in the ViewPCB dialog box as shown in Figure F-13. Click File > Exit to exit DxDesigner. 3. The Create PCB Netlist utility is a bidirectional interface that enables the interchange of structural netlist data between the software tools. the ViewPCB dialog box displays. Netlists are read into and saved in a neutral format. Click Tools > Create PCB Netlist (common). F-14 Library Manager Process Guide. 2. The Results tab displays the outcome of the netlist generation. ViewPCB Dialog Box (DxDesigner) Running Forward Annotation Note Selecting the Run command after processing option invokes the DxDesigner to Expedition PCB dialog box. Library Manager Process Guide. failures. 4. ensure that no errors. Click Run and the software generates the schematic design data within a netlist file based on the selected PCB layout system-specific PCB configuration file. While the software displays various notes and warnings. or fatal errors appear in the Results tab (see Figure F-14).Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Packaging a DxD Schematic Using the Netlist-based Flow Figure F-13. EXP2005 SPac1 F-15 . the DxDesigner to Expedition PCB dialog box displays (Figure F-15). Results Tab (ViewPCB Dialog Box) If the design packages without errors.Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Packaging a DxD Schematic Using the Netlist-based Flow Figure F-14. F-16 Library Manager Process Guide. EXP2005 SPac1 . Complete the DxDesigner to Expedition PCB dialog box as shown in Figure F-15 to configure the data transfer from DxDesigner to Expedition PCB. 5. Expedition PCB Forward Annotation Choice Box 7. specify an existing PCB design to use as the template on which Expedition creates a new design. In the PCB Directory field. specify the output directory for the new design. click OK. Click Yes. specify an existing Expedition Central Library. 6. DxDesigner to Expedition PCB Dialog Box In the Select Central Library field.Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Packaging a DxD Schematic Using the Netlist-based Flow Figure F-15. In the Select Template field. Library Manager Process Guide. The following dialog box displays (Figure F-16): Figure F-16. EXP2005 SPac1 F-17 . Click OK. If a warning box displays saying that “Back annotation has been disabled”. Go to Step 4 on page 4-25 to use Expedition PCB software to forward annotate the design. The software invokes Expedition PCB and the Project Integration dialog box displays. The Options tab remains unchanged. EXP2005 SPac1 .Using DxDesigner for Symbols and Netlist Generation Packaging a DxD Schematic Using the Netlist-based Flow F-18 Library Manager Process Guide. Creating Custom Scripts and Dialog Boxes Library Manager delivers software for customers to create custom scripts and dialog boxes and access them from the software application. See “Creating a User-defined Script or Dialog Box” on page 5-9 and “Opening an Existing User-defined Script or Dialog Box” on page 5-11 for more information. Use the File > Open Script Form to open. VBScript. and edit your own scripts and dialog boxes associated with the Library Management software. Automation scripting allows you to customize select features in the application software for your use.Appendix G Library Manager Automation Scripting Overview Automation scripting allows you to interact with the operation of the product using automation languages like Visual Basic. Functionality includes: • • • • Creating new design elements Modifying design elements Intercepting events allowing you to extend the functionality of the product Changing the settings of the product Library Manager delivers specific automation scripting for use within the tool. This section describes the Library Manager-specific automation scripting. EXP2005 SPac1 G-1 . Library Manager Process Guide. JScript or C++. Library Manager shares three types of automation customization features with Expedition PCB: • • • Shortcut Keys Command Bars Add-in Controls Consult Expedition PCB Automation online help for more information. access. Use the File > New Script Form command to create custom scripts and dialog boxes for use within Library Manager. Access Read-Only G-2 Library Manager Process Guide.lmc) file. Description Returns the name of the application software. Access Read-Only Syntax object. ActiveLibrary Property Syntax Part object <return_type> Description An object expression that evaluates to a Library Manager Application object. EXP2005 SPac1 . Description Identifies the active central library. Name Property Prerequisites None.Library Manager Automation Scripting Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager The following is a list of automation programming interfaces provided by Library Manager: ActiveLibrary Property Prerequisites None.ActiveLibrary The ActiveLibrary property syntax includes these parts: Table G-1. A string that identifies a Library Manger central library (*. Version Table G-3. A string that identifies the software version number. Version Property Prerequisites None. Library Manager Process Guide. FullName Property Prerequisites None. EXP2005 SPac1 G-3 . Access Read-Only Syntax object. Version Property Syntax Part object <return_type> Description An object expression that evaluates to a LibraryManagerApp object. Name Property Syntax Part object <return_type> Description An object expression that evaluates to a LibraryManagerApp object. A string that identifies the name of the active application software.Library Manager Automation Scripting Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager Syntax object.Name Table G-2. Description Returns the version of the application software (for example. EXP2005 SPac1). A string that identifies the directory path and name of the executable program. G-4 Library Manager Process Guide. Access Read/Write Syntax object. Visible Property Syntax Part object Description An object expression that evaluates to a LibraryManagerApp object. Access Read-Only Syntax object.Visible = True | False Table G-5. Description Sets or returns the application's visible property.Library Manager Automation Scripting Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager Description Returns the software application's full name (including directory path to the location of the executable).FullName Table G-4. FullName Property Syntax Part object <return_type> Description An object expression that evaluates to a LibraryManagerApp object. EXP2005 SPac1 . Visible Property Prerequisites None. EXP2005 SPac1 G-5 . Description Enables the application to open a Preview window and display a specified cell object. For example. PreviewCell Method Prerequisites None. PreviewSymbol Method Prerequisites None. ByVal <partition> As String. select a cell object and view the cell in a Preview window. Library Manager Process Guide. ByVal <cell> As String) Table G-6.Library Manager Automation Scripting Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager Table G-5.PreviewCell (ByVal <centralLib> As String. Identifies the cell name to display in the Preview window. Syntax object. PreviewCell Property Syntax Part object centralLib partition cell Description An object expression that evaluates to a LibraryManagerApp object/ Identifies the central library that contains the cell object. Identifies the cell partition within the central library where the cell resides. Visible Property Syntax Part True False Description String that causes objects to be visible String that causes objects to not appear. Identifies the symbol type to display in the Preview window (for example. COMPOSITE. ByVal <symbol> As String. G-6 Library Manager Process Guide.PreviewSymbol (ByVal <centralLib> As String. select a symbol object and view the symbol in a Preview window. ByVal <type> As Long) Table G-7. PreviewSymbol Property Status Part object centralLib partition symbol type Description An object expression that evaluates to a LibraryManagerApp object. and so forth). ByVal <partition> As String.Library Manager Automation Scripting Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager Description Enables the application to open a Preview window and display a specified symbol object. Identifies the symbol name. Syntax object. For example. CloseAllPreviewWindows Method Prerequisites None. MODULE. EXP2005 SPac1 .CloseAllPreviewWindows () OpenURL Method Prerequisites None. Identifies the central library that contains the symbol object. Syntax object. Identifies the symbol partition within the central library when the symbol resides. Description Enables the application to close any Preview window used to view symbols and cells. Library Manager Process Guide. A URL provides the global address of documents and other resources on the World Wide Web (WWW). For example. ByVal <object> As String .OpenURL (ByVal <url> As String) <url> = the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) used by the software to display information in the web browser in Library Manager. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use (for example www or ftp). The software refreshes only the area of the navigator tree that was modified. OnLMCModify Method Property Status Part object centralLib Description An object expression that evaluates to a LibraryManagerApp object. and the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located. ByVal <partition> As String .OnLMCModify (ByVal <centralLib> As String . Syntax object. EXP2005 SPac1 G-7 .Library Manager Automation Scripting Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager Description Opens a specified Uniform Resource Locator (URL) in the default web browser in Library Manager. ByVal <type> As Long) Table G-8. Identifies the central library that contains object modifications that require the Library Navigator Tree to be refreshed. Syntax object. if symbol partitions in the central library were changed. OnLMCModify Method Prerequisites None. only subnodes in the Symbols node of the Library Navigator Tree are refreshed. Description Notifies Library Manager that the central library has changed and the Library Navigator Tree (see “Library Navigation Tree with Central Library Defined” on page 2-4) should be refreshed. OnReusableBlocksEditor(). OnLMCModify Method Property Status Part partition Description Identifies the partition within the central library where edits occurred and require the navigator tree to be refreshed. Syntax object. object type OnReusableBlocksEditor Method Prerequisites None.Library Manager Automation Scripting Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager Table G-8. Also. you can determine the flow mode associated with the central library using FlowMode / FlowType Method). Description Provides the functionality to open a specific central library. You can request a pointer to an open (active) central library using ActiveLibrary Property. Syntax object. EXP2005 SPac1 .OpenLibrary (ByVal <FullName> As String) As IMGCLMLibrary G-8 Library Manager Process Guide. Description Invokes the Reusable Blocks dialog box (see “Managing Reusable Blocks (DC/DV-Expedition Flow)” on page 4-35). OpenLibrary Method Prerequisites None. Identifies the object(s) that changed in the central library and require the navigator tree to be refreshed. Identifies the object type that changed in the central library and require the navigator tree to be refreshed. FlowType MGCLMLibrary FullName Property Prerequisites None. Library Manager Process Guide. Access Read-only. You can also determine the flow mode associated with the central library using FlowMode / FlowType Method).Library Manager Automation Scripting Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager ActiveLibrary Property Prerequisites None. Syntax object. Description Provides the functionality to access a central library that is already open and in use (see ActiveLibrary Property). Access Read-only. Description If you have a pointer to a central library using ActiveLibrary Property and OpenLibrary Method. EXP2005 SPac1 G-9 . then use this method.ActiveLibrary MGCLMLibrary FlowMode / FlowType Method Prerequisites None. Syntax object. Library Manager Automation Scripting Standard Automation Interfaces in Library Manager Description Provides the full name of the active central library. including the directory path). Syntax object. EXP2005 SPac1 .FullName MGCLMLibrary G-10 Library Manager Process Guide. Access Read-only. See OpenLibrary Method and ActiveLibrary Property to display the central library name as well. You can also determine the flow mode associated with the central library using FlowMode / FlowType Method. which allow complex systems to be easily represented and traversed. Cells (or Footprints) Data that includes the graphic and non-graphic information that are grouped together to represent various components in a circuit layout. IBIS Models (Windows only). Expand Allows you to display hidden tables and/or subfolders in the PM Classification Tree. Central Library A central library is a collection of interrelated libraries with an improved level of integrity and consistency checking. partition editing. Collapse Hides tables and/or subfolders below a highlighted folder in the PM Classification Tree. You can choose topdown. EXP2005 SPac1 Glossary-1 . American Standard Code for Information and Interchange (ASCII) A character format standard used by the Windows NT workstation for storing text. such as Design Capture (DC). bottom-up and/or middle-out methodologies. Design Capture (DC) A design entry tool that allows you to create schematic designs which may be partitioned into various function blocks and represented with different levels of hierarchy. An ASCII file can be edited. Libraries are the storage locations for Parts. printed.Glossary Administrator Individual(s) responsible for the manipulation and maintenance of the Parts Manager (PM) database using the Parts Manager Administrator (PMA) interface. Designs then reference a Central Library as a whole. or typed. rather than inter-mixing library files from various locations. The Library Manager interface controls Central Library creation. Client Users that access information in the PM database in read-only mode using other software products. Library Manager Process Guide. and invocation of library editors. An individual library (one of the sub-folders in the Central Library) is a collection of partitions.lmc) which maintains the inventory of the contents in the Central Library. Folders that can expand display a plus (+) sign when you click to expand. and padstacks. A Central Library contains a library control file (. Symbols. Cells. Layout Templates. Folder A user-defined category to which one or more parametric tables (possibly no tables) may belong. if you invoke Library Manager through Design Capture. and parts are launched from within Library Manager. Padstacks. build and place components. Footprints See Cells. Message box The generic name for any dialog box (window) that provides information. analysis. you can access all editors EXCEPT Symbol Editor and Parts Manager. For example. you can access all editors EXCEPT Cell Editor. IBIS Model Provides a complete behavioral description of the input and output elements of a component. Every active component that you intend to simulate must be described by an IBIS model before the signal integrity tool suite can be used to simulate the design. When Library Manager is invoked within a point tool (such as Design Capture. and Parts Manager. press the <ALT> key. Glossary-2 Library Manager Process Guide. only editors that apply to the specific point tool are available. Layout Templates Defines PCB design templates for use by Expedition PCB when starting a new PCB design. or Expedition PCB). All software tools used to create symbols. and route your design. Mnemonics Mnemonics are single characters of a menu selection. If you invoke Library Manager through Expedition PCB. issues a warning. DesignView. Menubar A rectangular area at the top of the client area of a window that contains the titles of the standard pulldown menus for that application. Library Manager Library Manager provides the ability to manage your company library (Central Library) from a single seat without the need to purchase additional licenses for other software tools. EXP2005 SPac1 . Use Expedition PCB to create the board outline. gives the current state of a work in progress. The Available Templates list displays all the available templates in the central library. The mnemonics are the letters underlined on the menu bar and pulldown menus. and type in the character string to invoke the command. IBIS Models. Folders partition parametric data at the highest level during parametric part selection (PPS) operations in the PM database. When the pulldown menu displays. cells. asks a question. and manufacture of printed circuit boards. IBIS models are not available in Library Manager using Linux. such as design entry software (Design Capture and DesignView) and Expedition PCB. layout.Glossary Expedition PCB A point tool for the design. or draws attention to an error. These tables hold userdefinable component parameters. but is still very recognizable. simulation model name. Part Number The part number corresponds to a company (corporate) number. Part numbers are grouped into folders and tables in the PM Classification Tree. When defining a padstack. Each padstack is one of five types: pin (SMD or Through). and Drafting Cells. inventory. through hole. Parametric Part Selection (PPS) Data Data that is associated with internal processes such as design development (cell name. or purchasing (purchase price. and so forth). PPS data can also be associated with external processes such as device parameters (voltage. Parametric Table Parametric tables are user-definable tables stored in the PM database. manufacturer part number. Pin-Through or Via. Many vendor parts have the same speed. manufacturer information (manufacturer name. Every parametric table has a unique folder and table combination associated with it which can be used to locate the table in the PM Classification Tree during parametric part selection (PPS) operations. the Cell Library might be broken up into partitions for SMD Cells. fiducial. test point or via. and function. Pin-SMD. current. For example. packaging. and so forth). Parametric Data Parametric data is any user-definable data (tolerance. A pin represents the trace tie point of the padstack and has an alphanumeric pin number assigned in the Cell Editor. manufacturing (surface mount. you first need to assign one of the above types. and so forth). Partition A partition is a user-defined grouping of data objects. Mechanical Cells. power rating. electrical characteristics. Through Cells. or other external processes. but different manufacturers.Glossary Padstacks A grouping of pads (SMD) and pads and holes (Through). that is tied to a part number. Each padstack is one of five types: Fiducial. the part label is more general than the part name or part number. Part numbers can differentiate these vendor parts. current. cost. EXP2005 SPac1 Glossary-3 . and so forth). mounting hole. the part name is usually more recognizable than the part number. and so forth). Library Manager Process Guide. such as thermal properties. Part Name In the Part Editor software. Padstack Editor Allows you to create padstacks. and so forth). and other information. Part Label In the Part Editor software. Mounting Hole. Pin types may or may not have a hole and are the origin of the padstack. This provides the ability to utilize known good circuitry with the simplicity of placing a single element in a design. and store the circuit in the central library. such as Design Capture (DC) and DesignView. the electrical connections. and pin. symbol and component properties. A padstack can also include information on the finished hole size and the whether the hole is plated. such as adding and deleting part numbers. or pin information. by means of graphic symbols. Parts Manager Parts Manager (PM) is an electronic component management tool that interfaces parametric data stored in a relational database and interfaces with parts data in the DC/DV-Expedition Library Manager flow.Glossary Parts Data Parts data includes gates. pins. gate. the pad graphics. through-pin .spans all physical layers of the board to provide connection to a component pin on all board layers. Symbol Editor A editing environment in which symbols are built and edited.provides for a pin connection on one or more board layers from a surface layer to an internal layer. Symbols A function (gate) or group of functions on a schematic in design entry software. Reusable Blocks A feature in Library Manager used to create circuit blocks in both the layout and schematic files and store them in the central library. Users can design a circuit block in both areas (schematic and layout). verify the circuit. and padstack attributes. Glossary-4 Library Manager Process Guide.represents a pad for a surface-mount device and appears on either the top or bottom physical layer of the board. to define the hole for inserting a component pin. Part Editor A tool that changes parts data entries. symbols and functions of a specific circuit arrangement. can access this data from nodes on the network. depending on the placement of a surface-mount device. surface . The Symbol Editor's editing environment allows you to open multiple libraries and edit multiple symbols during a single session. The pin padstack geometry represents a component pin connection and consists of a geometry name. Users of electronics design applications. Schematic A drawing that shows. on different board layers. pin padstack A pin padstack is the graphical representation of the size and shape of a pad or a series of pads occurring. vertically aligned. A blind pin padstack lets you define optional pin rules. EXP2005 SPac1 . such as Design Capture or DesignView. There are three types of pin padstacks: blind . The mapping between parametric properties and their associated values are stored in the PM database. Character?? .Selects all entities that begin with a specified character (for example. *character . Note: The "?" wildcard character search performs properly on newly created tables and tables that were translated from Version 98.Selects any single character. Tables partition parametric data on a secondary level (behind folder selection) during parametric part selection (PPS) operations. ? . Library Manager Process Guide.X to WG2004.Selects all entities that begin with a specified character and have two characters following it.X to WG2004. *H specifies all files that end with H). 10* specifies all symbols that begin with 10). and insert the ASCII file using the PM Batch Utility or the Insert Parametric Data dialog box. character# .Selects any single digit (0 through 9).Glossary Table A user-defined subcategory to a folder that contains the parametric table file.Selects all entities that begin with a specified character and a single digit (but not a character). EXP2005 SPac1 Glossary-5 .Selects all available entities (zero or more characters) Character* . Wildcard Searches The following examples show the types of wildcard searches that you can make: # .Selects entities that begin with a specified character and has one character following it. Character? . delete the table. "?" wildcard searches do not work properly on tables that were translated from Version 99. extract data in the table to an ASCII file.Selects all entities that end with a specified character (for example. However. To work around this problem. * . Glossary-6 Library Manager Process Guide. 5e* or 5e? as a search criteria is invalid. *[!character] . C. For example. or D. followed by a digit (or digits). B. For example. [ad] returns all entities that begin with the letters A.Selects all entities that start within the range you specify.Selects all entities that begin with a specified character followed by any character that falls within a specified range of characters.Selects all entities that do not end with the specified character. character[!character-character]# . For example. *[!W] returns all entities that do not end with the character W. Note: Searches for values in scientific notation cannot end with a wildcard. EXP2005 SPac1 .Selects all entities that conform to a specified character string (for example *r* returns all entities that have "r" in the string).Glossary *character* . [character-character] . 2-7. 5-14 Batch Update Utility. 4-13 Central Library to a Project.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index —A— Accessing a Central Library. 4-20 Add Pins Range dialog box. 3-8 Parametric Data to Parts. 2-18 altran utility. 2-89 Attaching a Symbol Library to DxD Project Search Path. 2-74 Creating. 3-101 Auto Router. G-8 OpenURL method. 2-73 Add Component dialog box (DxDesigner). 4-24 —C— CellDBLibs Subdirectory. G-7 OnReusableBlocksEditor method. 2-83 Central Library to a DxD Project. 2-34 Automation interfaces in Library Manager. 4-24 Backing Up Central Library Files. 2-45 Adding Attachments to the Parts Manager Database. 2-32 Properties to a DC/DV symbol. 5-1 —B— Back Annotation. 2-11. 2-58 PCB Design. 2-17 Add Circle Command.prp File. 2-6 Cells Copying. EXP2005 SPac1 Automation scripting. 2-65 Drawing. G-1 ActiveLibrary property. 3-14 Symbols to a DxD schematic. 4-30 Automatic Pin Numbering. 4-30 Updates to a Schematic. 2-81 Symbols as Default Symbols. 5-9 Activating All Partitions for Search. G-5 Version property. 4-3 Assigning Alternate Symbols. G-6 FlowMode/FlowType method. 2-67 CentLib. G-8 OpenLibrary method. 1-3 ACRO_HOME variable. 2-34 Pins to a DC/DV Design. 2-17. 2-57 Building a Pad. G-6 PreviewCell method. G-3 Visible property. 4-20 Altering Search Path Schemes. 2-35 Properties to Parts Manager. G-9 CloseAllPreviewWindows method. 2-85 Pin Numbers. 2-57 a Through-Hole Padstack. 3-55 Part Numbers Manually to the PM Database. 2-88 Pin Names to Half Package. 2-65 Patterns. G-2 Library Manager Process Guide. 2-74 Package. 4-2 Full Package. G-2 OnLMCModify Method. A-13 ASIC/FPGA Toolkits. 4-24 Automatic Back Annotation. 4-17 Attachment Data. 3-97 Parameters to a Parametric Table. G-5 PreviewSymbol method. 3-97. G-4 Available Templates List. 3-71 Index-1 . 3-91 Bottom Mount. G-2. 2-65 Moving. 2-59 a Surface Mount Pad. G-9 Name property. F-4 Pin Names to Full Package. 3-29 Pin Numbers to DC/DV symbol. 2-86 Pin attributes in a DxD design. G-9 FullName property. 3-79. G-3. 2-88 Create Package Cell Dialog Box. 2-58 Model file partition in the workspace tree. 5-14 Creating a Central Library. 3-17 Checking Property Verification Settings. 2-97 New Model. 2-6 Upgrading for UNIX and Linux Use. 1-13 Central Library (. 2-85. 2-1 Central Library partitions. 2-65 Central Library. 4-6 Changing Central Library File. 2-12 Closing a Design. 4-13 DxD Project and link to a Central Library. 1-4 Connecting components in DxD. 4-14 DxD Symbols. 4-2 Dx Design Project. 2-18 Index-2 Library Manager Process Guide. G-1 Design Project. 2-66. 2-90 Symbols via the workspace tree. 5-11 View Model. 2-92 Modify Cell and Symbol Pins. 4-42 Cells via the workspace tree. 3-4 Configuring UNIX workstation. 2-10 Packaging Parts (Expedition). 4-23 Compiling DC/DV Schematics. 4-10 Common Database directory (CDB). 2-75. 2-55 Using Keyboard Shortcuts. 2-5 Backups. 4-10 Commands Copy Model. 2-14 Custom dialog boxes. 1-5 Configuring WDIR variable on Windows. D-28 Edit Model.lmc) File. 2-15 Cells. 2-65. 2-5 Editing or modifying in the DxDExpedition flow. 2-91 Model files. 4-14 Managing model data files. 2-96 DxDatabook Properties. 2-8 Recommended permissions. 2-3 Description and definition. 2-36 DxD Symbols using the wizard. G-1 Custom scripts. 1-5 Configuring Parts Manager Administrator. 4-4 Cell Partitions. 2-99 Padstacks via the workspace tree. 4-10 Configuring Linux workstation. 3-39 Parametric Table Name. 2-95 Find (Library Navigator Tree). 2-90 Opening a Central Library. 2-1. 4-6 Compiling a DxD schematic. 4-10 Common Database (CDB) Compiler (DC/DV). EXP2005 SPac1 . 2-95 Common Database (CDB) Compiler. 3-41 Cell partitions from the workspace tree. 2-94 Multiple Search Path Schemes. 1-3 Associating a flow type. 2-101 Parameters from One Parametric Table to Another. 2-37 Flattened Netlist (DC/DV). 1-6 Setting up partitions. 2-8 Importing DxD Symbols. 3-17 Parts via the workspace tree. 2-96 Delete Model. 1-17 Import Model. 2-14 Subdirectories and Files.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Central Library Accessing. 2-2 a New Schematic. 2-96 Objects in the workspace tree. 2-94 New Script Form. 2-82. 2-27 Linking a DxD Project. 5-3 Model files. 2-55. 1-15 Viewing properties. 2-2 Defining a flow type. 2-74 Existing Layout Template. 4-10 Holes. 5-9 Open Script Form. 2-4 Opening a pre-EXP2005 central library. 1-3 Determining flow type association. 2-70 Creating a Central Library. 4-22 Copying a reusable block. C-1 Viewing object associations. 2-78 Layout Templates. 2-89 Defining Clearances. 2-72 Preferences in Dx Symbol Editor. 5-1 Custom Search Path Schemes. 2-16 Partition Search Paths. 4-36 New PCB Design. 4-45 Cells. 3-21 Library Manager Process Guide. 2-25 IBIS Models. 2-39 Project Editor (DxDesigner). 2-94 Partition Editor. 2-101 Create Package Cell. 4-20 Add Pins Range. 2-74 Part partitions from the workspace tree. 2-37 Template. 2-14 Symbols. 4-5 Properties. 2-102 Parts. 2-25 Symbols via the workspace tree. 3-5 Part Entries. 2-97 New. 4-18 Project Integration. EXP2005 SPac1 Index-3 . 2-55 Symbol Partitions. 4-19 Surface Mount Pad. 2-17 Parts data. 2-74 Pins Mappings. 2-25 Parametric Tables. 2-66.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z New Gate Information. 2-15 Add Component (DxDesigner). 5-2 Pads. 2-74 Planes. 2-25 Model files. 2-14 Partition Open. 4-25 New Template from an Existing Design File. 2-32 Import (Part Editor). B-1 Design Capture Project. 4-2 Design Configurations dialog box. 2-17 Partitions in a Central Library. 2-45 Copy Padstack. 2-83. 3-42 Reusable Blocks. 4-25 Project Settings. 2-55 Parametric Tables. 4-17 Device data mapping (DxD to Expedition). 2-70 New Model Partition. 2-86 Pin Properties (DxDesigner). 4-6 Library Services. 2-16 New Reusable Block. 2-54 Design Architect and Expedition Tools. F-4 Place Parts and Cells. 4-37 New SPICE Model. 2-22 Devices. 2-22 Layers. 4-15 Design project (dproj) file (DxD-Expedition Library Manager). 2-94 New Symbol. F-16 Edit Properties. 3-33 Partitions from the workspace tree. 2-18 Part Numbers from the PM Database. 2-70 Design Configurations (DxD-Expedition Library Manager). 4-4 New Cell. 2-22 Deleting a reusable block. 2-27 Modify Pins. 2-31 New Verilog Model. 2-30 Partition Search Paths. 3-41 Symbol partitions from the menubar. 2-78 New logical/physical reusable block. 4-15 DxDesigner to Expedition PCB. 2-60 Partition Search Path Scheme. 2-9 Dialog Box. 2-55. 2-25 Symbols. 2-102 Padstacks. 4-25 Place Pins. 2-20 Vias. 2-29 Symbols in Dx Symbol Editor. 2-22 Units Display Settings. 2-11 —D— Default Symbol. 2-66. 2-22 Pads. 2-73 Property Definition Editor. 2-91 New Part Partition. 2-14 Parts Partitions. 4-35 Schematic workspace in DxDesigner. 2-56 Padstacks. 2-96 Objects from the workspace tree. 2-74 Graphic Levels. 2-17 Pin Mapping. 2-44 Origin. 2-22 Symbol Properties (DxDesigner). 2-47 Assigning properties to pins. 4-19 Heterogeneous symbols. D-2 Removing tables. 4-9 dproj file. D-35 Editing parametric data. D-28 DxDesigner Adding symbols to a schematic. A-1 DxDatabook Data Editor. 2-12 Library Manager Process Guide. D-12 Assigning properties to new tables. D-28 Parametric databases and supported platforms. E-1 DxWebPack. 2-43 Symbol origin.dbc) file. D-9 Creating a configuration (*. 2-50 Adding pins. A-14 DxDesigner to Expedition device data mapping. 4-6. 4-25 Setup Parameters. 4-13 DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard. D-3 DxWebPack configuration. D-25 —E— Editing a reusable block. 2-37 Defining pin attributes. 2-42 DxD Symbol Creation Wizard. D-17 Using a configuration (*. 2-68. 2-31 Dx Symbol Editor Adding device and package type attributes. D-30 Connecting to parametric databases. 2-72 Drawing a Symbol. 2-42 Adjusting symbol rectangle size. D-25 Editing database table properties. 2-19 ViewPCB (DxDesigner). 2-95 Pads. 4-24 Displaying I/V Curves. A-1 DxD-Expedition Library Manager limitations. 4-20 Connecting components. 4-17 Draw Mode Command. D-12 Adding a table to a configuration (*. D-2 Specifying a web-based data source.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Property Verification. 2-8 Data source names in DxDatabook. D-15 Adding component libraries to a configuration (*. EXP2005 SPac1 Index-4 . 2-36 Setting fill color. 2-62 Partition Search Paths. 2-62 IBIS Models Within IBIS Librarian.dbc) file. 2-42 Assigning pin numbers. 5-4 Invisible Text. 2-39 Specifying symbol type attribute. 5-11 DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager.dbc) file. F-14 Display Control Dialog Box. 4-36 Select Project File.dbc) file from existing configuration. E-2 DxDesigner Project. 2-42 Overview. 2-44 Adjusting symbol outline dimensions. 2-36 Holes. F-9 Units Display. F-16 DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard. 4-33 Reusable Blocks. 2-20 Unreserve Partitions. D-1 Adding a table to a configuration. 4-22 Creating a schematic workspace. D-3 Creating a configuration (*. D-30 DxDatabook Properties command. 5-3 Model files. D-33 Setting environment variables. 2-37 DxD to Expedition flow wizards. 2-13 Replace Cell. 2-9 DxDesigner to Expedition PCB dialog box. 2-42 Setting Preferences. 2-17 Property Verification.dbc) file. 2-65. D-37 Editing properties. D-22 DxD Symbols in Dx Symbol Editor. D-8 Viewing table properties. D-11 Creating an ODBC data source on Windows. 2-47 Creating a Symbol. 4-42 Central Library Name or Location (DxDExpedition flow). 5-2 Library Manager Process Guide. D-1 *. 2-72 Fit Board Command. 3-34 Internal Time Stamp.dproj (DxD-Expedition Library Manager). 2-62 Viewed in the workspace tree. 2-85 PPS Data With Attachment Data. 4-24 IBIS Librarian. 1-5. 1-12 objects in the workspace tree. 2-68. 4-19 Find command (Library Navigator Tree). 5-8 EPD_ACROREAD_BIN variable. 5-7 File Viewer. 5-3 Forward Annotation (all Library Manager flows). 5-9 Open Script Form command. 1-5.dbc. 4-35 —F— Fiducial. 2-79 DxD symbols into a Central Library. 2-23 Symbols.prp. 2-11 Exiting Parts Manager Administrator. 2-6 Import Dialog Box (Part Editor). E-1 Holes Associations with pads. EXP2005 SPac1 Index-5 . 2-20 Environment variables for Linux. 5-4 Library Manager. 2-23 —H— Heterogeneous and sub-gated parts. 3-24 PPS Data into the PM Database.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Symbols. 2-23 Parts. 2-10 Reusable Block software. 2-27 IBIS Models. 2-92 Padstacks. 2-78 Importing Cells. 5-7 Introduction Library Manager. 2-23 Model file. 2-30. E-1 Types. 2-103 Files *. 5-1 Invisible Text. E-32 Heterogeneous symbols. 2-23. 3-64 Pin names. 5-8 New Script Form command. E-2 Gerber Plot Setup File. 1-1 Using Other Software Tools and Library Manager Utilities. 2-2 Library PDF Documenter. 2-76 Inserting Parametric Tables from an ASCII File. 2-23. 4-17 CentLib. 2-23 Padstacks. 3-71 viewdraw. 2-63 Fit All Command. 2-11. 4-24 Expedition style zoom (DxDesigner). 5-8 Environment variables for UNIX. 2-62 —I— IBIS Librarian. 2-23 Parametric Data into a Table. 3-101 Referenced Objects. 2-29 Electrical Units Display Format. 5-9 Establishing Common Properties in a Central Library. 4-24. 4-9 Invoking Expedition PCB. 1-17 Padstack elements in the workspace tree. 4-16 Expedition to DxDesigner device data mapping. 4-29 Forward Annotation.ini. 2-24 IBIS Models. 4-25 —G— Generic heterogeneous symbols. 1-17 Finding Objects in the Project Workspace Tree. 3-103 Expedition PCB. 5-11 Pre-existing EXP2005 central library. 5-3 IBISModels Subdirectory. 2-23 Symbols and Cells to the Parts Database. 2-24 Symbols. 2-8. 2-9 Exporting Cells. 1-1 Standard automation interfaces. 2-90 Manipulating Data in a Central Library File. 1-3 Product Description. 2-92 Viewing a model file. 2-6 Libraries tab. 2-23. 2-96 Editing a model file. G-1 Creating custom dialog boxes. G-2 Subdirectories and files. 2-6 Library Navigator Tree viewer. 2-23 SPICE files. 5-12 Material Editor. 2-96 Creating a model file. 1-13 Library Manager Automation scripting. 2-85. 2-6 Layout Templates. 4-5 Physical Design Cells and Schematic Symbols. 4-6 LayoutTemplates Subdirectory. 1-15 Library PDF Documenter. E-1 —M— Managing Library Data. 2-9 Mapping Expedition to DxDesigner device data. 2-75. 2-91 Deleting a model file. 5-6 Limitations of DxD-Expedition Library Manager. 5-1 Dialog Box. 2-103 Logging Out of Parts Manager Administrator. D-1 Editing a Central Library (DxD-Expedition flow. 4-36 —J— Job Management Wizard (Expedition PCB). 4-24 —K— Keyboard Shortcuts. 5-7 Index-6 Library Manager Process Guide. G-1 DxDatabook Data Editor. 5-2 Layout Subdirectory. 2-95 Importing. 2-27 Using IBIS functionality. G-1 Creating custom scripts. 2-90 Copying a model file. 3-12 Material / Process Editor. 5-1 Verilog A files.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Select Script Language dialog box. 4-25. 5-8 Library Services. 2-23 Mapping DxDesigner device data to parts data. C-1 LogFiles Subdirectory. 5-12 MGC_PKG_XINFO environment variable. 2-90 Templates. 5-9. 4-13 Central Library and Project. 5-11 Linking Central Library and DxD Project. 2-6. 2-23 Considerations When Using Library Services. 2-88 —L— Layer Stackup. 3-17 Mounting Hole. 1-1 Prerequisites. 2-24 Accessible from Expedition PCB Environment. 4-2 Central Library and Project File. 2-24 Dialog Box. 2-74 Linux environment variable settings. 1-5 lmcwin2unix. 5-12 Overview. 2-8 Material / Process Editor. 2-82. 3-103 Logical/Physical reusable block. 2-95 Modifying Central Library. 2-94 Creating a partition in a central library. 2-9 Mapping Properties to Parameters in Parts Manager. 3-39 Parametric Table Name. EXP2005 SPac1 . B-1 Model data. E-32 Project Workspace Tree viewer. 2-4 a New PCB Job. 2-31 Nongeneric heterogeneous symbols. 4-23 Copying objects in the workspace tree. 2-1 Creating Central Library partitions. 2-90 Modify Cell and Symbol Pins. 1-11 DxD-Expedition Library Manager limitations. 5-11. 2-102 Library Manager Process Guide. A-1 DxD-Expedition Library Manager. 1-1 Library Manager automation scripting. D-1 DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard. 4-24. 2-90 Model data (Verilog and SPICE). 2-32 Pins in a DxD design. E-2 —O— Open Script Form command. 1-5 Oracle Client. 2-11 Generic and nongeneric heterogeneous symbols. 4-25 Operating Systems supported by Library Manager. 2-90 Symbols via the workspace tree. F-4 Project Files. 1-8 Library Navigator Tree viewer. G-1 DC/DV-Expedition Library Manager. 2-15 New Dialog Box. A-14 DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard. 2-1 Central Library. C-1 Material / Process Editor. E-1 Heterogeneous symbols (generic and nongeneric). 2-101 Padstack Editor. 2-74 Objects in the workspace tree. 2-14 Creating custom scripts and dialog boxes. A-1 DxDatabook Data Editor. 2-90 Model data in Library Manager. 5-12 Model data. 5-7 Prerequisites. 4-3 New Script Form command. 4-3 Net Class Information. 1-5 Symbol Editor. E-2 Library Manager. 1-3 Associating a flow type to a central library. 5-9 New Symbol Dialog Box. D-2 Organizing Models by Device. 5-3 Origin (Dx Symbol Editor). E-2 Heterogeneous symbols. 5-11 Opening a Central Library. 1-3 Compiling and packaging a DxD schematic. 1-3 Problems with Heterogeneous and subgated parts. 4-35 Setting up Central Library partitions.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Moving Cells via the workspace tree. 2-102 DxD to Expedition flow wizards. 4-3 New Project Wizard. 2-42 Overview Accessing a Central Library. E-1 —N— Naming DC/DV Pins in a Design. 2-14 Supported Operating Systems. 2-99 Creating a Central Library. 1-9 Deleting objects from the workspace tree. 5-6 Types of Heterogeneous symbols. 1-12 Reusable Blocks. 2-97 Moving objects in the workspace tree. D-1 DxDatabook user configuration file (*. 1-15 lmcwin2unix. 4-4 New Project Command.dbc). G-1 Library Manager Process Flows. 4-2. E-1 Establishing Common Properties in a Central Library. 5-2 New Cell Partition. 2-55 Deleting partitions from the workspace tree. 2-101 Parts via the workspace tree. EXP2005 SPac1 Index-7 . 1-9 DxD-Expedition Library Manager interface. 3-33 Inserting PPS Data. 5-8 Performing Backups. 2-90 Moving. 2-7 PartsManager Subdirectory. B-1 Using DxD Symbol Creation Wizard. 2-24 Parts Copying. 3-24 Renaming. 3-21 Inserting from an ASCII File. 4-10 DxDesigner schematics. 2-18 Custom Search Path Schemes. 5-7 Accessed by Other Users. 5-14 Pin Mapping Dialog Box. 5-5 Using the Libraries tab. 2-75 Adding to the PM Database Manually. 1-7 Partition Editor Altering Search Path Schemes. 3-5 Deleting Tables. 1-13 Visual IBIS Editor. 2-30 Partition Search Paths. 3-97 Adding Parametric Data to Parts. 3-4 Parts Numbers in the PM Database. 3-91 Configuring. 3-89 Validation Utility. 2-16 Creating a symbol partition from the menubar. 4-23 Pads. 2-15 Creating a part partition from the workspace tree. 3-29 Deleting Part Numbers. 2-75 Part Name. 2-24 Creating.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Upgrading Central Libraries for Linux and UNIX Use. 3-33 PartsDBLibs Subdirectory. 2-17 Partitions. EXP2005 SPac1 . 2-24 Temp_Symbol. 2-8 Schematics. D-2 Parametric Tables Adding Parameters. 2-86 Pin Numbering. 3-8 Creating. 2-7 Paste Across Icon. 2-14 Symbol. C-1 Using Design Architect with Expedition Tools. 2-74 Using IBIS functionality. 3-79. 2-68 Parameter Setup. 3-4 PM/PDB Synchronization Utility. 2-102 in Red Text. 5-6 Using IBIS functionality in Part Editor. 2-81 PDF Documenter. 2-18 Multiple Search Path Schemes. 2-76. 2-24 Reserved. 2-18 Partition Open Dialog Box. 2-34 Pin Numbers Assigned Automatically. 2-90 Parts Manager Administrator Batch Update Utility. 5-5 Part Label. 3-55 Adding Part Numbers Manually. 2-62 Padstack Editor Overview. F-14 Parts in Expedition Central Library. 3-34 Parts Manager Working Directory. 3-29 Index-8 Library Manager Process Guide. 2-75 Part Numbers. 5-4 Workflow for DC/DV Library Manager. 2-14. 2-14 Creating a cell partition from the workspace tree. 2-14 Deleting via the workspace tree. 2-59 Associations with holes. 2-29 Temp_Cell. 1-6 Workflow for DxDesigner to Expedition Library Manager. 2-6 Panning. 2-83. 4-11 Packaging a DxD schematic. 2-81 —P— Packaging DC/DV Schematics. 2-62 Viewed in the workspace tree. 3-17 Part Editor. 5-7 PanelTemplates Subdirectory. 2-37 Using IBIS functionality in Library Services. 3-70 Parts Manager Database Adding Attachments. 2-22 Parametric database types supported by DxDatabook. 2-65. 4-8 Dialog Box. 2-101 Library Manager Process Guide. 4-20 Adjusting symbol outline dimensions (Dx Symbol Editor). 4-6 Place Line Command. D-25 Configuring Parts Manager Administrator. 4-22 Copying a cell. 1-5 Preview Available Cells. 3-55 Adding Part Numbers to the PM Database. 3-97 Adding DC/DV symbol properties.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Pin Properties dialog box (DxDesigner). 3-34 Prerequisite tasks Adjusting Central Libraries for Use on Linux. 2-42 Assigning a Layout Template. 2-35 Adding device and package type attributes (Dx Symbol Editor).dbc) file (DxDatabook Data Editor). 2-81 Assigning pin numbers (Dx Symbol Editor). 4-17 Building a Pad. 4-23 Compiling and Packaging a Schematic. 2-47 Associating a flow type to a central library. 1-3 Setting Central Library Permissions. 1-4 Configuring Linux Workstations. 5-7 Place Device Command. 2-31 Dialog Box. 2-58 Checking Property Verification Settings. 2-3 Attaching a Symbol Library to a DxD Project Search Path. 2-83 Assigning pin attributes in DxD. 3-8 Adding Parametric Data to Parts. 4-9 Placing Devices in a Design. F-4 Pin-SMD. 2-44 Adding Properties to Parts Manager. 3-29 Adding Pin Numbers to Pins (DC/DV). 4-6. D-30 Assigning properties to pins (Dx Symbol Editor). 3-4 Configuring WDIR variable on Windows. 2-34 Place Wire Command. 2-74 Copying a model file. 1-5 Overview. 2-47 Assigning Pin Numbers (Part Editor). 2-35 PPS Data Insertion. 1-4 Connecting components in DxDesigner. 1-4 Configuring UNIX Workstations. 4-7 Procedure Adding a table to a library configuration (DxDatabook Data Editor). D-12 Adding a table to the configuration (*. 2-81 Assigning properties to new tables (DxDatabook Data Editor). EXP2005 SPac1 Index-9 . 2-12 Compiling a DxD schematic. 2-57 Building a Through-Hole Padstack. D-15 Adding Attachment Data. 2-65 Symbols and Devices. 4-25 Place Pins Command. 2-96 Copying a padstack. 5-7 Pin-Through. 2-59 Building a Surface Mount Padstack. 4-6 Text. 4-11 Configuring DxWebPack on Windows (DxDatabook Data Editor). 1-5 Configuring the WDIR variable (Windows). F-4 Assigning Pin Numbers. 2-34 Adding pins (Dx Symbol Editor). 2-1. 2-50 Adding Parameters to a Parametric Table. 4-8 Parts and Cells (Expedition PCB). 1-6 Supporting Mixed Operating System Usage. 2-66. 3-14 Adding symbols to a DxD schematic. 4-24 Patterns. 2-31 Place Parts and Cells Dialog Box. 2-42 Adjusting symbol rectangle size (Dx Symbol Editor). 4-6 Assigning Alternate Symbols. 2-72 Place Text Command. D-9 Creating a configuration (*. D-3 Creating Cell Partitions. 2-62 Editing parametric data (DxDatabook Data Editor). 3-17 Creating a cell partition from the workspace tree. 2-90 Copying a reusable block. 4-14 Creating a model file. 4-42 Editing data source names (Data Source Manager dialog box). 2-92 Importing Cells Using Library Services. 2-65 Creating Cells in a Partition. 2-102 Deleting Parametric Tables. 2-36 Creating an ODBC data source on Windows (DxDatabook Data Editor). 2-37 Creating a symbol partition from the menubar. 1-12 Finding objects in the workspace tree. 2-94 Creating a new logical/physical reusable block. D-37 Editing properties (DxDatabook Data Editor). D-22 Editing database table properties (DxDatabook Data Editor). 5-2 Creating Partition Search Paths. 5-3 Copying objects in the workspace tree. 1-17 Finding padstack elements. 2-55 Copying Existing Layout Template. 2-1. 2-54 Deleting objects from the workspace tree. 2-91 Creating a New Schematic. 3-41 Creating Cells. 2-63 Importing a model file. 2-31 Editing a model file. 2-14 Creating New Template from an Existing Design File. 3-55 Finding objects in the tree. 2-44 Defining Units Display Settings. 4-42 Copying a symbol. 2-99 Copying Parameters from One Parametric Table to Another. D-28 Establishing Common Properties. EXP2005 SPac1 . 2-15 Creating a Central Library. 4-35 Creating a schematic workspace in DxDesigner. 2-59 Defining pin attributes (Dx Symbol Editor). 2-95 Editing a reusable block. 2-96 Deleting a reusable block. D-35 Editing pads and holes from the workspace tree. 2-102 Drawing a Symbol. 3-103 Exporting Parametric Data to an ASCII File. 4-19 Creating a Surface Mount Padstack. 3-21 Deleting Part Numbers from the PM Database. 2-70 Creating Central Library partitions. D-11 Creating a DxD Project. 3-33 Deleting partitions from the workspace tree. 2-2 Creating a configuration (*. 2-29 Creating a symbol in Dx Symbol Editor. 3-41 Defining Padstacks. 2-16 Creating a Reusable Block.dbc) file (DxDatabook Data Editor) from existing configuration.dbc) file (DxDatabook Data Editor). 2-20 Deleting a model file. 3-42 Creating Symbol Partitions. 4-36 Creating a new model file partition via the workspace tree. 2-14 Creating a Symbol Using Dx Symbol Editor. 2-74 Creating Parts Partitions. 3-5 Creating a part partition from the workspace tree.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Copying a part. 2-17 Creating Parts. 2-55 Creating a Symbol. 2-11 Exiting Parts Manager Administrator. 4-4 Creating a Parametric Table. 4-45 Deleting a symbol. 3-47 Index-10 Library Manager Process Guide. 2-76 Importing Symbols Using Library Services. 3-64 Importing PDBs Using Library Services. 2-74 Moving a part. 5-4 Invoking Library Manager. D-2 Setting environment variables on Linux. 4-32 Refreshing a Display. 4-23. 4-16 Setting fill color (Dx Symbol Editor). 2-19 Unreserving Partitions. F-14 Performing Gate Swapping. 3-12 Modifying a Central Library File. C-1 Library Manager Process Guide. 2-10 Invoking Expedition PCB. 4-44 Renaming Parametric Tables. 1-5 Setting environment variables on UNIX. 3-52 Importing DxD symbols into a CL. 3-39 Moving a cell. 4-24 Invoking IBIS Librarian. 2-32 Opening a Central Library. D-12 Setting Up Parameters. 2-39 Setting up component libraries to the configuration (*. 3-45 Importing Parametric Data into a Table. 4-8 Placing Pins and Cell Graphics. 2-42 Setting preferences in Dx Symbol Editor. 2-43 Transferring data from DxD to Expedition PCB. 2-101 Naming pins in DxD. 2-19 Updating Part Numbers in the PM Database. 3-17 Replacing Cells (Expedition PCB). 3-49 Importing pin names. 4-27 Placing Devices in a Design. 2-22 Specifying symbol type attribute (Dx Symbol Editor). 1-17 Searching for padstack elements. 3-101 Importing Symbols and Cells to the Parts Database. F-16 Translating a DA schematic to Expedition PCB. 3-79 Moving objects in the workspace tree. 3-57 Removing tables (DxDatabook Data Editor). 4-35 Invoking the Find command. 2-85 Importing PPS Data with Attachments. 2-55 Moving Data Between PM Database and PDB. 3-34 Invoking a pre-EXP2005 central library. 1-17 Invoking Visual IBIS Editor. 2-4 Opening a New PCB Job. 4-25 Packaging a DxD schematic. 1-5 Setting Expedition zoom style. 4-33 Searching for objects in the workspace tree. 2-90 Moving a symbol. F-4 Naming Pins on a DC/DV Symbol. D-33 Renaming a Dx symbol. 5-4 Linking a Central Library With a Project File. 4-8 Removing Parametric Data from the PM Database. B-1 Unreserving Library Partitions.dbc) file (DxDatabook Data Editor). 3-24 Inserting PPS Data into the PM Database. 2-27 Importing Padstacks Using Library Services.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Importing Data from Another Central Library File. 4-5 Linking a DxD Project to a Central Library. 3-43 Inserting Parametric Tables from ASCII. 2-2 Invoking reusable blocks. EXP2005 SPac1 Index-11 . 2-67 Pushing Top Cell to Bottom Cell. 2-52 Renaming a reusable block. 2-63 Setting DxDatabook Data Manager environment variables. 4-14 Mapping Properties to Parameters in Parts Manager. 3-68 Upgrading Central Libraries for Linux and UNIX Use. 2-11 Property Verification Settings. 4-24. 1-9 Project Editor dialog box. 4-24 Running CDB Compiler on a DC/DV Schematic. 2-18 Replace Cell Dialog Box. 4-33 Refresh Library Status icon. 4-39 Reuse Subdirectory. 2-17 Index-12 Library Manager Process Guide.dbc) file (DxDatabook Data Editor). D-1 Using File Viewer. 4-39 Viewing table properties (DxDatabook Data Editor). 3-17 Reordering Partition Search Path Scheme. 2-24. 4-42 Invoking the editor. 1-13 Project Workspace Tree viewer. F-14 Schematic workspace in DxDesigner. 2-5 Viewing a model file. EXP2005 SPac1 . 1-9 DxD-Expedition Library Manager. 4-17 Project Settings Dialog Box.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Using a configuration (*. 4-11. 4-42 Deleting. 4-45 Editing. B-1 Using DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager. 2-32. 2-62 Viewing reusable block properties. 1-18 Viewing a central library flow type. 4-5 Project Workspace Tree (Libraries tab). 4-25 Project Search Path (DxD-Expedition Library Manager). 2-5 Viewing pad and hole associations in the workspace tree. 3-70 Using PM/PDB Synchronization Utility. 1-12 Properties Dialog Box. 4-44 Viewing properties. 4-35 Renaming. 4-33 Reserved Partitions. 4-19 Search Path Schemes. 4-18 Project Integration Dialog Box. C-1 Symbols via the workspace tree (Dx only). 2-7 Route Swap Gates. 2-52 Renaming Parametric Tables. F-2 Using the Libraries tab. 4-10 Schematic Compilation and Packaging (DxDExpedition LM). 2-97 Using New Project Wizard. 2-73 Property Definition Editor. 5-12 Process Flows DC/DV-Expedition Library Manager. 2-103 Using Library Services to Import Symbols. 4-33 Replacing Cells (Expedition PCB). 4-32 —R— Reducing Error Checking. 4-35 Copying. 4-10 Schematic Compilation and Packaging (DC/DV). 4-3 Using Part Editor. 3-99 Viewing central library properties. C-1 Using Modify Pins dialog box. 2-95 Viewing associated objects in the Library Navigator Tree. 2-12 Pushing Top Cell to Bottom Cell. 4-24. 2-14 Reusable Blocks. C-1 Central Library directories for UNIX. 4-35 Logical/Physical type. 4-8 Removing Part Numbers from the PM Database. 2-74 Using PM Batch Update Utility. 2-12 Reference Designator. 1-13 Using wildcard characters for object searches. 3-89 Using Symbol Wizard to create DxD symbols. 4-44 Central Library directories for Linux. 2-25 Refreshing the Display. 1-15 Viewing Attachment Data. 3-91 Using PM Validation Utility. 3-33 Renaming a reusable block. D-30 Process Editor. D-8 Using Design Architect with Expedition. 2-25 Using lmcwin2unix. 4-10 —S— Saving a Design. 1-17 Partitions in use while using Library Services. 2-20 Unreserve Partitions. D-1 Expedition PCB. 2-74 PCB Layout Template. 2-7 —T— Tables Adding Parameters. G-2 Subdirectories and Files of a Central Library. 1-5 Swap Gates Command. 2-14. 2-20 Component Properties.ora file. 3-8 Creating. 3-5 Inserting from an ASCII File. F-2 Symbol Editor. 3-24 Renaming. 4-27 Swapping Gates. 2-12 Setup Parameters. 2-3 Setting Fill color in Dx Symbol Editor. 2-22 Units Display. E-32 Supporting heterogeneous symbols.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Searching for objects in the Project Workspace Tree. 5-11 Selecting a flow type when creating a central library. 2-6 Sub-gated parts (DxDesigner). 5-3 Signal Vision. 1-15 for objects in the workspace tree. 3-17 Temp_Cell Partition. 3-4 Precision for Electrical/Physical Properties. 3-68 Using Batch Update Utility. 5-2 Transferring data from DxD to Expedition PCB. 4-25 Select Script Language dialog box. 2-7 Symbols Copying. 4-6 Symbol Properties dialog box (DxDesigner). 2-17 Property Verification. 3-79. E-1 Supporting mixed operating system usage. E-1 Moving. 4-27 Symbol Creation Wizard (DxDesigner). 2-24 Temp_Symbol Partition. 2-19 Updating Part Numbers in the PM Database. 2-19 —U— Units Display Settings. 5-1 tnsnames. F-9 SymbolLibs Subdirectory. 2-14 Setup Command Partition Search Paths. 2-72 Specifying Active Electrical Units Display. 2-19 Signal Analyzer. 5-3 Snap Grid Command. 2-55 Renaming (Dx only). 4-24 Library Manager Process Guide. 3-91 Cell Editor. 4-24. 2-20 Setting up in a Central Library. 2-29 Overview. D-2 Top Mount. 2-54 Heterogeneous. 2-63 Using wildcard characters. 1-18 Select Project File Dialog Box. 2-65 DxDatabook Data Editor in Library Manager. F-16 Troubleshooting Finding objects in a central library. 1-12 for objects in the tree. 4-24 Standard automation interfaces. 2-24 Templates. EXP2005 SPac1 Index-13 . 5-2 Templating a Design. 5-9. 1-5 Unreserving Partitions. 2-42 PM Working Directory. 2-20 UNIX environment variable settings. 2-52 Symbols in a DxD schematic. 2-55 Deleting.cbf File. 5-6 Symbol Placement. 2-57 Trace Spacings. 3-89 sysindex. 2-24 Unreserving partitions in a central library. 1-17 Padstack elements in the workspace tree. 4-20 Synchronization Utility. 1-6 DxDesigner to Expedition Library Manager. 4-9. 3-89 —W— WDIR variable. 4-6 viewdraw. 2-95 Model types in the workspace tree. 1-13 Properties Command. 5-8 Parts Manager Batch Update. F-2 Templates. 3-99 Central library flow type. A-1 Overview. 2-68. A-1 Work Subdirectory. 5-3 Libraries tab. EXP2005 SPac1 . 2-103 Reusable block properties.ini File. 2-62 Reports generated by Library Manager. 5-6 IBIS functionality in Part Editor. 5-11 Padstack Editor. 2-90 Pad and hole associations. A-14 DxDesigner to Library Manager Migration Wizard. 1-17 IBIS functionality in Library Services. 4-19 Viewing Associated objects. 2-12 Via. 3-79. 4-39 ViewPCB dialog box. 5-9 Open Script Form dialog box. 2-55 Part Editor. 1-7 Working Directory. 5-5 IBIS Models. 2-7 Workflow DC/DV to Expedition Library Manager. 3-70 Verification Settings. 2-8. 3-89 Project Workspace Tree. 4-11 —V— Validation Utility. 4-5 —Z— Zoom style. 4-16 Zooming. 2-5 Model files. 2-20 Workspace to Create Schematic Designs. 1-4 Wildcard character strings used for searches. 5-8 Library Services. 2-37 DxDesigner Project Translation Wizard. F-14 Visual IBIS Editor. 2-23 New Project Wizard. 2-65 Symbol Wizard to create DxD symbols. 2-5 Central library properties. 3-70 PM/PDB Synchronization.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Find command in Library Navigator Tree. 3-4 Working Units. 3-91 Parts Manager Validation. 2-74 Parts Manager Validation Utility. 5-1 Utilities Library PDF Documenter. 4-2 New Script Form dialog box. 1-15 Attachment Data. 1-13 Library PDF Documenter. 1-18 Wizards Dx Symbol Creation. 3-70 PMPDB Synchronization Utility. 5-4 Index-14 Library Manager Process Guide. 5-7 View Refresh Command. (c) for the license term.cfm IMPORTANT INFORMATION USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE RESTRICTIONS. If Mentor Graphics authorizes you to use the Beta Code. you will send to Mentor Graphics a written evaluation of the Beta Code. incorporate or embed copies of Mentor Graphics' real-time operating systems or other embedded software products into your products or applications without first signing or otherwise agreeing to a separate agreement with Mentor Graphics for such purpose. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE. Upon completion of your evaluation and testing. END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“Agreement”) This is a legal agreement concerning the use of Software between you. You agree that any written evaluations and all inventions. If you do not agree to these terms and conditions. and Mentor Graphics Corporation and Mentor Graphics (Ireland) Limited acting directly or through their subsidiaries (collectively “Mentor Graphics”).End-User License Agreement The latest version of the End-User License Agreement is available on-line at: www. USE OF SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR COMPLETE AND UNCONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT. a nontransferable. Mentor Graphics does NOT grant you any right to duplicate. Except for license agreements related to the subject matter of this license agreement which are physically signed by you and an authorized representative of Mentor Graphics. BETA CODE. A site is restricted to a one-half mile (800 meter) radius. Mentor Graphics grants to you a nontransferable. subject to payment of appropriate license fees. Mentor Graphics will have exclusive rights. including its strengths. You will contact Mentor Graphics periodically during your use of the Beta Code to discuss any malfunctions or suggested improvements. to execution of a single session by a single user on the authorized hardware or for a restricted period of time (such limitations may be technically implemented through the use of authorization codes or similar devices). as an authorized representative of the company acquiring the license. nonexclusive license for experimental use to test and evaluate the Beta Code without charge for a limited period of time specified by Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics’ standard policies and programs. object-code form. modifications. nontransferable. certify destruction of Software and all accompanying items within five days after receipt of Software and receive a full refund of any license fee paid. modifications or developments that Mentor Graphics conceived or made during or subsequent to this Agreement. title and interest in all such property. (b) use of Software. promptly return or. copies. GRANT OF LICENSE. license fees paid or services purchased. this Agreement and the applicable quotation contain the parties' entire understanding relating to the subject matter and supersede all prior or contemporaneous agreements. updates. weaknesses and recommended improvements. will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics. revisions. which may be limited. which Mentor Graphics may choose not to release commercially in any form. apply to the following: (a) relocation of Software. product improvements. including eligibility to receive telephone support. if received electronically. This grant and your use of the Beta Code shall not be construed as marketing or offering to sell a license to the Beta Code. 2. including any updates. The software programs. are copyrighted. and (d) on the computer hardware and at the site authorized by Mentor Graphics. nonexclusive license to reproduce and distribute executable files created using ESD compilers. including those based partly or wholly on your feedback. ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT PURCHASE ORDER TERMS AND CONDITIONS SHALL NOT APPLY. including the ESD run-time libraries distributed with ESD C and C++ compiler Software that are linked into a composite program as an integral part of your compiled computer program. (b) for your internal business purposes. documentation and design data (“Software”). trade secret and confidential information of Mentor Graphics or its licensors who maintain exclusive title to all Software and retain all rights not expressly granted by this Agreement. the end user. If you purchased a license to use embedded software development (“ESD”) Software. and (c) support services provided.com/terms_conditions/enduser. modifications. Software may contain code for experimental testing and evaluation (“Beta Code”). 3. for example.mentor. if applicable. and revisions. which may not be used without Mentor Graphics’ explicit authorization. you agree to evaluate and test the Beta Code under normal conditions as directed by Mentor Graphics. . Mentor Graphics grants to you a temporary. Mentor Graphics grants to you. Upon Mentor Graphics’ authorization. The provisions of this section 3 shall survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement. EMBEDDED SOFTWARE. which vary depending on Software. 1. nonexclusive license to use Software solely: (a) in machine-readable. provided that you distribute these files only in conjunction with your compiled computer program. unauthorized modification or improper installation. INCLUDING ATTORNEYS' FEES. excluding Mentor Graphics' competitors. reverse-engineer or in any way derive from Software any source code. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 6 SHALL SURVIVE THE EXPIRATION OR TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. You may not sublicense. assign or otherwise transfer Software. IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS' OR ITS LICENSORS' LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICE GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. LOSS. EXCEPT WHERE THIS EXCLUSION OR RESTRICTION OF LIABILITY WOULD BE VOID OR INEFFECTIVE UNDER APPLICABLE LAW. result in the immediate termination of the Agreement and licenses granted under this Agreement. . You shall not make Software available in any form to any person other than employees and on-site contractors. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS) WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT.” 5. EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS FROM ANY CLAIMS. WITH RESPECT TO SOFTWARE OR OTHER MATERIAL PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. 5. 5. IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. whether by operation of law or otherwise (“attempted transfer”). MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. EXPRESS. All copies shall remain the property of Mentor Graphics or its licensors. at Mentor Graphics' option. ALL OF WHICH ARE PROVIDED “AS IS. reverse-compile. TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY. COST. you shall not reverse-assemble. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. The provisions of this section 4 shall survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement. SPECIAL. the licensing and assignment provisions shall be binding upon your successors in interest and assigns. RESTRICTIONS ON USE. You must notify Mentor Graphics in writing of any nonconformity within the warranty period. Mentor Graphics warrants that during the warranty period Software.2. when properly installed. This warranty shall not be valid if Software has been subject to misuse. The warranty period is 90 days starting on the 15th day after delivery or upon installation. whichever first occurs. EXPENSE. OR (C) EXPERIMENTAL BETA CODE. NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS LICENSORS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF SOFTWARE IN ANY APPLICATION WHERE THE FAILURE OR INACCURACY OF THE SOFTWARE MIGHT RESULT IN DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY. Each copy must include all notices and legends embedded in Software and affixed to its medium and container as received from Mentor Graphics.1. Mentor Graphics does not warrant that Software will meet your requirements or that operation of Software will be uninterrupted or error free. 8. MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER. You shall maintain a record of the number and primary location of all copies of Software.4. INCIDENTAL. LIMITED WARRANTY. THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 5 ARE EXCLUSIVE. DAMAGE. MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO: (A) SERVICES. whose job performance requires access and who are under obligations of confidentiality. EITHER (A) REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID UPON RETURN OF SOFTWARE TO MENTOR GRAPHICS OR (B) MODIFICATION OR REPLACEMENT OF SOFTWARE THAT DOES NOT MEET THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. will substantially conform to the functional specifications set forth in the applicable user manual. NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS LICENSORS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTIES. this Agreement or the rights under it. OR LIABILITY. The terms of this Agreement. LIFE ENDANGERING ACTIVITIES. You shall take appropriate action to protect the confidentiality of Software and ensure that any person permitted access to Software does not disclose it or use it except as permitted by this Agreement. AT MENTOR GRAPHICS' OPTION. PROVIDED YOU HAVE OTHERWISE COMPLIED WITH THIS AGREEMENT. Except as otherwise permitted for purposes of interoperability as specified by applicable and mandatory local law. You may copy Software only as reasonably necessary to support the authorized use. and shall make those records available to Mentor Graphics upon request. without Mentor Graphics’ prior written consent and payment of Mentor Graphics’ then-current applicable transfer charges. (B) SOFTWARE WHICH IS LICENSED TO YOU FOR A LIMITED TERM OR LICENSED AT NO COST. IN THE CASE WHERE NO AMOUNT WAS PAID. INDEMNIFICATION. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 7 SHALL SURVIVE THE EXPIRATION OR TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. including copies merged with other software. Any attempted transfer without Mentor Graphics' prior written consent shall be a material breach of this Agreement and may. IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT. ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF SOFTWARE AS 7. including without limitation. MENTOR GRAPHICS' ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE. 6. For any other material breach under this Agreement. Microsoft or the applicable licensor is a third party beneficiary of this Agreement with the right to enforce the obligations set forth herein. 9. Japan. Software is subject to regulation by local laws and United States government agencies. 9. If Software was provided for limited term use. (c) the use of other than a current unaltered release of Software.S. . 9. 14.S. Use. You agree that you will not export any Software or direct product of Software in any manner without first obtaining all necessary approval from appropriate local and United States government agencies. RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE.3. information about the products. Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement upon 30 days written notice if you are in material breach and fail to cure such breach within the 30 day notice period. which prohibit export or diversion of certain products. Mentor Graphics shall have the right to review your software monitoring system and reasonably relevant records to confirm your compliance with the terms of this Agreement. or (h) infringement by you that is deemed willful. Government or a U. Canada. an addendum to this Agreement or U. INFRINGEMENT. The provisions of this section 14 shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement. Mentor Graphics may. or other local export laws. TERM.S. you agree to cease all use of Software and return it to Mentor Graphics or certify deletion and destruction of Software. 11. Contractor/manufacturer is Mentor Graphics Corporation. You understand and agree that as conditions to Mentor Graphics' obligations under this section you must: (a) notify Mentor Graphics promptly in writing of the action. (b) the modification of Software other than by Mentor Graphics. (b) procure for you the right to continue using Software. as applicable. any action brought against you alleging that Software infringes a patent or copyright or misappropriates a trade secret in the United States. This Agreement will immediately terminate upon notice if you exceed the scope of license granted or otherwise fail to comply with the provisions of Sections 1. 9. (d) the use of Software as part of an infringing process. or 4. (g) any Software provided by Mentor Graphics’ licensors who do not provide such indemnification to Mentor Graphics’ customers. (f) any Beta Code contained in Software. THIS SECTION IS SUBJECT TO SECTION 6 ABOVE AND STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY WITH RESPECT TO ANY ALLEGED PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT OR TRADE SECRET MISAPPROPRIATION BY ANY SOFTWARE LICENSED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. location and use of Software. In the case of (h) you shall reimburse Mentor Graphics for its attorney fees and other costs related to the action upon a final judgment.2. Mentor Graphics shall treat as confidential information all of your information gained as a result of any request or review and shall only use or disclose such information as required by law or to enforce its rights under this Agreement or addendum to this Agreement. (e) a product that you make. 9. and direct products of the products to certain countries and certain persons. this Agreement will automatically expire at the end of the authorized term. Oregon 97070-7777 USA. If an infringement claim is made. 12.227-19. You will monitor access to. Wilsonville. 2. Software was developed entirely at private expense and is commercial computer software provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS.1. 13. use or sell. Mentor Graphics will defend or settle. including all copies.Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52. and (c) grant Mentor Graphics sole authority and control of the defense or settlement of the action. less a reasonable allowance for use. With reasonable prior notice and during your normal business hours. 10.DESCRIBED IN SECTION 7. at its option and expense: (a) replace or modify Software so that it becomes noninfringing. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 8 SHALL SURVIVE THE EXPIRATION OR TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. Such review may include FLEXlm or FLEXnet report log files that you shall capture and provide at Mentor Graphics’ request. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY. to Mentor Graphics’ reasonable satisfaction. 8005 SW Boeckman Road. EXPORT. at its option and expense. (b) provide Mentor Graphics all reasonable information and assistance to defend or settle the action. This Agreement remains effective until expiration or termination. Upon any termination or expiration. or (c) require the return of Software and refund to you any license fee paid.4. Mentor Graphics will pay any costs and damages finally awarded against you that are attributable to the infringement action. or member state of the European Patent Office. Government subcontractor is subject to the restrictions set forth in the license agreement under which Software was obtained pursuant to DFARS 227. AUDIT RIGHTS. For any Software under this Agreement licensed by Mentor Graphics from Microsoft or other licensors.7202-3(a) or as set forth in subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software . Mentor Graphics has no liability to you if infringement is based upon: (a) the combination of Software with any product not furnished by Mentor Graphics. duplication or disclosure by the U. 15. All disputes arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of Portland. JURISDICTION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION. CONTROLLING LAW. in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the SIAC in effect at the time of the dispute. 17. IF YOU ARE LOCATED IN NORTH OR SOUTH AMERICA. invalid. THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE GOVERNED BY AND CONSTRUED UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF OREGON. Rev. unenforceable or illegal. This section shall not restrict Mentor Graphics’ right to bring an action against you in the jurisdiction where your place of business is located. Ireland when the laws of Ireland apply. Part No. Notwithstanding the foregoing. AND THE LAWS OF IRELAND IF YOU ARE LOCATED OUTSIDE OF NORTH OR SOUTH AMERICA. or Dublin. 16. Oregon when the laws of Oregon apply. all disputes in Asia (except for Japan) arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be resolved by arbitration in Singapore before a single arbitrator to be appointed by the Chairman of the Singapore International Arbitration Centre (“SIAC”) to be conducted in the English language. SEVERABILITY. 227900 . USA. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to this Agreement. whichever is lower. Please see the applicable Software documentation for details. 060210. such provision shall be severed from this Agreement and the remaining provisions will remain in full force and effect. Some Software may contain code distributed under a third party license agreement that may provide additional rights to you. within 30 days from the date of such invoice. which rules are deemed to be incorporated by reference in this section 15. PAYMENT TERMS AND MISCELLANEOUS. If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be void. waiver or excuse. Waiver of terms or excuse of breach must be in writing and shall not constitute subsequent consent. in the currency specified on the applicable invoice. Any past due invoices will be subject to the imposition of interest charges in the amount of one and one-half percent per month or the applicable legal rate currently in effect. This Agreement may only be modified in writing by authorized representatives of the parties. You will pay amounts invoiced.